You are on page 1of 418

2000-07

disco

DATA MAINTENANCE MANUAL

Automatic Dicing/Cutting Saws

DAD321 DAC351 DAD361 DAD341 DAD381


SOFTWARE VERSION 5.2 SERIES / 5.3 SERIES

Copyright of this document is owned by Disco Corporation ("Disco"). No part of this document may be copied or reproduced in any form or by any means, without the express written permission of Disco. Also, this document may not be disclosed or transferred to third parties. This document is printed on recyclable dust-free paper. - The blue paper is recyclable as used paper just like plain paper. - The cover paper and adhesive portions are non-recyclable. (Remove the cover and adhesive portions before recycling. Recycle the blue paper only.)

MOHEN353E-A

READ CAREFULLY BEFORE USING THIS MANUAL


Introduction This machine is a dicing saw for cutting silicon wafers and glass circuit boards (workpieces, hereafter). It has the rotary sections which rotate at high speed, the high-voltage sections which may cause electric shock hazards and the drive sections which may catch the operator's body and clothing. If the machine is not properly operated, safety hazards may cause serious injury or death. Read before using the machine Before using the machine, thoroughly read this manual and follow the instructions set forth in this manual. To assure safety in the operation and maintenance of the machine, it is important that you know the location of potential safety hazards. It is difficult for DISCO to foresee each and every potential safety hazard. However, this manual carries various precautionary notes and warnings to indicate the presence of all foreseeable potential safety hazards. For increased safety assurance, it is therefore essential that you observe all the precautions and other relevant instructions set forth in this manual. If you modify the machine without prior consent of DISCO or repair it in a manner not stated in this manual, the safety assurance features of the machine may be seriously affected. Never attempt to modify or repair the machine in a manner not approved by DISCO.

Hazard level The safety precautions set forth in this document are classified into DANGER, WARNING and CAUTION categories which represent three degree of hazards latent in the machine. These categories are defined as detailed below in accordance with the seriousness and probability level of the hazard. In addition to the above three safety precaution levels, NOTICE is used to give safety usage instructions to the user. Before using the machine, be sure to read and understand all the associated safety precautions set forth in the manual. Hazard levels are classified as follows: DANGER indicates an imminently hazardous situation which, if not avoided, will result in death or serious injury. This symbol is used for the incident in which the damage is serious and there is high probability of occurrence. WARNING indicates a potentially hazardous situation which, if not avoided, could result in death or serious injury. This symbol is used for the incident in which the damage is serious but there is not high probability of occurrence. CAUTION indicates a potentially hazardous situation which, if not avoided, may result in minor or moderate injury. This symbol is used for the incident in which the damage is slight and there is not high probability of occurrence. Indicates the safe way of using the machine as well as precautions to avoid accidents that may result in property damage.

DANGER

WARNING

CAUTION

NOTICE

Safety label Safety labels are affixed to the hazardous sections of the machine. Before using the machine, verify the label positions and thoroughly understand the precautions and warning indicated by the safety labels. Label Rotary Blade Label
WARNING WARNING

Hazard Level

Driving Section Label


CAUTION CAUTION

Meaning of Label It is possible that your hands and fingers may be cut by the rotating blade. Observe the following precautions for at least 15 seconds for 321/351/361 or 20 seconds for 341/381 until the spindle comes to a complete stop: - Do not place your hands or fingers near the blade or flange. - Ensure that the splash cover is kept closed. It is possible that yours hands and fingers may be caught and injured by the driving section. While the power is ON, ensure that the cover is kept closed.

Electrical Shock Hazard Label


WARNING

Use care to avoid possible electrical shock hazard.

General Label

General caution/warning/danger label.


WARNING

INTRODUCTION
About this manual This Data Maintenance Manual describes the screen details related to certain operations and procedures for setting operational data and machine operation data concerning Automatic Dicing/Cutting Saws 3*1 Series Models DAD321, DAC351, DAD361, DAD341 and DAD381 for data maintenance personnel. To ensure safety To ensure safety, be sure to thoroughly read and understand the contents of this manual before starting any operation of the machine. Note that this manual is based on the software versions of 5.2 and 5.3 series. When performing data setup or operation related to data, be sure to follow the procedures set forth in this manual. Definition of a manager and an operator This manual defines a manager and an operator as follows: Category Manager Applicable Personnel Management representative Maintenance personnel Operator Job The person who is responsible for overall management of machines and operators. The qualified person who received DISCO machine maintenance training.

Data maintenance The qualified person who is responsible for personnel management of software data of the machine. Operator The person who operates the machine to process workpieces.

Intro-1

Documentation for this machine The following five written manuals are provided for 3*1 series machine. This manual is the Data Maintenance Manual shaded in the list below. Manual Installation Manual Who should read Contents Maintenance Operational procedures for personnel machine installation and adjustment Operator Operational procedures to be performed by operators Data maintenance personnel Maintenance personnel Maintenance personnel Screen contents for data entry and data entry procedures Servicing, inspection and adjustment procedures to be performed by customers Machine specifications, circuit diagrams, illustrations and part lists

Operation Manual Data Maintenance Manual Maintenance Manual Technical Reference

Unit notation International System of Unit is adopted to express any unit. The values in the parenthesis are reference data. Also, all the pressure values are expressed in gauge pressure.

Intro-2

Component Diagram The diagram and the table below show names and functions of each component. [321/351/361] [341/381]
Operation control section Cutting section Cutting section

Operation control section

Name Cutting Section Operation Control Section

Function Cuts workpieces. Keys on the operation panel are used for data entries, and the function keys perform operations. Also, the monitor displays operation-related information and microscope images in accordance with operation panel manipulation.

Intro-3

External View [321/351/361] The diagram and the table below show the external view, names and functions of each component.
Signal tower Disk drive Flowmeter Key switch Vacuum gauge Splash cover Operation panel Maintenance switch Light intensity adjustment dial EMO switch Microscope Chuck table Monitor POWER lamp

Name Operation Panel Splash Cover Vacuum Gauge Flowmeter Disk Drive Signal Tower

Monitor POWER Lamp Key Switch Maintenance Switch Light Intensity Adjustment Dial EMO Switch Microscope Chuck Table

Function Consists of operation control keys. Prevents water from splashing around during spindle rotation and functions as a safety device. Indicates the chuck table vacuum pressure to attract the workpiece to the chuck table. Indicates the flow rate of the wheel coolant water. Functions as an external storage device. [Option accessory] Indicates the machine operating status with the green and yellow lamps. If an error occurs, the red lamp flashes on and off. Displays operating information and microscope images. Lights while the power is ON. Used to turn ON and OFF the machine by inserting and rotating the key. Used by the maintenance personnel. Adjusts the microscope image light intensity. Functions as the emergency stop switch. When pressed, shuts off the electrical power supply. Used to view workpieces for alignment and other purposes. Used to mount workpieces on it.

Intro-4

External View [341/381] The diagram and the table below show external view, names and functions of each component.
Signal tower Monitor

Microscope Splash cover Flowmeter Vacuum gauge Maintenance switch POWER lamp
POWER AXIS LOCK ON OFF START

Light intensity adjustment dial Chuck table


MANUAL AXIS RELEASE REMOTE LAMP VOLUME

EMO switch

Operation panel Key switch Disk drive

Name Chuck Table EMO Switch Operation Panel Vacuum Gauge Flowmeter Splash Cover Microscope Monitor Signal Tower

Disk Drive Key Switch POWER Lamp Maintenance Switch Light Intensity Adjustment Dial

Function Used to mount workpieces on it. Functions as the emergency stop switch. When pressed, shuts off the electrical power supply. Consists of operation control keys. Indicates the chuck table vacuum pressure to attract the workpiece to the chuck table. Indicates the flow rate of the wheel coolant water. Prevents water from splashing around during spindle rotation and functions as a safety device. Used to view workpieces for alignment and other purposes. Displays operating information and microscope images. Indicates the machine operating status with the green and yellow lamps. If an error occurs, the red lamp flashes on and off. Functions as an external storage device. [Option accessory] Used to turn ON and OFF the machine by inserting and rotating the key. Lights while the power is ON. Used by the maintenance personnel. Adjusts the microscope image light intensity.

Intro-5

Axis Arrangement Diagram [321/351/361] The diagram and the table below show axis arrangement, names and functions of each axis.
Spindle axis Z-axis

-axis (except 351)

Y-axis X-axis

Main body frame

Front

Name X-axis Y-axis Z-axis -axis Spindle Shaft Section Main Body Frame

Function Moves the chuck table to the right and the left. Moves the spindle shaft and the microscope forward and backward. Moves the spindle up and down. Rotates the chuck table. Rotates a blade at a high speed. Supports the machine main body.

Intro-6

Axis Arrangement Diagram [341/381] The diagram and the table below show axis arrangement, names and functions of each axis.
Y-axis Z-axis Spindle axis

-axis
X-axis Main body frame

Front Electrical system section

Name X-axis Y-axis Z-axis -axis Electrical System Section Spindle Shaft Section Main Body Frame

Function Moves the chuck table to the right and the left. Moves the spindle shaft and the microscope forward and backward. Moves the spindle up and down. Rotates the chuck table. Controls machine operation. Rotates a blade at a high speed. Supports the machine main body.

Intro-7

CONTENTS
READ CAREFULLY BEFORE USING THIS MANUAL INTRODUCTION Intro-1 CONTENTS Contents-1 A. IMPORTANT SAFETY INFORMATION A-1
1. 2. General Safety Precautions A-2 Safety Precautions to Be Observed During Operation A-5

3. Inherently Hazardous Areas and Ways to Avoid Hazards A-9 4. 5. EMO Switch A-13 Power Circuit Breaker A-16
6-1. Interlock Mechanism of Splash Cover A-20

6. Interlock Mechanism A-18 7. Safety Labels A-22

B. WHOM TO CONTACT IN AN EMERGENCY B-1

Contents-1

CONTENTS
C. GENERAL DESCRIPTION OF DATA SCREEN OPERATIONS C-1
1. 2. Data Screen Structure C-2 Operation Panel C-18
2-1. 2-2. Operation Panel Key Layout C-19 Names and Functions of Touch-Activated Keys C-20 2-2-1. Keys for start/stop and alarm cancel and Z-EM key ........................... C-21 2-2-2. Single-function keys ........................................................................... C-22 2-2-3. Keys to setup, call and edit data......................................................... C-23 2-2-4. Axis operation keys ............................................................................ C-25 2-2-5. Auxiliary key ....................................................................................... C-28

D. DATA MAINTENANCE D-1


1. Data Setup/Operation Screens Used by Operators D-3
1-1. 1-2. MAIN MENU Screen [Screen 0.0] D-5 Cutting Related Screens D-9 1-2-1. Auto cutting related screens............................................................... D-10
1-2-1-1. AUTO CUTTING screen [screen 1.0] --- DAD mode --- .....................................D-11 1-2-1-2. DAC ALIGNMENT screen [screen 1.0] --- DAC mode --- ..................................D-13 1-2-1-3. STATUS OF CUTTING screen --- DAD mode ---...............................................D-15 1-2-1-4. STATUS OF CUTTING screen --- DAC mode ---...............................................D-17 1-2-1-5. BLADE INFORMATION 2 screen .......................................................................D-19

1-2-2.

Semi auto cutting related screens ...................................................... D-22


SEMI AUTO CUT screen [screen 2.0] --- DAD mode --- ....................................D-23 SINGLE CHANNEL ALIGNMENT screen ..........................................................D-25

1-2-2-1. 1-2-2-2.

1-3.

Screens Related to Correction during Cutting D-26 1-3-1. STOP CORRECTION screen (cutting correction screen) .................. D-27 1-3-2. KERF CHECK DATA 1 screen (stop correction process)................... D-29 1-3-3. KERF CHECK DATA 2 screen (stop correction process) [optional accessory] ........ D-31 1-3-4. LIGHT ADJUSTMENT screen ---341/381 only--- ............................... D-34 Device Data Related Screens D-35 1-4-1. Copying, deleting or renaming the device data .................................. D-36
1-4-1-1. DEVICE DATA LIST screen [screen 4.0] ...........................................................D-37 1-4-1-2. Entering the data password ................................................................................D-39 1-4-1-3. DEVICE DATA COPY screen.............................................................................D-40

1-4.

Contents-2

CONTENTS
1-4-1-4. DEVICE DATA DELETE screen .........................................................................D-41 1-4-1-5. DEVICE DATA RENAME screen........................................................................D-42

1-4-2.

Device data related screens --- DAD mode --- ................................... D-44

1-4-2-1. DEVICE DATA 1 screen [screen 4.2] .................................................................D-45 1-4-2-2. DEVICE DATA 2 screen [screen 4.3] .................................................................D-48 1-4-2-3. DEVICE DATA 3 screen [screen 4.4] .................................................................D-50 1-4-2-4. KERF CHECK FUNCTION PARAMETER screen [screen 4.7]..........................D-52 1-4-2-5. PRECUT DATA (auto control) screen [screen 6.1.1] .........................................D-56 1-4-2-6. PRECUT DATA (number of lines control) screen [screen 6.1.1]........................D-58 1-4-2-7. PRECUT DATA (length control) screen [screen 6.1.1].......................................D-60

1-4-3.

Device data related screens --- DAC mode --- ................................... D-62
DEVICE DATA 1 screen [screen 4.2] .................................................................D-63 DEVICE DATA 2 screen [screen 4.3] (normal program) ....................................D-66 DEVICE DATA 3 screen [screen 4.4] (normal program) ....................................D-68 DEVICE DATA 2 screen [screen 4.3] (special program)....................................D-70 DEVICE DATA 3 screen [screen 4.4] (special program)....................................D-75 SIMULATION screen ..........................................................................................D-80

1-4-3-1. 1-4-3-2. 1-4-3-3. 1-4-3-4. 1-4-3-5. 1-4-3-6.

1-5.

Blade Maintenance Related Screens D-81 1-5-1. BLADE MAINTENANCE screen [screen 5.0] ..................................... D-82 1-5-2. Blade replacement related screens .................................................... D-83
1-5-2-1. 1-5-2-2. BLADE REPLACEMENT screen [screen 5.1] ....................................................D-84 BLADE SELECTER screen [screen 5.1.5] .........................................................D-86

1-5-3.

ADJUSTMENT OF B.B.D. (Blade Breakage Detector) screen [screen 5.2] [optional accessory] ...... D-88 1-5-4. Hairline alignment related screens ..................................................... D-89
1-5-4-1. HAIRLINE ALIGNMENT screen [screen 5.5] .....................................................D-90 1-5-4-2. HAIRLINE ALIGNMENT IN PROGRESS screen [screen 5.5.1] ........................D-92

1-5-5. 1-6.

BLADE LIFE/WEAR INFORMATION screen [screen 5.6].................. D-94

Dressing Related Screens D-96 1-6-1. About dressing ................................................................................... D-97 1-6-2. BLADE DRESS DATA screen [screen 5.4] ........................................ D-98 1-6-3. DRESS IN PROGRESS screen [screen 5.4.1]................................. D-100 Setup Related Screens D-102 1-7-1. SETUP screen [screen 5.3] .............................................................. D-103 1-7-2. CHUCK TABLE SETUP screen [screen 5.3.1] ................................. D-104 1-7-3. POINTED CHUCK TABLE SETUP screen [screen 5.3.2] ................ D-106 1-7-4. NONCONTACT SETUP screen [screen 5.3.3] [optional accessory]........................ D-108 1-7-5. SENSOR CALIBRATION SETUP screen [screen 5.3.4] [optional accessory]........ D-110 1-7-6. NONCONTACT SETUP SENSOR CLEANING screen [screen 5.8] [optional accessory] ...... D-112 Error Recovery Related Screens D-113

1-7.

1-8.

Contents-3

CONTENTS
1-8-1. ERROR RECOVERY (KERF CHECK) screen [optional accessory].......................... D-114 1-8-2. ERROR RECOVERY (B.B.D) screen [optional accessory] .............. D-116 1-8-3. ERROR RECOVERY (SETUP) screen [optional accessory]............ D-117

2.

Cutting Data Setup D-118


2-1. Cutting Function D-119 2-1-1. Cutting shape ................................................................................... D-120 2-1-2. Cutting mode .................................................................................... D-121
2-1-2-1. 2-1-2-2. 2-1-2-3. 2-1-2-4. 2-1-2-5. 2-1-2-6. 2-1-2-7. A cutting mode ..................................................................................................D-122 B cutting mode ..................................................................................................D-123 AS cutting mode................................................................................................D-124 BS cutting mode................................................................................................D-125 B ZKEEP cutting mode .....................................................................................D-126 BS ZKEEP cutting mode...................................................................................D-126 A UP/AS UP cutting mode ................................................................................D-127 About blade wear compensation (Z-axis auto-down) .......................................D-129 Blade wear compensation precautions.............................................................D-130

2-1-3.

Blade wear compensation function................................................... D-128

2-1-3-1. 2-1-3-2.

2-2.

Cutting Data Setup Example --- DAD Mode --- D-133 2-2-1. Cutting data setup example 1 --- A/B/A UP/B ZKEEP cutting mode ---............................................ D-134
2-2-1-1. Description of cutting data <example 1> ..........................................................D-135 2-2-1-2. Procedures for data setup <example 1> ..........................................................D-139

2-2-2.

Cutting data setup example 2 --- AS/BS/AS UP/BS ZKEEP cutting mode --- .................................. D-146

2-2-2-1. Description of cutting data <example 2> ..........................................................D-147 2-2-2-2. Procedures for data setup <example 2> ..........................................................D-151

2-2-3.

Cutting data setup example 3 --- AS cutting mode/multiple indexing/rectangular cutting --- ............ D-156

2-2-3-1. Description of cutting data <example 3> ..........................................................D-157 2-2-3-2. Procedures for data setup <example 3> ..........................................................D-161

2-2-4.

Cutting data setup example 4 --- AS cutting mode/multi-channel/hexagonal-shaped chip --- .......... D-166

2-2-4-1. Description of cutting data <example 4> ..........................................................D-167 2-2-4-2. Procedures for data setup <example 4> ..........................................................D-171

2-2-5. 2-3.

Device data registration.................................................................... D-177

Cutting Data Setup Example --- DAC Mode --- D-178 2-3-1. Cutting data setup example 5 --- A cutting mode ---......................... D-179
2-3-1-1. Description of cutting data <example 5> ..........................................................D-180 2-3-1-2. Procedures for data setup <example 5> ..........................................................D-182

2-3-2.

Cutting data setup example 6 --- A cutting mode/normal program/alternately using two different index and amount left uncut --- ........... D-189

2-3-2-1. Description of cutting data <example 6> ..........................................................D-190 2-3-2-2. Procedures for data setup <example 6> ..........................................................D-192

Contents-4

CONTENTS
2-3-3. Cutting data setup example 7 --- A cutting mode/normal program/multiple indexing/ multi-level cutting ---........... D-197
2-3-3-1. Description of cutting data <example 7> ..........................................................D-198 2-3-3-2. Procedures for data setup <example 7> ..........................................................D-201

2-3-4.

Cutting data setup example 8 --- A cutting mode/special program --- .............................................. D-206

2-3-4-1. Description of cutting data <example 8> ..........................................................D-207 2-3-4-2. Procedures for data setup <example 8> ..........................................................D-210 2-3-4-3. Special mode explanation screen [HELP screen] ............................................D-215

3.

Setup Data D-218


3-1. 3-2. 3-3. 3-4. 3-5. Specifying the Setup Data D-219 Outline of Chuck Table Setup Operation D-225 Outline of Noncontact Setup Operation [Optional Accessory] D-227 Outline of Sensor Calibration Setup [Optional Accessory] D-229 Setting the Auto-setup Data [Optional accessory] D-231

4.

Operator Maintenance D-233


4-1. 4-2. OPERATOR MAINTENANCE Screen [Screen 6.0] D-235 Precut Data Maintenance D-237 4-2-1. PRECUT DATA LIST screen [screen 6.1] ........................................ D-239 4-2-2. Copying the precut data ................................................................... D-241 4-2-3. Writing the precut data ..................................................................... D-244
4-2-3-1. 4-2-3-2. 4-2-3-3. Precut data (AUTO) ..........................................................................................D-245 Precut data (LINE) ............................................................................................D-248 Precut data (LENGTH) .....................................................................................D-251

4-3. 4-4.

Measure Function D-254 Function Data Maintenance D-258 4-4-1. FUNCTION DATA MAINTENANCE 1 SCREEN [screen 6.3]........... D-259 4-4-2. FUNCTION DATA MAINTENANCE 2 SCREEN [screen 6.3.3]........ D-263 4-4-3. PROGRAM DATA MAINTENANCE screen [screen 6.3.5]............... D-268 Operation Data Maintenance D-271 Signal Tower Data Maintenance D-274 Alignment Data Maintenance D-276 External Memory Device [Optional Accessory] D-279 4-8-1. EXTERNAL MEMORY UNIT screen [screen 6.7]............................. D-281 4-8-2. FORMAT (FLOPPY DISKETTE) screen [screen 6.7.1].................... D-283 4-8-3. DEVICE DATA LOAD screen [screen 6.7.2] .................................... D-285 4-8-4. DEVICE DATA SAVE screen [screen 6.7.3] .................................... D-288 4-8-5. DEVICE DATA DELETE screen [screen 6.7.4] ................................ D-291
Contents-5

4-5. 4-6. 4-7. 4-8.

CONTENTS
4-8-6. 4-8-7. 4-8-8. 4-8-9. 4-8-10. 4-8-11. PRECUT DATA LOAD screen [screen 6.7.5] ................................... D-294 PRECUT DATA SAVE screen [screen 6.7.6] ................................... D-297 Auto batch execution........................................................................ D-300 Machine data backup function.......................................................... D-301 Machine data restoring function ..................................................... D-302 Device data exchange.................................................................... D-303

5.

Machine Maintenance D-304


5-1. 5-2. Calling up the MACHINE MAINTENANCE Screen [Screen 7.0] D-306 Axis Idling Setup D-308 5-2-1. Calling up the AXIS IDLING CREATION screen [screen 7.2] .......... D-309 5-2-2. Axis idling execution......................................................................... D-311 Rotation Alignment (0 Point Adjustment) D-312 5-3-1. Rotation alignment through cutting................................................... D-313
5-3-1-1. Cutting a dummy work ......................................................................................D-314 5-3-1-2. Rotation alignment through cutting ...................................................................D-318

5-3.

5-3-2.

Rotation alignment through cutting pass .......................................... D-321

5-3-2-1. Setting a dummy work ......................................................................................D-322 5-3-2-2. Rotation alignment through cutting pass ..........................................................D-325

5-3-3.

ROTATION ALIGNMENT EXPLANATION screen [screen HELP] ... D-327

INDEX Index-1 ADDRESS LIST IN AN EVENT OF AN ACCIDENT

Contents-6

A. IMPORTANT SAFETY INFORMATION


Contents of this chapter This chapter describes various precautions to assure safety in the operation and safety protective functions employed in this machine. Section No. Title 1 General Safety Precautions Contents - Safety precautions to be understood before operation - Safety precautions to be observed during operation - Safety precautions that operators should understand before operation - Safety precautions that operators should observe during performing any work - Potentially hazardous sections and the ways to avoid dangers - Construction of the EMO (Emergency OFF) switch - Function of the EMO switch - Construction of the power circuit breaker - Function of the power circuit breaker - Construction of the interlock mechanism - Function of the interlock mechanism - Type of safety labels - Affixing positions of safety labels

Safety Precautions to Be Observed During Operation

3 4

Inherently Dangerous Areas and Way to Avoid EMO Switch

Power Circuit Breaker

Interlock Mechanism

Safety Labels

A-1

1. General Safety Precautions


General safety precautions This section describes the general safety precautions that should be understood before operation and observed during operation.

NOTICE

- Responsibility for instructing workers Instruct the operators and data maintenance personnel to read the safety precautions set forth in the Data Maintenance Manual before proceeding to work. Also, if the worker performs various tasks, direct them to read the points of note concerning the safety given in the respective manuals. The written instructions for this machine are Installation manual, Operation manual, Data Maintenance manual, Maintenance manual and Technical Reference. - Responsibility for instructing workers who don't seem to understand the points of note For the workers who don't seem to understand what is given in the manuals, explain the safety items described in the chapter so that they understand what the points mean. - Periodic inspection The machine must be inspected on a periodic basis. If any accidents occur while an appropriate periodic inspection program is not adhered to, DISCO is not responsible for the results. - Maintenance personnel Maintenance must be conducted by qualified personnel who have received the maintenance training. - Proper installation of safety device If the covers or other parts with safety interlocks are broken, immediately stop the machine and repair broken devices. - Air exhaust, water drainage and contamination control Since harmful substance may be generated depending on the cutting work type and machining characteristics, air exhaust, water drainage and contamination control/disposal must be properly completed in compliance with applicable environmental protection codes.

A-2

General safety precautions (Continued)

NOTICE

- Exhaust sampling port The machine requires an exhaust operation. When measuring the exhaust for the machine to fulfill legal requirements, use the sampling port, which is provided at the location indicated below. (connection port: Rc (PT) 1/8 female) [321/351/361]

[A] View [A]

Duct Sampling port [Rc(PT)1/8 female]

[341/381]

Sampling port [Rc(PT)1/8 female]

Duct

A-3

General safety precautions (Continued)

NOTICE

- Facility side interlock connection terminal (Special user specification) To permit the facility side to provide air exhaust and water drainage interlock, the machine is equipped with air exhaust and water drainage reservoir tank interlock connection terminals. When connecting these terminals to the facility side interlock system, contact your nearest DISCO office. - Machine installation environment Comply with the recommended machine installation conditions (such as room temperature, humidity or temperature of spindle coolant water and wheel coolant water). If the machine is installed in an environment that does not conform to the installation conditions recommended by DISCO, rust formation may occur due to moisture condensation or other factor, thereby adversely affecting the cutting accuracy. For the recommended environmental conditions, see the section C-1, [Installation Specifications and Environment] of Installation Manual. - Machine relocation/disuse In the case of relocation or disuse of the machine, the presentation of detailed precautionary notes and the management of new installation site data will be done by DISCO. If you want to relocate or disuse the machine, contact your nearest DISCO office or DISCO service office.

A-4

2. Safety Precautions to Be Observed During Operation


Safety precautions to be observed during operation This section describes the safety precautions that operators should understand before starting operation and observe during operation.

WARNING

- Rotary blade section The splash cover is constructed so that it does not open during spindle rotation. However, the blade has a sharp edge. Therefore, if your fingers or hands come into contact with it, they may be scarred or cut off. Do not place your fingers or hands under the blade. During spindle rotation, do not touch the flange or blade or remove the flange cover. It takes up to about 15 seconds for 321/351/361 or 20 seconds for 341/381 until the spindle comes to a complete stop. When the power fails, it takes the same time until the spindle rotation stops completely. - Securing flange lock nut Be sure that flange lock nut is tightened to the specified torque. If the nut is tightened to a torque smaller than specified, the nut may come off, causing flange separation. Flange separation may cause injury to personnel or damage to the machine.
Lock nut

- Spindle rotation speed The spindle rotating speed varies with the outside diameter of the installed blade. If you rotate the spindle at a speed higher than the maximum permissible speed for the blade outside diameter, blades may be broken or flanges may come off. This could result in injury to the personnel or damage to the machine. Be sure that the employed spindle rotating speed fits for the outside diameter of the installed blade. The maximum permissible spindle rotating speed is as follows: 60,000 min-1 (60,000 rpm) for 2-inch blade [341/381] 40,000 min-1 (40,000 rpm) for 2-inch blade [321/351/361] 30,000 min-1 (30,000 rpm) for 3-inch blade 15,000 min-1 (15,000 rpm) for 4-inch blade 12,500 min-1 (12,500 rpm) for 5-inch blade

A-5

Safety precautions to be observed during operation (Continued)

WARNING

- Moving parts If you place your fingers or hands in a motor moving part, they may be caught or cut off. Do not touch any moving parts during operation. Do not put your fingers or hands into the operating space of any moving parts. - When the machine interior and floor are wet with water If you operate the machine while its interior and floor get wet with water, you may receive electric shock that could result in serious injury or death. If the machine is wet with water, do not turn ON the facility power supply until it dries. If the floor is wet with water, turn OFF the facility power supply and wipe the floor dry. - Splash cover lock When the machine power is ON, the splash cover can be locked only during spindle rotation. If the machine power turns OFF during spindle rotation (by EMO switch activation, power failure, etc.), the splash cover is locked and does not open even when the machine is OFF. If it is necessary to open the splash cover while the machine power cannot be restored, contact the maintenance personnel (for detailed interlock operation descriptions, see the section 6 of this chapter, [ Interlock Mechanism] ). - For the machine incorporating UPS [optional accessory] If the facility power supply is shut off while the machine power switch is ON, the UPS (Uninterruptible Power Supply) operates for 30 seconds. For this moment, the line between the machine main body and facility power supply shut-off contact point is energized to carry a hazardous voltage. Do not place your hands in the live parts because you may receive an electric shock that could result in serious injury or death. - Broken workpiece removal and cleanup If an attempt is made to remove broken workpiece or clean the work area with bare hands, your fingers may be cut, stuck or otherwise injured by broken workpiece. When removing any broken workpiece or clean the work area, use tweezers. When cleaning the work area, be sure to wear protective gloves and safety goggles. Before removing broken workpiece or cleaning the work area, make sure that all axes come to a stop.

A-6

Safety precautions to be observed during operation (Continued)

CAUTION

Operating the machine while it is wet The operation panel is waterproofed. But if the machine is operated while the operation panel is considerably wet, electrical leakage may occur and cause erratic machine operation, thereby causing an accident. If the operation panel is considerably wet, wipe it dry with a dry cloth.

NOTICE

- Turning the power back ON If you turn ON the power immediately after power OFF, the machine may break down. When turning ON the power, be sure that at least one minute has elapsed since last power OFF. - Spindle idling at the end of each day's operation The spindle section is designed so that the spindle axis is lifted by means of air. If the spindle stops without being allowed to idle and the air supply is shut off at machine shutdown, workpiece cutting chips may enter the spindle section, causing the spindle to gall. Before bringing the spindle to a stop for machine shutdown, be sure to allow it idle for 5 to 15 minutes with the wheel coolant water flowing and then for 15 to 20 minutes with the wheel coolant water supply shut off. - Spindle seizure If the air supply is shut off during spindle rotation, the spindle seizes up. Therefore, be sure to stop spindle rotation before shutting off the air supply. - Flange removal/installation In flange removal and installation, the spindle may gall. To avoid such a problem, make sure that air is supplied to the spindle section. - Setup Before performing setup, be sure to allow the spindle to idle for a period of 10 minutes. If the spindle is not allowed to idle for an adequate period of time after blade replacement, the setup positions may vary. When using the washer blade, conduct dressing (truing) after blade replacement and perform setup while the blade is properly rounded. If setup is attempted while the blade is not properly rounded by truing, the reference setup positions are displaced so that the workpiece cut depth may vary.

A-7

Safety precautions to be observed during operation (Continued)

NOTICE

- Abnormal machine operation If the machine performs an abnormal operation, its investigation, adjustment and repair must be done by a qualified person (maintenance personnel). - Precautions during operation or maintenance While the machine is in operation or being serviced, be sure that the power, air or water supply is not turned ON or OFF by anyone else. Observe this precaution strictly particularly when the machine shares the same facilities with other equipment. - Spindle free-run To avoid spindle free-running, stop spindle rotation before turning the power OFF. - Do not forget tools or materials Make sure that there are no tools or materials left inside the machine. - Installation space When installing the machine, be sure to provide an adequate maintenance space. Do not place anything in the maintenance space under normal conditions.

A-8

3. Inherently Hazardous Areas and Ways to Avoid Hazards


Summary of this section This section illustrates the hazardous sections that you must pay due attention during data maintenance operation and the ways to avoid these potential hazards by hazard category. Amputation hazardous areas [321/351/361] The 321, 351 and 361 machines have following sections that involve potential hazards of amputation. The location of hazardous sections and avoidance methods are as follows:

Amputation hazardous areas This machine has the spindle axis which rotates at high speed.

Spindle (Blade rotation section)

The splash cover mechanism is designed so that the cover does not open during spindle rotation. Inherently Hazardous Area Hazards Rotating spindle As the spindle rotates at high speed, if you insert your fingers or hands during spindle rotation, they may be cut off. When opening the splash cover, verify that spindle rotation stops while the cover is closed.

Avoidance Method

A-9

Amputation hazardous areas [341/381] The 341 and 381 machines have following sections that involve potential hazards of amputation. The location of hazardous sections and avoidance methods are as follows:

Amputation hazardous areas This machine has the spindle axis which rotates at high speed.

Spindle (Blade rotation section)

The splash cover mechanism is designed so that the cover does not open during spindle rotation. Inherently Hazardous Area Hazards Rotating spindle As the spindle rotates at high speed, if you insert your fingers or hands during spindle rotation, they may be cut off. When opening the splash cover, verify that spindle rotation stops while the cover is closed.

Avoidance Method

A-10

Hazardous areas of getting caught or amputation [321/351/361] The 321, 351 and 361 machines have following sections that involve potential hazards of caught or cut off by the machine. The location of hazardous sections and avoidance methods are as follows:

Hazardous areas where your fingers/hands may be caught or cut off This machine has the motor driven sections such as the X-axis section, Y-axis section, Z-axis section, -axis section (except the 351) and microscope section.

Microscope section Details of machine internal construction - axis section X-axis section Z-axis section

Y-axis section

Inherently Hazardous Area

Hazards

Avoidance Method

- X-axis section - Y-axis section - Z-axis section - -axis section - Microscope section If you insert your fingers or hands into these sections while the driving section is driven by motor, there may be caught or cut off. Make sure that the drive section stops completely.

A-11

Hazardous areas of getting caught or amputation [341/381] The 341 and 381 machines have following sections that involve potential hazards of caught or cut off by the machine. The location of hazardous sections and avoidance methods are as follows:

Hazardous areas where your fingers/hands may be caught or cut off This machine has the driving sections for the X-axis section, Y-axis section, Z-axis section, -axis section and microscope section.
Microscope section Details of machine internal construction Y-axis section Z-axis section

-axis section

X-axis section

Inherently Hazardous Area

Hazards

Avoidance Method

- X-axis section - Y-axis section - Z-axis section - -axis section - Microscope section If you insert your fingers or hands into these sections while the drive section is driven by motor, they may be caught or cut off. Make sure that the drive section stops completely.

A-12

4. EMO Switch
WARNING

When you press the EMO switch, the power turns OFF but electrical power is still supplied to the machine. Therefore, do not touch any live parts. If you reach into energized sections even after pressing the EMO switch, you may receive an electric shock that could result in serious injury or death.

NOTICE

When the power circuit breaker turns OFF during spindle rotation, the spindle enters the free-running state. It takes up to about 15 seconds for 321/351/361 or 20 seconds for 341/381 until the spindle comes to a complete stop. Do not shut off the air supply until spindle rotation comes to a stop. About EMO switch EMO switch is the emergent hazard avoidance switch to be used when an abnormal operation or failure of the machine occurs during machine operation.

To Activate EMO Switch To Deactivate EMO Switch

Press the EMO switch.

Rotate the EMO switch knob clockwise (in the direction the arrows). The switch then pops up and turns OFF. What will Happen After When you press the EMO switch, the power turns EMO Switch is OFF. Pressed If the EMO switch is pressed during spindle rotation, it takes up to about 15 seconds until the spindle comes to a complete stop for the 321/351/361 machine and 20 seconds for the 341/381 machine. In this case, the splash cover does not open.

A-13

EMO switch position

[321/351/361]
EMO switch

[341/381]

EMO switch

A-14

Live power lines during emergency stop

PL MCB ELB NF1 NF2 KMC1 KMC2 SPMD1

[for SEMI version only] PS 200V Line 24V Line PS KMC3 DC Power XSMD
DDMD [Except 351] TR2 ZPMD YPMD

NF3

TR1

AC100V

Key SW EM SW Cover SW

Safty PCB

Control Box Hot Line

A-15

5. Power Circuit Breaker


About power circuit breaker When the current beyond the capacity flows through the machine during operation, the power circuit breaker automatically shuts off the current supply to the machine. The power receiving indicator lamp glows while the facility power is supplied. Two versions of the circuit breaker are provided for this machine: the standard version which complies with CE marking and SEMI version. [Standard (CE) version] [SEMI version]
Power receiving indicator lamp Power receiving indicator lamp

Circuit breaker lever

Circuit breaker lever

[Standard (CE) version] ON TRIP Turns the power ON. When the applied overcurrent load is beyond the capacity, the circuit breaker lever automatically moves into this position, shutting off the power supply. Turns the power OFF. To turn the power back ON, rotate the lever into the "ON" position. When the power turns OFF at the "TRIP" position, rotate the lever into this position and then rotate the lever into the "ON" position to turn ON the power.

OFF

RESET

[SEMI version] I + Turns the power ON. When the power turns OFF at the "+" position, rotate the lever into the "O" position and then rotate the lever into the "I" position to turn ON the power. Turns the power OFF. To turn the power back ON, rotate the lever into the "I" position.

A-16

Power circuit breaker locations [321/351/361]

Power circuit breaker

[341/381]

Power circuit breaker

A-17

6. Interlock Mechanism
About interlock mechanism The interlock mechanism is the safety device to prevent potential operational hazards. This machine is equipped with the following interlock devices: Section Splash cover section Water case section Interlock Devices Employed (1) Safety switch (2) Lock cylinder (3) Water leakage sensor [optional accessory] Function Locks the splash cover for safety assurance. Detects water leakage in the water case [optional accessory].

Hazards to be detected by the interlock devices of this machine are categorized as below: Hazard Detector (1) Safety switch (2) Lock cylinder Hazard Category Hazardous Section Spindle rotation X-axis movement Y-axis movement Amputation Z-axis movement - axis rotation
Caught in machine
Hazard Level

[2]

What will Happen After Detection Immediate stop of X-, Y-, Z- and - axis when they are moving. * The cover does not open during spindle rotation.

(3) Water leakage sensor [optional accessory]

Water leakage

Electrical shock caused by water leakage X-axis section

[2]

Immediate stop of X-, Y-, Z- and -axis when they are moving. * The cover does not open during spindle rotation.

Hazard levels are defined as follows:


Hazard Level

Description An extremely dangerous situation has occurred from the point of view of the personnel (a situation with impending death or serious injury). A dangerous situation has occurred from the point of the personnel (a situation with the possibility of death or serious injury). A dangerous situation has occurred from the point of the personnel (a situation with the possibility of light or moderate injury).

[1]

[2] [3]

A-18

Location of interlock devices Interlock devices are equipped at the locations shown below: [321/351/361]

Splash cover (1) Safety switch (2) Lock cylinder

(3) Water leakage sensor

[341/381]

Splash cover (1) Safety switch

(2) Lock cylinder

(3) Water leakage sensor

A-19

6-1. Interlock Mechanism of Splash Cover


Splash cover lock operations The interlock mechanism of the splash cover works as follows: Machine Condition During spindle rotation Interlock Operation The moment the spindle starts rotating, the cover lock cylinder system actuates to inhibit the cover from opening. When the spindle system If the splash cover is opened without using stops the maintenance switch, the power supply to all axis drivers and spindle inverter section is shut off so that no axis operation can be conducted. When the machine turns OFF The locked status prevailing during spindle during spindle rotation due to rotation is retained so that the cover does not EMO switch activation or open. (When the machine is turned OFF after power failure spindle stoppage by performing the normal procedure, the cover does not lock.)

A-20

Splash cover lock release If the machine power is turned OFF (by EMO switch activation or a power failure) during spindle rotation, the splash cover does not open because its lock cylinder is locked.

WARNING

- It takes up to about 15 seconds for 321/351/361 or 20 seconds for 341/381 until the spindle comes to a complete stop. During spindle rotation, do not place your fingers or hands in a rotary section. Before initiating any operation, make sure that spindle rotation is stopped. - If you open the splash cover without using the maintenance key, the power supply to the axis drivers and spindle inverter is shut off, but electrical power is still applied to the machine. Do not reach into energized sections.

NOTICE

- If the machine power is turned OFF during spindle rotation, the spindle becomes in free-run condition. It takes up to about 15 seconds for 321/351/361 or 20 seconds for 341/381 until the spindle comes to a stop. Do not shut off the air supply until spindle rotation stops. - In situations where the machine is turned OFF during spindle rotation, the lock release procedure should be performed only when machine power recovery is possible. If it is necessary to open the splash cover while the machine power cannot be restored, contact the maintenance personnel.
Step No.

Do

This

1 2 3 4

Turn ON the machine. Open the splash cover. Turn OFF the machine. Turn OFF the circuit breaker and lock up the circuit breaker lever with a padlock or the like.

A-21

7. Safety Labels
About safety labels Safety labels are affixed to the potentially hazardous area of the machine in order to indicate precautions and warnings about the safety hazards. Safety labels are grouped as follows: Labels Rotary Blade Label
WARNING WARNING

Hazard Level

Driving Section Label


CAUTION CAUTION

Meaning of Label It is possible that your hands and fingers may be cut. Observe the following precautions for a period of at least 15 seconds for 321/351/361 or 20 seconds for 341/381 until the spindle comes to a complete stop: - Do not place your hands or fingers near the blade or flange. - Ensure that the splash cover is kept closed. It is possible that yours hands and fingers may be caught and injured by the driving section. While the power is ON, ensure that the cover is kept closed.

Electrical Shock Hazard Label


WARNING

Use care to avoid possible electrical shock hazard.

General Label

General caution/warning/danger label.


WARNING

A-22

Rotary blade label position

WARNING

WARNING

[321/351/361]

Label position

[341/381]

Label position

A-23

Driving section label position

CAUTION

CAUTION

[321/351/361]

Label position

[341/381]
Label position

A-24

Electrical shock hazard label position

WARNING

[321/351/361]

: Label position

[341/381]

: Label position

A-25

General caution/warning/danger label position

WARNING

[321/351/361]

: Label position

[341/381]

: Label position

A-26

B. WHOM TO CONTACT IN AN EMERGENCY


Contents of This Chapter This chapter shows addresses of DISCO offices to contact in an emergency. Immediately get in touch with the following nearest DISCO or DISCO Service Office if a situation arises where an accident has occurred or might occur that involves injury or death during the operation of DISCO equipment. Section No. 1 Regions JAPAN Locations Tokyo Osaka Kyusyu Kure Sendai Suwa Nagoya Singapore Thailand Malaysia Philippines Korea Taiwan Hong Kong India China Israel U.S.A. Canada Germany France United Kingdom

ASIA

3 4 5

MIDDLE ASIA U.S.A. EUROPE

B-1

1. JAPAN OFFICE ADDRESS


JAPAN DISCO CORPORATION
Japan Head Office 14-3, Higashi Kojiya 2-chome Ota-ku, Tokyo 144-8650 Phone 81-3-3743-0111 FAX 81-3-3743-5810 Phone 81-3-3743-5813 3-12, Nishi Nakajima 6-chome Yodogawa-ku, Osaka 532-0011 Phone 81-6-6302-4501 FAX 81-6-6302-0766 16-14, Kamisuizenji 2-chome Kumamoto-shi 862-0951 Phone 81-96-385-3411 FAX 81-96-384-1410 1-23, Hiro Bunka-cho Kure-shi, Hiroshima 737-0198 Phone 81-823-72-2216 FAX 81-823-74-1573 Sahan Kamisugi Bldg. 4-23, Kamisugi 3-chome Aoba-ku, Sendai-shi, Miyagi Phone 81-22-262-3345 FAX 81-22-262-3346 3rd. Floor, Center Bldg. 12, Okita-machi, 3-chome Suwa-shi, Nagano 392-0013 Phone 81-266-52-0814 FAX 81-266-52-0815 1st. Floor, Kitamura No.4 Bldg. 80, Akegaoka, Meito-ku Nagoya-shi, Aichi 465-0033 Phone 81-52-776-6350 FAX 81-52-776-6380

Overseas Sales / PS Company Osaka Branch Office

Kyushu Branch Office

Kure Regional Office

Sendai Regional Office

980-0011

Suwa Regional Office

Nagoya Regional Office

B-2

2. ASIA OFFICE ADDRESS


SINGAPORE DISCO HI-TEC (SINGAPORE) PTE., LTD.
Blk 2 Kaki Bukit Ave 1 #03-06/08 Kaki Bukit Industrial Estate Singapore 417938 Singapore Phone 65-7473737 FAX 65-7450266

THAILAND DISCO HI-TEC (THAILAND) CO., LTD.


16th Floor, Lao Peng Nguan Tower 1 333 Viphavadi-Rangsit Road Lard Yao, Cnatuchak Bangkok 10900, Thailand Phone 66-2-6188441 FAX 66-2-6188440

MALAYSIA DISCO HI-TEC (MALAYSIA) SDN. BHD.


21A Tingkat 1 Jalan USJ 10/1D UEP 47620 Subang Jaya Selangor, Darul Ehsan, Malaysia Phone 60-3-737-2606 FAX 60-3-737-2439 Penang Regional Office 1-02-01 Persiaran Bukit Jambul Satu Kompleks Sri Relau 11900 Penang, Malaysia Phone 60-4-644-5502 FAX 60-4-645-2285

PHILIPPINES AUROTECH SYSTEMS (Phil s), INC.


121 Buencamino Street Alabang, Muntinglupa Philippines Phone 63-2-809-0155 FAX 63-2-807-7419

B-3

KOREA D.I. CORPORATION


Disco Sales & Service Department D.I Building 58-6, Nonhyun-Dong Kangnam-ku, Seoul, Korea Phone 82-2-546-5501 FAX 82-2-3446-8087

TAIWAN HAPPY POLE, LTD.


8th Floor, 8-1, No.41 Section 2, Roosevelt Road Taipei, Taiwan R. O. C. Phone 886-22-3960651 886-22-3960652 886-22-3966717 FAX 886-22-3943943

HONG KONG (CHINA) NEW TRONICS CO., LTD.


Unit3, 22/F., Shatin 11 Plaza 11 Wo Shing Street, Fotan Shatin, N.T., Hong Kong Phone 852-26871431 FAX 852-26874283

INDIA H. FILLUNGER & CO., PVT. LTD.


Post Box No.2526 11/4, Pusa Road New Delhi 110 005 India Phone 91-11-5787428 91-11-5726052 FAX 91-11-5762961

CHINA DISCO TECHNOLOGY (Shanghai) CO., LTD.


4th Floor, Block A, FaZhan Mansion No. 51 RiJing Road WaiGaoQiao Free Trade Zone Shanghai, P. R. China 200131 Phone 86-21-58662516 FAX 86-21-58662517

B-4

3. MIDDLE ASIA OFFICE ADDRESS


ISRAEL DISCO HI-TEC EUROPE GmbH Israel Representative Office Inbar 43 Street P. O. Box 1021
Zikhron Ya'akov 309000 Israel Phone 972-6-6293013 FAX 972-6-6294115 Mobile Phone 972-52-473046 972-51-212313

B-5

4. U.S.A. OFFICE ADDRESS


U.S.A. DISCO HI-TEC AMERICA, INC. USA Head Office 3270 Scott Blvd.
Santa Clara, CA 95054-3011 U. S. A. Phone 1-408-987-3776 FAX 1-408-987-3785

Southwestern Regional Sales & Service Office

4411 South 40th Street, Suite D-5 Phoenix, AZ 85040-2950


U. S. A. Phone 1-602-431-1412 FAX 1-602-431-1437

Southeastern Regional Sales & Service Office

4460 Brookfield Corporate Drive, Suite B Chantilly, VA 20151


U. S. A. Phone 1-703-815-2727 FAX 1-703-815-3573

Eastern Regional Sales & Service Office

360 Harvey Road, Building B, Unit 202 Manchester, NH 03103


U. S. A. Phone 1-603-656-9019 FAX 1-603-656-9018

Northwest Regional Sales & Service Office

7931 SW Cirrus Drive Beaverton, OR 97008-5971 U. S. A.


Phone 1-503-644-0323 FAX 1-503-643-8108

Central Regional Sales & Service Office

900 East Park Blvd., Suite 150 Plano, TX 75074-5465


U. S. A. Phone 1-972-423-4798 FAX 1-972-881-0064

B-6

U.S.A. (Continued) JOHN CRANE & ASSOCIATES


PMB 147 34522 No. Scottsdale Road, D-8 Scottsdale, AZ 85260 U. S. A. Phone 1-480-488-9898 FAX 1-480-488-9848

LYONS & ASSOCIATES


620 Swamp Road Doylestown, PA 18901 U. S. A. Phone 1-215-345-7915 FAX 1-215-345-8089

SALES & SERVICE, INC.


17853 Santiago Blvd. Bldg. 107, Suite 333 Villa Park, CA 92861 U. S. A. Phone 1-714-637-8400 FAX 1-714-637-8451

SEMITORR MIDWEST
19175 Market Avenue Belle Plain, MN 56011 U. S. A. Phone 1-612-873-2873 FAX 1-612-873-2327

THT SALES COMPANY, INC.


13438 Floyed Circle Dallas, TX 75243 U. S. A. Phone 1-972-783-1501 FAX 1-972-783-1574

UKE ENTERPRISES, INC.


631 East Chapman Avenue P. O. BOX 1131 Orange, CA 92866 U. S. A. Phone 1-714-633-0463 FAX 1-714-639-4359

B-7

CANADA HEPAIRE PRODUCTS CORP.


P. O. Box 11026 Station "H" Nepean, Ontario Canada K2H7T8 Phone 1-613-831-3234 FAX 1-613-831-3235

B-8

5. EUROPE OFFICE ADDRESS


GERMANY DISCO HI-TEC EUROPE GmbH
Liebigstrasse 8 D-85551 Kirchheim b. Muenchen Germany Phone 49-89-90903-0 FAX 49-89-90903-199

Konstanz Office

Fritz-Arnold-Strasse 23
D-78467 Konstanz Germany Phone 49-7531-67226 FAX 49-7531-61339

FRANCE DISCO HI-TEC FRANCE SARL


14-16, rue Leonard-de-Vinci F-45074 Orleans Cedex 02 France Phone 33-238-493080 FAX 33-238-493089

UNITED KINGDOM DISCO HI-TEC UK LTD.


151 London Road East Grinstead/West Sussex RH19 1ET United Kingdom Phone 44-1342-313165 FAX 44-1342-313177

B-9

C. GENERAL DESCRIPTION OF DATA SCREEN OPERATIONS


Contents of this chapter This chapter describes the tree structure of the screens and operation panel layout. Section No. Title 1 Data Screen Structure 2 Operation Panel Contents - Classification and tree structure of the screens - Operation panel key layout - Key function

C-1

1. Data Screen Structure


Summary of this section This section describes how the screens are configured. This machine has a tree-structured screen menu system as shown in the next and after pages. To go to a lower-layer screen, use the function keys and use the <EXIT> key to return to an upper-layer screen. In this section, the screens of this machine are classified according to operation type and the worker's level. The screens that should be operated by the operator, data maintenance personnel or maintenance personnel are protected respectively by the password. Screen classification and notational conventions of this section The table below shows the classification of the screens and notational conventions of the tree structure of the screen menu. Notation Screen Group Execution screen Screen operated by operators Data maintenance Worker's Level Operator Password None None

Data maintenance personnel Maintenance personnel Maintenance personnel Maintenance personnel DISCO service engineer -

Data password

Machine operation data maintenance Machine control maintenance Engineering maintenance Maintenance by Disco Optional accessory

Function password

User password

Engineering password Maker password

C-2

DAD mode menu structure The DAD mode screens are structured as shown below.

0.0 MAIN MENU

F1

1.0 AUTO CUTTING

F2

2.0 SEMI AUTO CUT

F4

4.0 DEVICE DATA LIST

F5

5.0 BLADE MAINTENANCE

F6

FUNCTION PASSWORD

6.0 OPERATOR MAINTENANCE

F7

USER PASSWORD

7.0 MACHINE MAINTENANCE

F8

ENGINEERING PASSWORD

8.0 ENGINEERING MAINTENANCE

C-3

Auto cutting menu structure --- DAD mode --- (Lower level screens linked to screen 1.0) The auto cutting screens in DAD mode are structured as shown below. - The screens below are lower level ones of the AUTO CUTTING screen [screen 1.0] that is called up by pressing the <F1> key from the MAIN MENU screen [screen 0.0].

1.0 AUTO CUTTING

START

STATUS OF CUTTING (Full auto cutting)

STOP

F8

6.2 Y-AXIS MEASURE

F10

LIGHT LIGHT ADJUSTMENT (for only 341 and 381)

C-4

DAC mode menu structure The DAC mode screens are structured as shown below.

0.0 MAIN MENU

F1

1.0 DAC ALIGNMENT

F4

4.0 DEVICE DATA LIST

F5

5.0 BLADE MAINTENANCE

F6

FUNCTION PASSWORD

6.0 OPERATOR MAINTENANCE

F7

USER PASSWORD

7.0 MACHINE MAINTENANCE

F8

ENGINEERING PASSWORD

8.0 ENGINEERING MAINTENANCE

C-5

DAC mode cutting menu structure --- DAC mode --(Lower level screens linked to screen 1.0) The DAC mode cutting screens are structured as shown below. - The screens below are lower level ones of the DAC ALIGNMENT screen [screen 1.0] that is called up by pressing the <F1> key from the MAIN MENU screen [screen 0.0].

1.0 DAC ALIGNMENT

START

STATUS OF CUTTING (DAC cutting)

STOP

F6

SIMULATION

F8

6.2 Y-AXIS MEASURE

F10

LIGHT LIGHT ADJUSTMENT (for only 341 and 381)

C-6

Semi-auto cutting menu structure (Lower level screens linked to screen 2.0) The semi-auto cutting screens are structured as shown below. - The screens below are lower level ones of the SEMI AUTO CUT screen [screen 2.0] that is called up by pressing the <F2> key from the MAIN MENU screen [screen 0.0].

2.0 SEMI AUTO CUT

F4

SINGLE CHANNEL ALIGNMENT

F5

ALIGN

F10 F5 F10 STATUS OF


CUTTING

LIGHT LIGHT ADJUSTMENT (for only 341 and 381)

START STATUS OF CUTTING STOP


(Semi auto cutting)

F8

6.2 Y-AXIS MEASURE

C-7

Stop correction menu structure The stop correction screens are structured as shown below.

STOP STOP CORRECTION

F1

HAIR ADJ.

F2

HEIGHT

F3

BLADE (BLADE INFORMATION 2)

F4

KERF 1 KERF CHECK DATA 1

F5

CUT POS ADJ.

F7

SPEED

F8

MEASURE

F9

PRECUT ON

F10

LIGHT LIGHT ADJUSTMENT (for only 341 and 381)

C-8

Device data menu structure (Lower level screens linked to screen 4.0) The device data screens are structured as shown below. - The screens below are lower level ones of the DEVICE DATA LIST screen [screen 4.0] that is called up by pressing the <F4> key from the MAIN MENU screen [screen 0.0].

4.0 DEVICE DATA LIST

ENTER DATA
PASSWORD

4.2 DEVICE DATA 1

F2

DATA PASSWORD

DEVICE DATA COPY

F3

DATA PASSWORD

4.0.3 DEVICE DATA MOVE

F4

DATA PASSWORD

DEVICE DATA RENAME

F5

DATA PASSWORD

DELETE DEVICE DATA DELETE

C-9

Device data 1 menu structure --- DAD mode --- (Lower level screens linked to screen 4.2) The device data 1 screens in DAD mode are structured as shown below. - The screens below are lower level ones of the DEVICE DATA 1 screen [screen 4.2] that is called up by pressing the <ENTER> key from the DEVICE DATA LIST screen [screen 4.0].

4.2 DEVICE DATA 1

F3

4.3 DEVICE DATA2

F4

4.4 DEVICE DATA 3

F7

4.7 KERF CHECK FUNCTION PARAMETER 6.2 Y-AXIS MEASURE

F8

F9

6.1.1 PRECUT DATA

C-10

Device data 1 menu structure --- DAC mode --- (Lower level screens linked to screen 4.2) The device data 1 screens in DAC mode are structured as shown below. - The screens below are lower level ones of the DEVICE DATA 1 screen [screen 4.2] that is called up by pressing the <ENTER> key from the DEVICE DATA LIST screen [screen 4.0].

NORMAL

4.3 DEVICE DATA 2

4.2 DEVICE DATA 1

F3
4.3 DEVICE DATA 2

F5

SPECIAL

NORMAL

4.4 DEVICE DATA 3

HELP

F4
4.4 DEVICE DATA 3

F5

SPECIAL

F6

SIMULATION

F7

4.7 KERF CHECK FUNCTION PARAMETER 6.2 Y-AXIS MEASURE

F8

F9

6.1.1 PRECUT DATA

C-11

Blade maintenance menu structure (Lower level screens linked to screen 5.0) The blade maintenance screens are structured as shown below. - The screens below are lower level ones of the BLADE MAINTENANCE screen [screen 5.0] that is called up by pressing the <F5> key from the MAIN MENU screen [screen 0.0].

5.0 BLADE MAINTENANCE

F1

5.1 BLADE REPLACEMENT


5.2 ADJUSTMENT OF B.B.D. (Blade Breakage Detector)

F5

5.1.5 BLADE SELECTER

F2

F10 ADJUSTMENT OF
B.B.D 5.6

5.2

F3

5.3 SETUP

F1

5.3.1 CHUCK TABLE SETUP

F3 BLADE
LIFE/WEAR INFORMATION 5.6

F2

5.3.2 POINTED CHUCK TABLE SETUP

F3 BLADE
LIFE/WEAR INFORMATION 5.6

F3

5.3.1 CHUCK TABLE SETUP 5.3.4 SENSOR CALIBRATION SETUP

F3 BLADE
LIFE/WEAR INFORMATION 5.6

F4

F3 BLADE
LIFE/WEAR INFORMATION 5.8 F6 NON-CONTACT SETUP SENSOR CLEANING

F4

5.4 BLADE DRESS DATA

F5

5.5 HAIRLINE ALIGNMENT 5.6 BLADE LIFE/WEAR INFORMATION

START 5.5.1
HAIRLINE ALIGNMENT IN PROGRESS

F10

F6

LIGHT LIGHT ADJUSTMENT (for only 341 and 381)

F7

DATA PASSWORD

5.7 SETUP DATA 1

F3 5.7.3
SETUP DATA 2

F8

5.8 NON-CONTACT SETUP SENSOR CLEANING

C-12

Dress data menu structure (Lower level screens linked to screen 5.4) The dress data screens are structured as shown below. - The screens below are lower level ones of the BLADE DRESS DATA screen [screen 5.4] that is called up by pressing the <F4> key from the BLADE MAINTENANCE screen [screen 5.0].

5.4 BLADE DRESS DATA

F4

SINGLE CHANNEL ALIGNMENT

F10

LIGHT LIGHT ADJUSTMENT (for only 341 and 381)

F5 5.4.1 F10 DRESS IN


PROGRESS

START DRESS IN PROGRESS

C-13

Operator maintenance menu structure (Lower level screens linked to screen 6.0) The operator maintenance screens are structured as shown below. - The screens below are lower level ones of the OPERATOR MAINTENANCE screen [screen 6.0] that is called up by pressing the <F6> key from the MAIN MENU screen [screen 0.0].

ENTER

6.0 OPERATOR MAINTENANCE

6.1.1 PRECUT DATA

F1

6.1 PRECUT DATA LIST

F3
6.2 Y-AXIS MEASURE

6.1.3 PRECUT DATA COPY

F2

F3 F3
6.3 FUNCTION DATA MAINTENANCE 1

6.3.3 FUNCTION DATA MAINTENANCE 2

F5

6.3.5 PROGRAM DATA MAINTENANCE

F4

6.4 OPERATION DATA MAINTENANCE 6.5 SIGNAL TOWER DATA MAINTENANCE 6.6 ALIGNMENT DATA MAINTENANCE

F5

F6

F7

6.7 EXTERNAL MEMORY UNIT

C-14

Menu structure of the external memory unit [optional accessory] (Lower level screens linked to screen 6.7) The screens of the external memory unit are structured as shown below. - The screens below are lower level ones of the EXTERNAL MEMORY UNIT screen [screen 6.7] that is called up by pressing the <F7> key from the OPERATOR MAINTENANCE screen [screen 6.0].

6.7 EXTERNAL MEMORY UNIT

F1

6.7.1 FORMAT (FD) 6.7.2 DEVICE DATA LOAD (FDM/C) 6.7.3 DEVICE DATA SAVE (M/CFD) 6.7.4 DEVICE DATA DELETE (FD) 6.7.5 PRECUT DATA LOAD (FDM/C) 6.7.6 PRECUT DATA SAVE (M/CFD) RUN BATCH FILE (FD) MACHINE DATA BACK-UP (M/CFD) For maintenance by DISCO

F2

F3

F4

F5

F6

F7

F8

F9

MACHINE DATA RESTORE (FDM/C)

F10 CONVERSION
(3031)

DEVICE DATA

C-15

Machine maintenance menu structure (Lower level screens linked to screen 7.0) The machine maintenance screens are structured as shown below. - The screens below are lower level ones of the MACHINE MAINTENANCE screen [screen 7.0] that is called up by pressing the <F7> key from the MAIN MENU screen [screen 0.0].

7.0 MACHINE MAINTENANCE

F1

CHUCK TABLE REMOVAL

F2

7.2 AXIS IDLING CREATION

START

7.2.1 AXIS IDLING IN PROGRESS

F5 F3
7.3 ROTATION ALIGNMENT

7.3.5 ROTATION ALIGNMENT

HELP 5.3.1

CHUCK TABLE SETUP

C-16

Engineering maintenance menu structure (Lower level screens linked to screen 8.0) --- Refer to Maintenance Manual --The engineering maintenance screens are structured as shown below. - The screens below are lower level ones of the ENGINEERING MAINTENANCE screen [screen 8.0] that is called up by pressing the <F8> key from the MAIN MENU screen [screen 0.0].

8.0 ENGINEERING MAINTENANCE

F1

8.1 CONDITIONING

START

8.1.1 CONDITIONING IN PROGRESS

F2

8.2 AXIS MOVE CHECK

F3

8.3 DIGITAL I/O CHECK

F4

8.3.4 AXIS SENSOR STATUS

F3

8.4.3 USER DEFINE DATA 2

F4

8.4 USER DEFINE DATA 1

F5

8.4.5 PASSWORD DEFINE

F10

8.4.10 HAIR LINE ADJUSTMENT

F5

8.5 LOG VIEWER

F10 MAKER
PASSWORD

C-17

2. Operation Panel
Summary of this section This section describes about the layout and functions of the keys on the operation panel. Section No. Title 2-1 Operation Panel Key Layout 2-2 Names and Functions of Touch-Activated Keys Contents - Operation panel key layout - Key function - Classification of touch-activated keys - Functions of touch-activated keys

C-18

2-1. Operation Panel Key Layout


Summary of this section This section illustrates the key layout on the operation panel and key groups by their function. Key Layout The touch-activated keys on the operation panel are laid out as shown below. For the keys having long names, their abbreviations are used.

C-19

2-2. Names and Functions of Touch-Activated Keys


Summary of this section In this section, keys on the operation panel are categorized by their function as follows. Section No. Title 2-2-1 Keys for start/stop and alarm cancel and Z-EM key 2-2-2 Single-function keys Contents
ALRMCLR

START STOP

Z EM

HELP

SET UP O CUT WATER X

DISPLAY MODE Q

SYS INIT V

SPNDL W

C/T VAC Z

2-2-3

Keys to setup, call and edit data

+/-

CE

ENTER
EXIT
HOME

F1 A
DEVICE DATA P

F10 L
HAIR WIDE R SLOW
HAIR NARROW S

SHIFT

2-2-4

Axis operation keys

INDEX

Z F X M

Z G X N

T Y U Y /

2-2-5

Auxiliary key

OPTION Y

C-20

2-2-1. Keys for start/stop and alarm cancel and Z-EM key
Summary of this section This section describes the key to clear an alarm, the key to start/stop the operation and Z-EM key. For the keys whose names are abbreviated, their whole names are shown in the parentheses. Key function
ALRMCLR

HELP

(Alarm clear/Help) This key is used to clear the error indication and silence the buzzer in the event of Z-EM condition or error occurrence. This key is used to start or temporarily stop a automatic cutting operation, semi-automatic cutting operation, conditioning, dressing or other operation. This key is used to retreat the Z-axis in case of emergency. It is a red key mounted on the upper righthand corner of the operation panel. When this key is pressed, the machine performs the following operations. 1: The Z-axis ascends to the upper end. 2: The X-, Y- and -axes decelerate and stop. 3: The alarm buzzer sounds. When you press the <START/STOP> key after canceling the alarm by pressing the <ALRMCLR/HELP> key, the machine resumes cutting beginning with either the next line or the current line.

START STOP
Z EM

C-21

2-2-2. Single-function keys


Summary of this section Keys described in this section are assigned as the single-function keys. For the keys whose names are abbreviated, their whole names are shown in the parentheses. Key function
SET UP O

When this key is pressed in the standard mode chuck table setup process, the Z-axis reference position (setup position) for determining the amount left uncut of workpiece is detected as shown below and setup is performed.
Blade

Setup point Chuck table

Wafer thickness Amount left uncut

DISPLAY MODE Q

This key is used to display the microscope image on the monitor and vary the screen brightness over five steps. (System initial) When this key is pressed, the X-, Y-, Z- and -axes move to their origins. (Spindle) When this key is pressed, the indicator lamp comes on and the spindle starts rotating. The factory preset value for the rotating speed is the one a user specified before shipping. A second press of the key causes the indicator lamp to go off and the spindle to stop rotating.

SYS INIT V

SPNDL W

CUT WATER X

When this key is pressed, the indicator lamp comes on and the wheel coolant water begins to flow. A second press of the key extinguishes the indicator lamp and shuts off the wheel coolant supply.

C/T VAC Z

(Chuck table, Vacuum) When this key is pressed, the indicator lamp comes on and the machine vacuum retains the work on the chuck table. Confirm the work vacuum level by reading the vacuum gauge on the front of the machine points to a green range. A second press of this key extinguishes the indicator lamp and releases vacuum suction.

C-22

2-2-3. Keys to setup, call and edit data


Summary of this section This section describes the keys to store the setup data such as the index amount, workpiece size, amount left uncut or cutting speed, in the machine memory. The keys to call a preset data or a particular screen and the ones to edit data are also explained in this section. For the keys whose names are abbreviated, their whole names are shown in the parentheses. Key function
0 9

Numeric keys and a decimal point. Use to enter numerals.

+/-

This key toggles the numerical data sign between + and -. This key erases only the item designated by the onscreen cursor. This key sets the item designated by the on-screen cursor and moves the cursor to the next item position.

CE

ENTER

This key is used to write device data or the like into the internal memory of the machine. It is also used to finalize an axis operation. This key cancels the currently displayed monitor screen setup and recalls the previous screen. It is also used to cancel an operation. Cursor movement keys.

EXIT

HOME

This key returns the cursor to its default on-screen position.

C-23

Key function (Continued)


F1 A
F10 L

(Function) The function keys have their own roles for each screen. Their functions are displayed on each screen. This key is used to call up the device data list screen.

DEVICE DATA P HAIR WIDE R


HAIR NARROW S

While the microscope image is displayed on the monitor, this key increases the on-screen hairline width. While the microscope image is displayed on the monitor, this key decreases the on-screen hairline width. This key switches the function of the keys with alphabet character, from the ones assigned by Disco to alphabetic character entering. When you press this key, the indicator lamp comes on and you can type the alphabetic character printed on the lower-left hand on the key label. A second press of the key extinguishes the indicator lamp and the function of the key return to the ones assigned by Disco.

SHIFT

C-24

2-2-4. Axis operation keys


Summary of this section The following keys are used to manually operate the X-, Y-, Z- and -axis. Note that these keys are inoperative during cutting, setup or system initialization. Function of INDEX and SLOW keys
INDEX

If the X, Y or key is pressed after INDEX key is pressed, each axis moves by the index amount or rotation angle defined by the device data. If the X, Y or key is pressed after SLOW key is pressed, each axis moves by the low speed defined on the OPERATION DATA MAINTENANCE screen.

SLOW

Function of Z-axis operation keys


Z F Z G

Z-axis operation keys. These keys are operative only while the CONDITIONING screen is displayed. While you hold down one of these keys, the spindle vertically moves in the direction of the arrow mark on the key. When you release the key, the spindle stops.

Function of X-axis operation keys


X M X N
INDEX X

X-axis operation keys. While you hold down one of these keys, the chuck table moves in the direction of the arrow mark on the key. When you release the key, the chuck table stops. The chuck table moves leftward by the index amount defined by the DEVICE DATA screen. The chuck table moves rightward by the index amount defined by the DEVICE DATA screen.
X

+
INDEX

M X

+
SLOW

N X

+
SLOW

While the M key is held down, the chuck table moves leftward at the low speed.
X

While the N key is held down, the chuck table moves rightward at the low speed.

C-25

Function of -axis operation keys

-axis operation keys. While you hold down one of these keys, the chuck table rotates in the direction indicated by the arrow mark on the key. The rotation stops when you release the key. Finish the -direction positioning for alignment with

the key. This is essential to avoid -axis backlash.


T INDEX

+
INDEX

Invokes 90 clockwise rotation or provides a clockwise rotation angle defined by the DEVICE DATA screen. Invokes 90 counterclockwise rotation or provides a counterclockwise rotation angle defined by the DEVICE DATA screen.

+
SLOW

+
SLOW

While the key is held down, the -axis rotates clockwise at the low speed.
T

While the key is held down, the -axis rotates counterclockwise at the low speed.
U

C-26

Function of Y-axis operation keys


Y Y /

Y-axis operation keys. While one of these keys is held down, the Y-axis moves in the direction indicated by the arrow mark on the key. The movement stops when you release the key. Finish the Y-direction positioning for alignment with
Y

the key. This is essential to avoid Y-axis backlash.


INDEX Y

+
INDEX

The Y-axis moves rearward (downward indexing on the screen) by the index amount defined by the DEVICE DATA screen. The Y-axis moves forward (upward indexing on the screen) by the index amount defined by the device data screen.
Y

+
SLOW

+
SLOW

While the key is held down, the Y-axis moves rearward at the low speed.
Y

While the / key is held down, the Y-axis moves forward at the low speed.

C-27

2-2-5. Auxiliary key


Summary of this section
OPTION

This section describes the function of the Auxiliary key function


OPTION Y

key.

This key is not to be used when the standard specification is applied. This key is held in reserve.

C-28

D. DATA MAINTENANCE
Contents of this chapter This chapter describes the appearance, setting items and available function keys of each screen. The screens are classified according to their purpose. Section No. Title 1 Data Setup/Operation Screens Used by Operators 2 Cutting Data Setup Contents - Screens used by operators to set up data or operate the machine - Descriptions of cutting data requiring setup and verification before starting cutting - Cutting movement - Cutting function - Examples of cutting data - Setup movement - Setting procedure of setup data - Data maintenance related to machine operation - Data maintenance related to the machine's basic function and movement

3 4 5

Setup Data Operator Maintenance Machine Maintenance

D-1

Correspondences between Operation Manual and this manual The following sections of this chapter correspond to the Operation Manual as shown below. Data Maintenance Manual D-1-2 Cutting Related Screens D-1-3 Correction-in-cutting Related Screens D-1-4 Device Data Related Screens D-1-5 Blade Maintenance Related Screens D-1-6 Dressing Related Screens D-1-7 Setup Related Screens D-1-8 Error Recovery Related Screens General safety precautions Operation Manual D-2 Cutting Operation D-2 Cutting Operation D Verification of device data

D-4 Blade Maintenance D-3 Blade Dressing Operation D-5 Setup E Error Recovery

NOTICE

The device data screen, operator maintenance screen and machine maintenance screen are protected respectively by a password. Data change should be done by the person qualified for data alternation.

D-2

1. Data Setup/Operation Screens Used by Operators


Summary of this section This section describes the screens used by operators to set up various data or operate the machine. Section No. Title Contents 1-1 MAIN MENU Screen [Screen 0.0] 1-2 Cutting Related Screens Cutting related screens - AUTO CUTTING screen - DAC ALIGNMENT screen - STATUS OF CUTTING screen - BLADE INFORMATION 2 screen - SEMI AUTO CUT screen - SINGLE CHANNEL ALIGNMENT screen 1-3 Screens Related to Screens to make correction after Correction during Cutting suspension of cutting - STOP CORRECTION screen - KERF CHECK FUNCTION PARAMETER screen - LIGHT ADJUSTMENT screen - DEVICE DATA LIST screen - DEVICE DATA screen - PRECUT DATA screen 1-4 Device Data Related Device data related screens to set Screens cutting data - DEVICE DATA screen - DEVICE DATA LIST screen - DEVICE DATA COPY screen - DEVICE DATA DELETE screen - DEVICE DATA RENAME screen - KERF CHECK FUNCTION PARAMETER screen - PRECUT DATA screen - SIMULATION screen

D-3

Summary of this section (Continued) Section No. Title 1-5 Blade Maintenance Related Screens Contents Blade maintenance related screens to perform blade maintenance - BLADE MAINTENANCE screen - BLADE EXCHANGE screen - BLADE SELECTER screen - ADJUSTMENT OF B.B.D. (Blade Breakage Detector) screen - HAIRLINE ALIGNMENT screen - HAIRLINE ALIGNMENT IN PROGRESS screen - BLADE LIFE/WEAR INFORMATION screen Explanation of dressing operation and dressing related screens - BLADE DRESS DATA screen - DRESS IN PROGRESS screen Setup related screens - SETUP screen - CHUCK TABLE SETUP screen - POINTED CHUCK TABLE SETUP screen - NONCONTACT SETUP screen - SENSOR CALIBRATION SETUP screen - NONCONTACT SETUP SENSOR CLEANING screen Error recovery related screens displayed at error occurrence - ERROR RECOVERY (KERF CHECK) screen - ERROR RECOVERY (B.B.D) screen - ERROR RECOVERY (SETUP) screen

1-6

Dressing Related Screens

1-7

Setup Related Screens

1-8

Error Recovery Related Screens

D-4

1-1. MAIN MENU Screen [Screen 0.0]


MAIN MENU screen [screen 0.0] ---DAD mode --This is the first screen displayed on the monitor when you turn ON the machine with the DAD mode setting. [Screen]
D I S C O D I C E R S E R I E S < DAD321 >YY-MM-DD [ ] < MAIN MENU > F1. AUTO CUT DIRECTRY [1] DEVICE No. [2] 0.0

F2. SEMI AUTO CUT

F4. DEVICE DATA LIST F5. BLADE MAINTENANCE F6. OPERATOR MAINTENANCE F7. MACHINE MAINTENANCE F8. ENGINEERING MAINTENANCE Electric Type Software Version Manufactured No. Machine ID. : : : :

[Setting Item]
Item No.

[1] [2]

Descriptions Enter the name of the directory where the device data to be used is stored. [optional accessory] Enter the device No. to be used.

D-5

MAIN MENU screen [screen 0.0] ---DAD mode --- (Continued) [Function Key] Press F1 F2 F4 To Call up the AUTO CUTTING screen [screen 1.0]. Full auto cutting function execution is to be initiated via this screen. Call up the SEMI AUTO CUT screen [screen 2.0]. Semi auto cutting function execution is to be initiated via this screen. Call up the DEVICE DATA LIST screen [screen 4.0] which shows registered device data listings and provides device data copy, erase, and call up functions. Call up the BLADE MAINTENANCE screen [screen 5.0] which provides blade related data and blade breakage detector [optional accessory] adjustment functions. Call up the OPERATOR MAINTENANCE screen [screen 6.0] to perform data maintenance related to the machine operation (function password protected). Call up the MACHINE MAINTENANCE screen [screen 7.0] to perform data maintenance related to the machine function (user password protected). Call up the ENGINEERING MAINTENANCE screen [screen 8.0] to perform data maintenance related to the machine adjustment and machine operation (engineering password protected).

F5

F6

F7

F8

D-6

MAIN MENU screen [screen 0.0] ---DAC mode --This is the first screen displayed on the monitor when you turn ON the machine with the DAC mode setting. [Screen]
D I S C O D I C E R S E R I E S < DAC351 >YY-MM-DD [ ] < MAIN MENU > F1. AUTO CUT DIRECTRY [1] DEVICE No. [2] 0.0

F4. DEVICE DATA LIST F5. BLADE MAINTENANCE F6. OPERATOR MAINTENANCE F7. MACHINE MAINTENANCE F8. ENGINEERING MAINTENANCE Electric Type Software Version Manufactured No. Machine ID. : : : :

[Setting Item]
Item No.

[1] [2]

Descriptions Enter the name of the directory where the device data to be used is stored. [optional accessory] Enter the device No. to be used.

D-7

MAIN MENU screen [screen 0.0] ---DAC mode --- (Continued) [Function Key] Press F1 F4 To Call up the DAC ALIGNMENT screen [screen 1.0]. DAC mode cutting function execution is to be initiated via this screen. Call up the DEVICE DATA LIST screen [screen 4.0] which shows registered device data listings and provides device data copy, erase, and call up functions. Call up the BLADE MAINTENANCE screen [screen 5.0] which provides blade related data and blade breakage detector [optional accessory] adjustment functions. Call up the OPERATOR MAINTENANCE screen [screen 6.0] to perform data maintenance related to the machine operation (function password protected). Call up the MACHINE MAINTENANCE screen [screen 7.0] to perform data maintenance related to the machine function (user password protected). Call up the ENGINEERING MAINTENANCE screen [screen 8.0] to perform data maintenance related to the machine adjustment and machine operation (engineering password protected).

F5

F6

F7

F8

D-8

1-2. Cutting Related Screens


Summary of this section This section describes the alignment screens displayed when selecting cutting operation and the cutting status screens displayed during cutting. Section No. Title 1-2-1 Auto cutting related screens Contents Auto cutting related screens - AUTO CUTTING screen - DAC ALIGNMENT screen - STATUS OF CUTTING screen Semi auto cutting related screens - SEMI AUTO CUT screen - SINGLE CHANNEL ALIGNMENT screen

1-2-2

Semi auto cutting related screens

D-9

1-2-1. Auto cutting related screens


Summary of this section This section describes the screens displayed while auto cutting is performed. Section No. 1-2-1-1 1-2-1-2 1-2-1-3 1-2-1-4 1-2-1-5 Title AUTO CUTTING screen [screen 1.0] --- DAD mode --DAC ALIGNMENT screen [screen 1.0] --- DAC mode --STATUS OF CUTTING screen --- DAD mode --STATUS OF CUTTING screen --- DAC mode --BLADE INFORMATION 2 screen

D-10

1-2-1-1. AUTO CUTTING screen [screen 1.0] --- DAD mode --AUTO CUTTING screen [screen 1.0] The AUTO CUTTING screen [screen 1.0] is the alignment screen in DAD mode. Press the <F1> key from the MAIN MENU screen [screen 0.0] to call up this screen. [Screen]
D I S C O D I C E R S E R I E S < DAD321 >YY-MM-DD [ ] 1.0 < AUTO CUTTING > DIRECTRY [1] DEVICE DATA No. [2] NOW IN : [5] AUTO DOWN AMOUNT : [3] mm SENSITIVITY(B.B.D) : [6] HEIGHT ADJUST : [4] mm CHANGE SPEED : [7] (-:DEEP/+:SHALLOW)

% mm/s

--------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------Align [8] by ENTER key. PROCESSED : [9] ALIGNMENT : [10] F1:SELECT F2:HEI_CHG F3: F4:PROCESS CLR F5 :ALIGN F6:AFTER CH F7:SPD_CHG F8:MEASURE F9:PRECUT ON F10:LIGHT ADJ

[Setting Item]
Item No.

[1] [2] [3] [4] [5] [6] [7] [8] [9]

Descriptions Indicates the name of the directory where the device data to be used is stored. [optional accessory] Indicates the device data No. to be used for cutting. Shows the cumulative amount of Z-axis descent which will be brought about cutting. Enter the correction value for the amount-left-uncut to be applied during cutting. Displays the chuck table channel position during alignment. Indicates the amount of blade breakage detector transmission [optional accessory]. Enter the numerical value for the feed speed change to be applied during cutting. Shows the channel for which alignment is currently performed. Displays the number of wafers that have been cut since the last zero clear which was effected by pressing the <F4> key.

D-11

AUTO CUTTING screen [screen 1.0] (Continued) [Setting Item]


Item No.

[10]

Descriptions Use the <F1> key to choose between YES and NO. YES Executes the alignment process. NO Does not execute the alignment process. (The value of the rotating axis center position (Y) will be an alignment reference position.)

[Function Key] Press F1 F2 F3 F4 F5 F6 F7 F8 F9 F10 To Select YES or NO for option [10]. Make the blade height correction defined by [4]. Unused Clear the displayed cut wafer count [9] to zero. Cause the X-axis to conduct an automatic scan to select the angle adjustment process. Recall the alignment screen for the channel previously cut. Effect the feed speed change defined by [7]. Call up the Y-AXIS MEASURE screen [screen 6.2]. Initiate cutting in accordance with the device data for precut feed speed. Call up the LIGHT ADJUSTMENT screen. ---341/381 only ---

D-12

1-2-1-2. DAC ALIGNMENT screen [screen 1.0] --- DAC mode --DAC ALIGNMENT screen [screen 1.0] The DAC ALIGNMENT screen [screen 1.0] is the alignment screen in DAC mode. To call up this screen, press the <F1> key from the MAIN MENU screen [screen 0.0] while selecting the DAC mode. [Screen]
D I S C O D I C E R S E R I E S < DAC351 >YY-MM-DD [ ] 1.0 < DAC ALIGNMENT > DIRECTRY [1] DEVICE DATA No. [2] SENSITIVITY(B.B.D) : AUTO DOWN AMOUNT : [3] mm CHANGE SPEED : HEIGHT ADJUST : (-:DEEP/+:SHALLOW)

[4] [5] [6]

% mm/s mm

INDEX(REAR) : [7] mm INDEX(FRONT) : [8] mm INDEX POS. : [9] LINE ---------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------Start automatic cutting using the START key. PROCESSED : [10] WORKS F1:POSITION F2:HEI_CHG F3: F6:SIMLATION F7:SPD_CHG F8:MEASURE F4:PROCESS CLR F9:PRECUT ON F5 : F10:

[Setting Item]
Item No.

[1] [2] [3] [4] [5] [6] [7] [8] [9] [10]

Descriptions Indicates the name of the directory where the device data to be used is stored. [optional accessory] Indicates the device data No. to be used for cutting. Shows the cumulative amount of Z-axis descent which will be brought about by auto down feature execution. Indicates the amount of blade breakage detector transmission. [optional accessory] Enter the numerical value for the feed speed change to be applied during cutting. Enter the correction value for the blade height change to be applied during cutting. Indicates the rearward distance from the current alignment position as the index amount to the next line defined in the device data. Indicates the forward distance from the current alignment position as the index amount to the next line defined in the device data. Indicates what number index line is used from the current alignment position in accordance with the device data setup. Displays the number of wafers that have been cut since the last zero clear which was effected by pressing the <F4> key.
D-13

DAC ALIGNMENT screen [screen 1.0] (Continued) [Function Key] Press F1 F2 F3 F4 F5 F6 F7 F8 F9 F10 To Invoke a movement to the alignment position defined by the DAC mode DEVICE DATA 1 screen [screen 4.2]. Make the blade height correction defined by [6]. Unused Clear the displayed cut workpiece count [10] to zero. Cause the X-axis to conduct an automatic scan to select the angle adjustment process. Call up the SIMULATION screen. Effect the feed speed change defined by [5]. Call up the Y-AXIS MEASURE screen [screen 6.2]. Initiate cutting in accordance with the device data for precut feed speed. Call up the LIGHT ADJUSTMENT screen. ---341/381 only ---

D-14

1-2-1-3. STATUS OF CUTTING screen --- DAD mode --STATUS OF CUTTING screen --- DAD mode --The following STATUS OF CUTTING screen is displayed after completion of alignment during cutting, while the DAD mode is selected. Only data of the columns [9] and [10] can be edited. [Screen]
D I S C O D I C E R S E R I E S < DAD321 >YY-MM-DD [ ] < STATUS OF CUTTING > DEVICE No. [1] CHANNEL: [3] DIRECTRY [2] [4] / [5] NOW HEIGHT [6] mm SETTING/NOW SPD. [7] mm/s [8] mm/s HEIGHT ADJUST [9] mm CHANGE SPEED [10] mm/s SPINDLE REV. [11] rpm BLADE BROKEN SENS. [12] % CUTTING END : [13] +----------+----------+ | [14] | [15] %END +----------+----------+ F1: F2:HEIGHT F3:BLADE INF. F4: F5 : F6: F7:SPD_CHG F8: F9:PRECUT ON F10:

[Setting Item]
Item No.

[1] [2] [3] [4] [5] [6] [7] [8] [9] [10] [11] [12] [13]

Descriptions Enter the name of the directory where the device data to be used is stored. [optional accessory] Displays the device No. that is currently used for cutting. Indicates the channel position currently cut. Shows the number of cut lines of the channel that is currently subjected to cutting. Indicates the total number of cut lines of the channel currently cut. Indicates the amount left uncut during the cutting process. Displays the set feeding speed during cutting process. Displays the current cutting speed. A correction value can be entered here as needed to change the amount left uncut during the cutting process. Enter the feed speed change in the cutting process. Shows the current spindle rotating speed. Displays the transmission amount of the blade breakage detector during the cutting process. [optional accessory] Shows the time when the cutting ends.

D-15

STATUS OF CUTTING screen --- DAD mode --- (Continued) [Setting Item]
Item No.

[14] [15]

Descriptions Presents a bar graph to indicate the progress of cutting. Presents a percentage value to indicate the progress of cutting.

[Function Key] Press F1 F2 F3 F4 F5 F6 F7 F8 F9 F10 To Unused Effect the blade height correction defined by [9]. Call up the BLADE INFORMATION 2 screen (data reference screen). Unused Unused Unused Effect the feed speed change defined by [10]. Unused Initiate cutting in accordance with the device data for precut feed speed. Unused

D-16

1-2-1-4. STATUS OF CUTTING screen --- DAC mode --STATUS OF CUTTING screen --- DAC mode --The following STATUS OF CUTTING screen is displayed after completion of alignment during cutting, while the DAC mode is selected. Only data of the columns [8] and [9] can be edited. [Screen]DIRECTRY ^50
D I S C O D I C E R S E R I E S < DAC351 >YY-MM-DD [ ] < STATUS OF CUTTING > DIRECTRY [1] CUTTING POS. DEVICE No. [2] [3] / [4] NOW HEIGHT [5] mm SETTING/NOW SPD. [6] mm/s [7] mm/s HEIGHT ADJUST [8] mm CHANGE SPEED [9] mm/s SPINDLE REV. [10] rpm BLADE BROKEN SENS. [11] % +----+----+----+----+ | [12] | [13] %END +----+----+----+----+ F1: F2:HEIGHT F3:BLADE INF. F4: F5 : F6: F7:SPD_CHG F8: F9:PRECUT ON F10:

[Setting Item]
Item No.

[1] [2] [3] [4] [5] [6] [7] [8] [9] [10] [11] [12] [13]

Descriptions Enter the name of the directory where the device data to be used is stored. [optional accessory] Displays the device No. that is currently used for cutting. Indicates the number of lines that have been cut. Indicates the total number of cut lines of the channel currently cut. Indicates the amount left uncut during the cutting process. Displays the set feeding speed during cutting process. Displays the current cutting speed. A correction value can be entered here as needed to change the amount left uncut during the cutting process. Enter the feed speed change in the cutting process. Shows the current spindle rotating speed. Displays the transmission amount of the blade breakage detector. [optional accessory] Presents a bar graph to indicate the progress of cutting. Presents a percentage value to indicate the progress of cutting.

D-17

STATUS OF CUTTING screen --- DAC mode --- (Continued) [Function Key] Press F1 F2 F3 F4 F5 F6 F7 F8 F9 F10 To Unused Effect the blade height correction defined by [8]. Call up the BLADE INFORMATION 2 screen (data reference screen). Unused Unused Unused Effect the feed speed change defined by [9]. Unused Initiate cutting in accordance with the device data for precut feed speed. Unused

D-18

1-2-1-5. BLADE INFORMATION 2 screen


BLADE INFORMATION 2 screen This screen is displayed during cutting operation (STATUS OF CUTTING screen) and enables you to confirm the information about the blade currently used. This screen can also be displayed at the time of stop correction . Since this screen is provided for data confirmation/reference, data other than [1], [27] or [28] cannot be edited. [Screen]
D I S C O D I C E R S E R I E S < DAD321 >YY-MM-DD [ ] < BLADE INFORMATION2 > UNIT : [1] BLADE SPEC.( [2] ) : [3] : : : : [5] [7] [9] [11] mm mm mm mm

BLADE TYPE : [4] BLADE THICKNESS BLADE O.D. : [6] mm BLADE EXPOSURE FLANGE O.D. : [8] mm CURRENT EXPOSURE AUTODOWN AMOUNT : [10] mm RUN OUT VOLUME SETUP POSITION : [12] mm ( [13] mm) BETWEEN C/T&SEN. : [14] mm SPINDLE CURR CLEARANCE BETWEEN FLANGE AND WORK SURFACE

: [15] A : [16] mm

BLADE WEAR CHECK BLADE LIFE EXCESSIVE WEAR : [17] mm LINE AMOUNT : [19] LINE INSUFFICIANT WEAR : [18] mm CARIBRATION : [20] m CUMULATIUE CUT SINCE DISTANCE # OF CUT BLADE WEAR BLADE EXCHANGE : [21] m [22] LINE [23] mm LAST SETUP : [24] m [25] LINE [26] mm LAST RESET : [27] m [28] LINE F1:SELECT F2: F3:COUNTER CLR F4: F5 : F6: F7: F8: F9:PRECUT OFF F10:

[Setting Item]
Item No.

[1] [2] [3] [4] [5] [6] [7] [8] [9]

Descriptions Indicates the selected unit of measure (inches or millimeters). Effect inch/mm changeover as needed with the [F1] key. Indicates whether the employed blade is new or old. Shows the specification of the employed blade. Shows the type of the employed blade. Indicates the employed blade tip thickness. Indicates the outside diameter of the employed blade. Indicates the initial blade tip protrusion amount of the employed blade. Indicates the outside diameter of the employed flange type blade. Indicates the current blade tip protrusion amount of the employed blade.

D-19

BLADE INFORMATION 2 screen (Continued) [Setting Item]


Item No.

[10]

[11] [12] [13]

[14] [15] [16] [17]

[18]

[19] [20] [21] [22] [23] [24] [25] [26]

Descriptions Shows the amount of Z-axis descent when executing the blade wear compensation function (Z-axis auto-down) which is defined in the device data. Indicates the blade decentering amount. Indicates the setup position relative to the Z-axis origin. Indicates the noncontact setup position relative to the Z-axis origin. When chuck table setup is performed, the resulting indication is the same as [12]. Shows the distance between the chuck table and noncontact setup sensor. Indicates the current amount (load) through the spindle. [optional accessory] Indicates the tolerance value for work and flange at the time of setup. Indicates the permissible limit value of the blade diameter decrease from the previous setup time for the blade wear checkout to be conducted in the setup process. Indicates the permissible limit value of the blade diameter increase from the previous setup time for the blade wear checkout to be conducted in the setup process. Indicates the remaining number of lines until reaching the blade life limit. Indicates the remaining cut distance until reaching the blade life limit. Displays the cut distance to indicate the cumulative amount of cutting that has been done since the last blade replacement. Displays the number of cut lines to indicate the cumulative amount of cutting that has been done since the last blade replacement. Displays the blade wear amount to indicate the cumulative amount of cutting that has been done since the last blade replacement. Displays the cut distance to indicate the cumulative amount of cutting that has been done since the last setup. Displays the number of cut lines to indicate the cumulative amount of cutting that has been done since the last setup. Displays the blade wear amount to indicate the cumulative amount of cutting that has been done since the last setup.

D-20

BLADE INFORMATION 2 screen (Continued) [Setting Item]


Item No.

[27]

[28]

Descriptions Displays the cut distance to indicate the cumulative amount of cutting that has been done since the last zero clear which was effected by pressing the <F3> key. Displays the number of cut lines to indicate the cumulative amount of cutting that has been done since the last zero clear which was effected by pressing the <F3> key.

[Function Key] Press F1 F2 F3 F4 F5 F6 F7 F8 F9 F10 To Switch unit between inch and mm. Unused Clear the accumulative amounts of cutting ([27] and [28]) to zero. Unused Unused Unused Unused Unused Turn OFF the currently executed precutting function. Unused

D-21

1-2-2. Semi auto cutting related screens


Summary of this section This section describes the screens displayed when performing a semi auto cutting. Note that the semi auto cutting can be selected only while DAD mode is selected. Section No. Title 1-2-2-1 SEMI AUTO CUT screen [screen 2.0] --- DAD mode --1-2-2-2 SINGLE CHANNEL ALIGNMENT screen

D-22

1-2-2-1. SEMI AUTO CUT screen [screen 2.0] --- DAD mode --SEMI AUTO CUT screen [screen 2.0] The SEMI AUTO CUT screen [screen 2.0] is the alignment screen when selecting the semi auto cutting by pressing the <F2> key from the MAIN MENU screen [screen 0.0] in DAD mode. The SEMI AUTO CUT screen can be selected only while DAD mode is selected. - The STATUS OF CUTTING screen for the semi auto cutting is same as the one for DAD mode auto cutting. See the section 1-2-1-3 of this chapter, [STATUS OF CUTTING screen --DAD mode--]. [Screen]
D I S C O D I C E R S E R I E S < DAD321 >YY-MM-DD [ ] 2.0 < SEMI AUTO CUT > DIRECTRY [1] DEVICE DATA No. [2] NOW IN : [6] AUTO DOWN AMOUNT : [3] mm SENSITIVITY(B.B.D) : [7] ALIGN ESC. AMOUNT : [4] mm #OF CUT(0=ALL) : [8] HEIGHT ADJUST : [5] mm CHANGE SPEED : [9] (-:DEEP/+:SHALLOW)

% mm/s

---------------------------------------------------------------After alignment is completed, choose cut direction (F5 or F10) and press START. F1:ESCAPE REAR F6:ESCAPE FRONT F2:HEI_CHG F3: F4:1ch ALIGN. F5 :REAR F7:SPD_CHG F8:MEASURE F9:PRECUT ON F10:FRONT

[Setting Item]
Item No.

[1] [2] [3] [4] [5] [6] [7]

Descriptions Indicates the name of the directory where the device data to be used is stored. [optional accessory] Indicates the device data No. to be used for cutting. Shows the cumulative amount of Z-axis descent which will be brought about by auto-down feature execution. Enter the amount of cutting start position correction to be made relative to the alignment position. Enter the correction value for the amount left uncut change to be applied during cutting. Displays the channel for which alignment is currently performed. Indicates the amount of blade breakage detector transmission during cutting. [optional accessory]

D-23

SEMI AUTO CUT screen [screen 2.0] (Continued) [Setting Item]


Item No.

[8] [9]

Descriptions Enter the number of cutting lines. If 0 is entered, the stroke control function is exercised. Enter the numerical value for the feed speed change to be applied during cutting.

[Function Key] Press F1 F2 F3 F4 F5 F6 F7 F8 F9 F10 To Shift the cutting start position rearward by the specified alignment escape amount. Make the correction for amount left cut defined by [5]. Unused Call up the SINGLE CHANNEL ALIGNMENT screen. Select the rearward cutting operation forward that is to start from the alignment position. Shift the cutting start position forward by the specified alignment escape amount. Effect the feed speed change defined by [9]. Call up the Y-AXIS MEASURE screen [screen 6.2]. Initiate cutting in accordance with the device data for precut feed speed. Select the forward cutting operation that is to start from the alignment position.

D-24

1-2-2-2. SINGLE CHANNEL ALIGNMENT screen


SINGLE CHANNEL ALIGNMENT screen This is an alignment screen which appears when the <F4> key is pressed from the SEMI AUTO CUT screen [screen 2.0] in the semi auto cutting process. [Screen]
D I S C O D I C E R S E R I E S < DAD321 >YY-MM-DD [ ] < SINGLE CHANNEL ALIGNMENT > CHANNEL : [1]

Align the theta axis, perform street adjust then press the ENTER key. F1: F6: F2: F7: F3: F8: F4: F9: F5 :ALIGN F10:LIGHT ADJ

[Setting Item]
Item No.

[1]

Descriptions Shows the current channel.

[Function Key] Press F1 F2 F3 F4 F5 F6 F7 F8 F9 F10 To Unused Unused Unused Unused Cause the X-axis to conduct an automatic scan to select the angle adjustment process. Unused Unused Unused Unused Call up the LIGHT ADJUSTMENT screen. --- 341/381 only ---

D-25

1-3. Screens Related to Correction during Cutting


Summary of this section This section describes the screens displayed when suspending cutting to perform corrections. Section No. Title 1-3-1 STOP CORRECTION screen (cutting correction screen) 1-3-2 KERF CHECK DATA 1 screen (stop correction process) 1-3-3 KERF CHECK DATA 2 screen (stop correction process) [optional accessory] 1-3-4 LIGHT ADJUSTMENT screen --- 341/381 only ---

D-26

1-3-1. STOP CORRECTION screen (cutting correction screen)


STOP CORRECTION screen (cutting correction screen) STOP CORRECTION screen is used to correct the cutting position or like while a cutting process is temporarily halted (by pressing the <STOP> key in the middle of cutting). Note that this screen is used in both the DAD mode and DAC mode. [Screen]
D I S C O D I C E R S E R I E S < DAD321 >YY-MM-DD [ ] STOP < STOP CORRECTION > DIRECTRY [1] DEVICE No. [2] CHANNEL: [3] [4] / [5] BLADE HEIGHT [6] mm FEED SPEED [7] mm/s HEIGHT ADJUST [8] mm (-DEEP/+SHALLOW) CHANGE SPEED [9] mm/s BLADE BREAKAGE LEVEL [10] % FROM BLADE XCHG [11] m Press START to cutting.Press EXIT to cut stop. [12] lines F1:HAIR ADJ. F2:HEIGHT F3:BLADE F4:KERF F5 :CUT POS ADJ F6: F7:SPEED F8:MEASURE F9:PRECUT ON F10:LIGHT ADJ

[Setting Item]
Item No.

[1] [2] [3] [4] [5] [6] [7] [8] [9] [10]

Descriptions Shows the directry used for the current cutting operation. [optional accessory] Shows the device No. used for the current cutting operation. Indicates the channel position for the current cutting operation. Indicates the number of cut lines of the current cutting channel. Indicates the total number of cut lines of the channel currently cut. Indicates the height value prevailing during cutting. Indicates the feed speed prevailing during cutting. Enter a correction value when correcting the amount left uncut value during cutting. Enter a new feed speed value when changing the feed speed for the cutting process. Indicates the amount of blade breakage detector transmission. [optional accessory]

D-27

STOP CORRECTION screen (cutting correction screen) (Continued) [Setting Item]


Item No.

[11] [12]

Descriptions Indicates the cumulative cut length that has been attained since last blade replacement. Indicates the cumulative number of lines that have been cut since last blade replacement.

[Function Key] Press F1 F2 F3 To Finalize the correction values for hairline and kerf position alignment. Make the blade height correction defined by [8]. Call up the BLADE INFORMATION 2 screen (data reference screen). See the section 1-2-1-5 of this chapter, [BLADE INFORMATION 2 screen]. Call up the KERF CHECK DATA 1 screen. Finalize the correction value for Y-direction cutting position. Unused Effect the feed speed change defined by [9]. Call up the Y-AXIS MEASURE screen [screen 6.2]. Initiate cutting in compliance with the device data setup for precutting feed speed. Call up the LIGHT ADJUSTMENT screen. --- 341/381 only ---

F4 F5 F6 F7 F8 F9 F10

D-28

1-3-2. KERF CHECK DATA 1 screen (stop correction process)


KERF CHECK DATA 1 screen [screen KERF 1] KERF CHECK DATA 1 screen is used to specify the kerf check data while a cutting process is temporarily halted (during stop correction). Press the <F4> key from the STOP CORRECTION screen to call up this screen. - The function keys of <F3> through <F9> can be used for the machine incorporating the kerf check function [optional accessory]. [Screen]
D I S C O D I C E R S E R I E S < DAD321 >YY-MM-DD [ ] < KERF CHECK DATA1 > KERF1

<<CHECK FRQ.>> EVERY [1] LINES [2] m FIRST CHECK SUBSEQUENT CHECKS CH1 [3] LINE CH1 [4] LINES CH2 [5] LINE CH2 [6] LINES CH3 [7] LINE CH3 [8] LINES CH4 [9] LINE CH4 [10] LINES <<LIGHT LEVEL>> DIR [11] % OBL [12] % <<NOW LIGHT>> DIR [13] % OBL [14] %

F1: F6:THROUGH

F2: F7:

F3:DATA2 F8:

F4:RETEACH POS. F9:SHOW FMEM

F5 :CHECK RUN F10:LIGHT ADJ

[Setting Item]
Item No.

[1] [2] [3] [4] [5] [6] [7]

Descriptions Enter the number of lines to be subjected to the kerf check. Enter the distance to be subjected to the kerf check. Enter the number of lines for CH 1 to define the timing of checkout initiation relative to the start of cutting. Define the intervals at which the check is to be repeated following the first check defined by [3]. Enter the number of lines for CH 2 to define the timing of checkout initiation relative to the start of cutting. Define the intervals at which the check is to be repeated following the first check defined by [5]. Enter the number of lines for CH 3 to define the timing of checkout initiation relative to the start of cutting.

D-29

KERF CHECK DATA 1 screen [screen KERF 1] (Continued) [Setting Item]


Item No.

[8] [9] [10] [11]

[12]

[13] [14]

Descriptions Define the intervals at which the check is to be repeated following the first check defined by [7]. Enter the number of lines for CH 4 to define the timing of checkout initiation relative to the start of cutting. Define the intervals at which the check is to be repeated following the first check defined by [9]. Displays the direct light intensity defined in the LIGHT ADJUSTMENT screen which appears at the press of the <F10> key. --- 341/381 only --Displays the oblique light intensity defined in the LIGHT ADJUSTMENT screen which appears at the press of the <F10> key. --- 341/381 only --Displays the current direct light intensity. Displays the current oblique light intensity.

[Function Key] Press F1 F2 F3 F4 F5 F6 F7 F8 F9 F10 To Unused Unused Call up the KERF CHECK DATA 2 screen [screen KERF 2]. Change the kerf check X-axis position. Initiate kerf check function execution. Display the camera image only. Unused Unused Switch from the camera image, which has been displayed at the press of the <F6> key, to the kerf check result screen. Call up the LIGHT ADJUSTMENT screen. ---341/381 only ---

D-30

1-3-3. KERF CHECK DATA 2 screen (stop correction process) [optional accessory]
KERF CHECK DATA 2 screen [screen KERF 2] [optional accessory] The KERF CHECK DATA 2 screen [screen KERF 2] is called up by pressing the <F3> key from the KERF CHECK DATA 1 screen [screen KERF 1]. [Screen]
D I S C O D I C E R S E R I E S < DAD321 >YY-MM-DD [ ] < KERF CHECK DATA2 > KERF2

<<PERMISSION>>MODE: [1] KERF SCORE : [2] % OFFCENT CALL : [4] mm OFFCENT ADJ. : [5] mm WIDTH MAX. : [6] mm MIN. : [8] mm Incl.Chpng : [10] mm Cntr-Chpng : [12] mm CHIPPING MAX : [14] mm CHIPPING AREA: [16] pix. CHECK OBJECT : [18] SENS.: RETRY TIMES : [20] BLOW:

ERROR [3]

[7] [9] [11] [13] [15] [17] [19] [21]

F1:SELECT F2: F3:DATA1 F6:THROUGH F7:NOWPOS CHK F8:

F4:RETEACH POS. F9:SHOW FMEM

F5 :CHECK RUN F10:LIGHT ADJ

[Setting Item]
Item No.

[1]

[2]

[3]

Descriptions Specify the check mode. Use the <F1> key to choose between OPERATOR and KERF. OPERATOR Issues an operator call at the time of kerf check. KERF Checks the on-screen hairline and cut line. Enter the judgment threshold level for kerf recognition. If the recognized level is lower than this setting, the system gives an error indication. Specify the percentage as the contrast between the kerf and street. The greater the contrast value is, the greater the density difference between the kerf groove and street is and thus the higher the kerf measurement accuracy can be obtained. Specify the error processing to be performed when the recognized level is lower than the threshold level setting [2]. Use the <F1> key to switch between CALL and SKIP. CALL Issues an operator call. SKIP Skips the kerf check (ignores the error).

D-31

KERF CHECK DATA 2 screen [screen KERF 2] [optional accessory] (Continued) [Setting Item]
Item No.

[4] [5] [6] [7]

[8] [9]

[10] [11]

[12] [13]

[14] [15]

[16] [17]

Descriptions Enter the threshold off-center value for operator call issuance. Enter the threshold off-center value for automatic correction processing. Enter the maximum permissible kerf width. Specify the processing to be performed when the kerf width exceeds the maximum limit defined in the column [6]. Use the <F1> key to choose between CALL and PRECUT. CALL Issues an operator call. PRECUT Starts automatic precutting. Enter the minimum permissible kerf width. Specify the processing to be performed when the kerf width exceeds the minimum limit defined in the column [8]. Use the <F1> key to choose between CALL and PRECUT. Enter the maximum permissible width including the kerf and maximum chipping on both sides. Specify the processing to be performed when the width exceeds the maximum limit defined in the column [10]. Use the <F1> key to choose between CALL and PRECUT. Enter the permissible distance between the kerf center and maximum chipping. Specify the processing to be performed when the distance exceeds the maximum limit defined in the column [12]. Use the <F1> key to choose between CALL and PRECUT. Enter the maximum permissible chipping width. Specify the processing to be performed when the chipping width exceeds the maximum limit defined in the column [14]. Use the <F1> key to choose between CALL and PRECUT. Enter the maximum permissible chipping area. Specify the processing to be performed when the area size exceeds the maximum limit defined in the column [16]. Use the <F1> key to choose between CALL and PRECUT.

D-32

KERF CHECK DATA 2 screen [screen KERF 2] [optional accessory] (Continued) [Setting Item]
Item No.

[18]

[19]

[20] [21]

Descriptions Specify the check target to establish the kerf center determination standard. This data entry also provides the standard for calculating the distance between the screen center and maximum chipping. Use the <F1> key to select CENTER, UPPER or LOWER. CENTER Makes kerf center measurement from both edges of the recognized kerf groove. UPPER Makes kerf center measurement with reference to the upper kerf edge. LOWER Makes kerf center measurement with reference to the lower kerf edge. Enter the check sensitivity. If, for instance, the central part of the wide kerf is reflected by water or the like, reduce the sensitivity to prevent the central part from being misrecognized as a kerf. Enter the number of retrials of kerf check to be repeated in the event of a kerf check error. Enter the time period of air blowing which is to be conducted before kerf check initiation.

[Function Key] Press F1 F2 F3 F4 F5 F6 F7 F8 F9 F10 To Changes the kerf check mode or method of error processing to be performed when the permissible limit is exceeded. Unused Call up the KERF CHECK DATA 3 screen [screen KERF 3]. Change the kerf check X-axis position. Initiate kerf check function execution. Switch from the camera image, which has been displayed at the press of the <F9> key, to the kerf check result screen. Initiate the current position kerf check function execution. Unused Switch from the camera image, which has been displayed at the press of the <F6> key, to the kerf check result screen. Call up the LIGHT ADJUSTMENT screen. --- 341/381 only ---

D-33

1-3-4. LIGHT ADJUSTMENT screen ---341/381 only--LIGHT ADJUSTMENT screen [screen LIGHT] LIGHT ADJUSTMENT screen [screen LIGHT] is used to adjust the light intensity for microscope images. [Screen]
D I S C O D I C E R S E R I E S < DAD321 >YY-MM-DD [ ] < LIGHT ADJUSTMENT > LIGHT

-5 -1 F1 F2 F6 F7 20% 10%

10

20

30

40

50

60

70

80

90

100 +1 +5 F3 F4 F8 F9

DEFAULT LEVEL DIRECT [1] % OBLIQUE [2] % Press ENTER key to register current light level to DEFAULT light level. F1:DIRECT-5 F2:DIRECT-1 F3:DIRECT+1 F4:DIRECT+5 F6:OBLIQUE-5 F7:OBLIQUE-1 F8:OBLIQUE+1 F9:OBLIQUE+5 F5 : F10:DEFAULT

[Setting Item]
Item No.

[1]

[2]

Descriptions Displays the default light intensity of direct lighting. The current light intensity can be set to the default value by pressing the <ENTER> key. Displays the default light intensity of oblique lighting. The current light intensity can be set to the default value by pressing the <ENTER> key.

[Function Key] Press To F1 Decrease the direct light intensity by 5%. F2 Decrease the direct light intensity by 1%. F3 Increase the direct light intensity by 1%. F4 Increase the direct light intensity by 5%. F5 Unused F6 Decrease the oblique light intensity by 5%. F7 Decrease the oblique light intensity by 1%. F8 Increase the oblique light intensity by 1%. F9 Increase the oblique light intensity by 5%. F10 Return the light intensity to the default setting.

D-34

1-4. Device Data Related Screens


Summary of this section This section describes the device data related screens that are used to define, change or confirm the cutting conditions. Section No. Title 1-4-1 Copying, deleting or renaming the device data Contents Procedures for copying, deleting or renaming the device data and screens to be used for those purposes - DEVICE DATA LIST screen - DEVICE DATA COPY screen - DEVICE DATA DELETE screen - DEVICE DATA RENAME screen Device data related screens in DAD mode - DEVICE DATA 1 screen - DEVICE DATA 2 screen - DEVICE DATA 3 screen - KERF CHECK FUNCTION PARAMETER screen - PRECUT DATA screen Device data related screens in DAC mode - DEVICE DATA 1 screen - DEVICE DATA 2 screen - DEVICE DATA 3 screen - SIMULATION screen

1-4-2

Device data related screens --- DAD mode ---

1-4-3

Device data related screens --- DAC mode ---

D-35

1-4-1. Copying, deleting or renaming the device data


Summary of this section This section describes the screens that are used to list, copy or delete a device data and change the device data name (device No.). Section No. 1-4-1-1 1-4-1-2 1-4-1-3 1-4-1-4 1-4-1-5 Title DEVICE DATA LIST screen [screen 4.0] Entering the data password DEVICE DATA COPY screen DEVICE DATA DELETE screen DEVICE DATA RENAME screen

D-36

1-4-1-1. DEVICE DATA LIST screen [screen 4.0]


DEVICE DATA LIST screen [screen 4.0] When you press the <DEVICE DATA> key on the operation panel or press the <F4> key from the MAIN MENU screen [screen 0.0], the DEVICE DATA LIST screen [screen 4.0] appears. This screen is used to list, copy or delete a device data, change the data name (device No.) or call up data for the purpose of entering, editing or confirming the cutting condition setup. - A single screen page contains up to 10 data listings. - Pressing the <EXIT> key returns the system to the MAIN MENU screen [screen 0.0]. [Screen]
D I S C O D I C E R S E R I E S < DAD321 >YY-MM-DD [ ] 4.0 < DEVICE DATA LIST > +----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------+ | DIRECTORY | DEVICE No. DEVICE ID. | +------------------+--------------------------------------------------------------------------+ | | [1] 000 [2] DISCO | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | +--------------------------------------------------------------------------+ | | DEVICE No. [3] DATA: [5] TOTAL: [6] | | | DEVICE ID [4] | +----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------+ Device data can be called up with the ENTER key. F1:PREVIOUS F2:COPY F3: F4:RENAME F5 :DELETE F6:NEXT F7:MOVE CUR F8: F9: F10:REGISTRATION

[Setting Item]
Item No.

[1] [2] [3] [4]

[5] [6]

Descriptions The device No. is displayed. The device ID is displayed. Enter the target device No. Up to 8 alphanumeric characters can be used for the device No. Enter the target device ID name (20 characters maximum). Note that a device data cannot be called up by specifying only its device ID name. The number of device data currently registered is displayed. The number of device data currently registered is displayed. Indicates the number of data stored in the all directories of the hard disk if the hard disk is installed [optional accessory].

D-37

DEVICE DATA LIST screen [screen 4.0] (Continued) [Function Key] Press F1 F2 F3 F4 F5 F6 F7 F8 F9 F10 To Display the previous page of the device data list. Copy the designated device data. Unused Rename the designated device data. Call up the DEVICE DATA DELETE screen [screen 4.5]. Display the next page of the device data list. Move the cursor between the [1]/[2] area and [3]/[4]/[5]/[6] area. Unused Unused Finalize data entries in [3] and [4] and go back to the screen before you displayed the DEVICE DATA LIST screen [screen 4.0].

D-38

1-4-1-2. Entering the data password


Data password screen The input of "data password" is required for calling up lower-level screens from the DEVICE DATA LIST screen [screen 4.0]. From the DEVICE DATA LIST screen [screen 4.0], press the <ENTER>, <F2>, <F4> or <F5> key to call up the PASSWORD screen. [Screen]
D I S C O D I C E R S E R I E S < DAD321 >YY-MM-DD [ ] =========== Pass Word Screen ===========

ENTER PASSWORD...??

[1]

[Setting Item]
Item No.

Descriptions Enter the data password.

[1] Entering data password


Step No.

Do

This

1 2 3

Enter the data password. Press the <ENTER> key. A device data related screen (lower-level screen linked to screen 4.0) appears only when the entered password is correct.

D-39

1-4-1-3. DEVICE DATA COPY screen


DEVICE DATA COPY screen DEVICE DATA COPY screen is used to copy a registered device data to an unoccupied device No. location. To call up the this screen, select the target device data on the DEVICE DATA LIST screen [screen 4.0] and press the <F2> key. Then enter the "DATA PASSWORD" from the displayed PASSWORD screen. The screen for the target device data is displayed. - For the reference data (No.000), no addition or change is permitted. - While the device No. input window is displayed, any function key does not work. [Screen]
D I S C O D I C E R S E R I E S < DAD321 >YY-MM-DD [ ] 4.0 < DEVICE DATA LIST > +----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------+ | DIRECTORY | DEVICE No. DEVICE ID. | +------------------+--------------------------------------------------------------------------+ | | [1] 000 [2] DISCO | | | | | | | Input device No. | | | [7] | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | +--------------------------------------------------------------------------+ | | DEVICE No. [3] DATA: [5] TOTAL: [6] | | | DEVICE ID [4] | +----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------+ Device data can be called up with the ENTER key. F1:PREVIOUS F2:COPY F3: F4:RENAME F5 :DELETE F6:NEXT F7:MOVE CUR F8: F9: F10:REGISTRATION

[Setting Item]
Item No.

[1] [2] [3] [4] [5] [6]

[7]

Descriptions The device No. is displayed. The device ID is displayed. Enter the target device No. Up to 8 alphanumeric characters can be used for the device No. Enter the target device ID name. Note that a device data cannot be called up by specifying only its device ID name. The number of device data currently registered is displayed. The number of device data currently registered is displayed. Indicates the number of data stored in the all directories of the hard disk if the hard disk is installed [optional accessory]. Input the new device data No.

D-40

1-4-1-4. DEVICE DATA DELETE screen


DEVICE DATA DELETE screen [screen DELETE] DEVICE DATA DELETE screen [screen DELETE] is used to delete the designated device data from the DEVICE DATA LIST screen [screen 4.0]. To call up the this screen, select the target device data on the DEVICE DATA LIST screen [screen 4.0] and press the <F5> key. Then enter the "DATA PASSWORD" from the displayed PASSWORD screen. The screen for the target device data is displayed. - Pressing the <ENTER> key deletes the target device data. [Screen]
D I S C O D I C E R S E R I E S < DAD321 >YY-MM-DD [ ] < DEVICE DATA > DIRECTRY DEVICE DATA No. ID UNIT CUT MODE CUT SHAPE SPINDLE REV. DELETE

rpm

RND WORK SIZE SQR WORK SIZE CH1 CH2 FEED SPEED Y INDEX

mm mm mm mm/s mm mm m mm mm/s % % LINES

WORK THICKNESS mm TAPE THICKNESS mm BLADE HEIGHT mm BLADE WEAR ADJUSTMENT PRECUT DATA No. << AUTO SETUP DATA >> AUTO SETUP FOR CUTTING : CREATION DISTANCE.:

CH1 CH2

CUT LENGTH Z-ADJUST Z-AXIS DOWN SPEED ADJUST SWING CH1 CH2 m EVERY :

PUSH ENTER TO DELETE DATA.

D-41

1-4-1-5. DEVICE DATA RENAME screen


DEVICE DATA RENAME screen DEVICE DATA RENAME screen is used to change the device No. already existed in the DEVICE DATA LIST screen [screen 4.0]. To call up the this screen, select the target device data on the DEVICE DATA LIST screen [screen 4.0] and press the <F4> key. Then enter the "DATA PASSWORD" from the displayed PASSWORD screen. The screen for the target device data is displayed. - For the reference device data (No.000), no addition or change is permitted. - Do not enter the existing device No. as the new No. Input a non-existing device No. [Screen]
D I S C O D I C E R S E R I E S < DAD321 >YY-MM-DD [ ] 4.0 < DEVICE DATA LIST > +----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------+ | DIRECTORY | DEVICE No. DEVICE ID. | +------------------+--------------------------------------------------------------------------+ | | [1] 000 [2] DISCO | | | | | | | Input device No. | | | [7] | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | +--------------------------------------------------------------------------+ | | DEVICE No. [3] DATA: [5] TOTAL: [6] | | | DEVICE ID [4] | +----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------+ Device data can be called up with the ENTER key. F1:PREVIOUS F2:COPY F3: F4:RENAME F5 :DELETE F6:NEXT F7:MOVE CUR F8: F9: F10:REGISTRATION

[Setting Item]
Item No.

[1] [2] [3] [4]

[5]

Descriptions The device No. is displayed. The device ID is displayed. Enter the target device No. Up to 8 alphanumeric characters can be used for the device No. Enter the target device ID name. Note that a device data cannot be called up by specifying only its device ID name. The number of device data currently registered is displayed.

D-42

DEVICE DATA RENAME screen (Continued) [Setting Item]


Item No.

[6]

[7]

Descriptions The number of device data currently registered is displayed. Indicates the number of data stored in the all directories of the hard disk if the hard disk is installed [optional accessory]. Input the new device No.

[Function Key] Press F1 F2 F3 F4 F5 F6 F7 F8 F9 F10 To Display the previous page of the device data list. Copy the designated device data. Unused Rename the designated device data. Call up the DEVICE DATA DELETE screen [screen 4.5]. Display the following page of the device data list. Move the cursor between the [1]/[2] area and [3]/[4]/[5]/[6] area. Unused Unused Finalize data entries in [3] and [4] and go back to the screen before you displayed the DEVICE DATA LIST screen [screen 4.0].

D-43

1-4-2. Device data related screens --- DAD mode --Summary of this section This section describes the device data related screens that are called up from the DEVICE DATA LIST screen [screen 4.0] in DAD mode. Section No. 1-4-2-1 1-4-2-2 1-4-2-3 1-4-2-4 1-4-2-5 1-4-2-6 1-4-2-7 Title DEVICE DATA 1 screen [screen 4.2] DEVICE DATA 2 screen [screen 4.3] DEVICE DATA 3 screen [screen 4.4] KERF CHECK FUNCTION PARAMETER screen [screen 4.7] PRECUT DATA (auto control) screen [screen 6.1.1] PRECUT DATA (number of lines control) screen [screen 6.1.1] PRECUT DATA (length control) screen [screen 6.1.1]

D-44

1-4-2-1. DEVICE DATA 1 screen [screen 4.2]


DEVICE DATA 1 screen [screen 4.2] To call up the DEVICE DATA 1 screen [screen 4.2], press the <ENTER> key from the DEVICE DATA LIST screen [screen 4.0]. This screen is used to specify, change or confirm the basic cutting data. The input of "data password" is required for calling up this screen. - Data entry in the columns [23], [24] and [25] can be made only when the optional noncontact setup function is incorporated. [Screen]
DAD321 YY-MM-DD [ ] 4.2 DEVICE DATA1 DIRECTRY [1] DEVICE DATA No. [2]1234567 UNIT CUT MODE CUT SHAPE SPINDLE REV. [4] MM [5] A [6] ROUND [7] 30000 rpm

ID [3]DATA-1

RND WORK SIZE [8] 152.400 mm SQR WORK SIZE CH1 [9] 0.000 mm CH2 [10] 0.000 mm FEED SPEED Y INDEX [14] 100.0 mm/s CH1 [15] 2.000 mm CH2 [16] 1.000 mm CUT LENGTH [17] 0.000 m Z-ADJUST [18] 0.020 mm Z-AXIS DOWN SPEED [20] 10.00 mm/s -ADJUST SWING CH1 [21] 70 % CH2 [22] 70 % LINES F5 : F10:

WORK THICKNESS [11]1.000 mm TAPE THICKNESS [12]0.080 mm BLADE HEIGHT [13]0.480 mm BLADE WEAR ADJUSTMENT PRECUT DATA No. [19] 1

<< AUTO SETUP DATA >> AUTO SETUP FOR CUTTING :[23] YES CREATION DISTANCE :[24] 0.000 m EVERY :[25] 0 F1:SELECT F2: F3:DATA2 F4:DATA3 F6: F7:KERF CHECK F8:MEASURE F9:PRECUT

[Setting Item]
Item No.

[1] [2] [3]

[4] [5]

[6]

Descriptions Indicates the name of the directory where the device data to be used is stored. [optional accessory] The device data No. is displayed. This screen cannot be used to set the device data No. The device ID is displayed. To change the device ID, use the operation panel keys to write it over (20 characters maximum). Inch or mm is displayed. Switching between inch and mm can be effected by pressing the <F1> key. Specify the cutting mode among A/B/AS/BS/A UP/AS UP/ B ZKEEP/BS ZKEEP. The AS/BS/AS UP/B ZEEP cutting modes are based on device data 2 and 3 screens. Changeover is to be effected with the <F1> key. ROUND (circle) or SQUARE (rectangle) is displayed. Switching between these modes can be effected by using the <F1> key.

D-45

DEVICE DATA 1 screen [screen 4.2] (Continued) [Setting Item]


Item No.

[7] [8] [9]

[10]

[11] [12] [13] [14] [15] [16] [17]

[18]

[19] [20] [21]

[22]

Descriptions Enter the spindle rotating speed. Enter the workpiece size when ROUND is selected for [6]. This setting is invalid when SQUARE is displayed at [6]. Enter the workpiece size of the channel 1 when SQUARE is selected for [6]. This setting is invalid when ROUND is displayed at [6]. Enter the workpiece size of the channel 2 when SQUARE is selected for [6]. This setting is invalid when ROUND is displayed at [6]. Enter the workpiece thickness. Enter the tape thickness measured from the chuck table top surface. Enter the amount left uncut. Enter the X-axis feed speed. Enter the Y index movement amount of the channel 1. Enter the Y index movement amount of the channel 2. Enter the cutting distance interval as the frequency of executing the blade wear compensation (Z-axis auto-down). If zero is entered, blade wear compensation does not take place. Enter the amount of Z-axis auto-down for blade wear compensation. If zero is entered, blade wear compensation does not take place. Enter the precut data No. to be used. Numerical characters 0 through 9 and alphabetical characters can be used for the number. Enter the Z-axis descent speed for the cutting process. When the <F5> key is pressed from the AUTO CUTTING screen [screen 1.0] or SINGLE CHANNEL ALIGNMENT screen, the -alignment of the channel 1 is performed. In this column, enter the percentage of the workpiece size (diameter) as the X-axis swing amount in this alignment. When the <F5> key is pressed from the AUTO CUTTING screen [screen 1.0] or SINGLE CHANNEL ALIGNMENT screen, the -alignment of the channel 2 is performed. In this column, enter the percentage of the workpiece size (diameter) as the X-axis swing amount in this alignment.

D-46

DEVICE DATA 1 screen [screen 4.2] (Continued) [Setting Item]


Item No.

[23]

[24]

[25]

Descriptions Make an entry to specify whether or not to perform auto-setup (noncontact setup) during cutting. Use the <F1> key to switch between YES and NO. NO Auto-setup is not performed if the cutting distance or the number of cut wafers is not specified in the columns [24] or [25]. Auto-setup is performed after completing cutting if the cutting distance or the number of cut wafers is specified. YES Auto-setup is performed in compliance with the setup conditions defined by [24] or [25]. The auto-setup frequency should be set by specifying the cutting distance. If zero is entered, auto-setup takes place according to the preselected number of wafers to be cut of [25]. The auto-setup frequency should be set by specifying the number of cut lines. If zero is entered, auto-setup takes place according to the preselected cutting distance of [24]. - When data entries [24] and [25] are both zero, auto-setup does not take place. - When data entries [24] and [25] other than zero are both made, auto-setup takes place when the previously set distance or number of lines is reached the specified value, whichever earlier.

[Function Key] Press F1 F2 F3 F4 F5 F6 F7 F8 F9 F10 To Effect inch/mm, cutting mode or workpiece shape changeover. Unused Call up the DEVICE DATA 2 screen [screen 4.3]. Call up the DEVICE DATA 3 screen [screen 4.4]. Unused Unused Call up the KERF CHECK FUNCTION PARAMETER screen [screen 4.7]. Call up the Y-AXIS MEASURE screen [screen 6.2]. Call up the PRECUT DATA screen [screen 6.1.1]. Unused

D-47

1-4-2-2. DEVICE DATA 2 screen [screen 4.3]


DEVICE DATA 2 screen [screen 4.3] To call up the DEVICE DATA 2 screen [screen 4.3], press the <F3> key from the DEVICE DATA 1 screen [screen 4.2]. This screen appears only when the AS/BS/AS UP/BS ZKEEP cutting mode is selected from the DEVICE DATA 1 screen [screen 4.2]. This screen is used to specify, change or confirm setup data for multiple indexing, multi-level cutting, rotation angles other than 90 and other cutting conditions. Note that this screen provides the setup of channels 1 and 2. To perform data setup for channels 3 and 4, press the <F3> key to call up the DEVICE DATA 3 screen [screen 4.4]. [Screen]
D I S C O D I C E R S E R I E S < DAD321 >YY-MM-DD [ ] 4.3 < DEVICE DATA2 > CUTTING CH. SEQ.: [1] CHANNEL BLADE HEIGHT FEED SPEED Y INDEX TIMES JUMP CH1-( SWING : [2] % / STROKE : [3] mm )----------------------------CUT DIR 1. [12]0.780 mm [13]100.0 mm/s [14]0.000 mm [15]0 [16]0 [4]REAR 2. 0.480 mm 100.0 mm/s 3.000 mm 0 0 AXIS 3. 0.780 mm 100.0 mm/s 0.000 mm 0 0 [5]0.000 4. 0.480 mm 100.0 mm/s 4.000 mm 0 0 CUT LINE 5. 0.000 mm 0.0 mm/s 0.000 mm 0 0 [6] 0 line 6. 0.000 mm 0.0 mm/s 0.000 mm 0 0 OFFSET NON-CUT AREA F [8] 0.0 mm BLADE WEAR [10]0.0 m [7]0.000 mm R [9] 0.0 mm ADJUSTMENT [11]0.0 mm CH2-( SWING : [2] % / STROKE : [3] mm )---------------------------CUT DIR 1. 0.980 mm 50.0 mm/s 0.000 mm 0 0 FRONT 2. 0.780 mm 50.0 mm/s 1.000 mm 0 0 AXIS 3. 0.980 mm 50.0 mm/s 0.000 mm 0 0 90.000 4. 0.780 mm 50.0 mm/s 2.000 mm 0 0 CUT LINE 5. 0.000 mm 0.0 mm/s 0.000 mm 0 0 0 line 6. 0.000 mm 0.0 mm/s 0.000 mm 0 0 OFFSET NON-CUT AREA F 0.0 mm BLADE WEAR 0.0 m 0.000 mm R 0.0mm ADJUSTMENT 0.0 mm F1:SELECT F2:DATA1 F3: F4:DATA3 F5 : F6: F7:KERF CHECKF8:MEASURE F9:PRECUT F10:

[Setting Item]
Item No.

[1] [2] [3] [4]

Descriptions Enter numerical values sequentially to specify the channels 1 and 2 cutting order. Enter the -axis swing width for each channel. Enter the -axis swing distance for each channel. Enter the cutting direction for each channel. Select a cutting direction FRONT or REAR with the <F1> key. FRONT Cutting from rear to front. REAR Cutting from front to rear. Enter the rotation angle between the -axis origin and each channel. Enter the number of cut lines for each channel. If zero is entered, the system exercises stroke control.
D-48

[5] [6]

DEVICE DATA 2 screen [screen 4.3] (Continued) [Setting Item]


Item No.

[7] [8]

[9]

[10]

[11]

[12] [13] [14] [15] [16]

Descriptions Cutting takes place with the cutting position shifted by the entered amount from the street adjusted position. Define the front width of the cutting prohibition area (such as the orientation flat) by entering the amount to be subtracted from the workpiece size. Define the rear width of the cutting prohibition area (such as the orientation flat) by entering the amount to be subtracted from the workpiece size. Enter the cutting spacing intervals at which the blade wear compensation (Z-axis auto-down) function is to be executed. If zero is entered, the Z-axis auto-down function will not be executed. Enter the blade wear compensation (Z-axis auto-down) amount. If zero is entered, the Z-axis auto-down function will not be executed. Enter the amount left uncut setting for each channel. Enter the feed speed for each channel. Enter the index amount for each channel. Enter the number of repetitive cutting lines for each item. Select a number for a jump to a cutting item.

[Function Key] Press F1 F2 F3 F4 F5 F6 F7 F8 F9 F10 To Effect cutting direction changeover. Call up the DEVICE DATA 1 screen [screen 4.2]. Unused Call up the DEVICE DATA 3 screen [screen 4.4]. Unused Unused Call up the KERF CHECK FUNCTION PARAMETER screen [screen 4.7]. Call up the Y-AXIS MEASURE screen [screen 6.2]. Call up the PRECUT DATA screen [screen 6.1.1]. Unused

D-49

1-4-2-3. DEVICE DATA 3 screen [screen 4.4]


DEVICE DATA 3 screen [screen 4.4] To call up the DEVICE DATA 3 screen [screen 4.4], press the <F3> key from the DEVICE DATA 2 screen [screen 4.3]. Note that this screen provides the setup of channels 3 and 4. To perform data setup for channels 1 and 2, press the <F3> key to call up the DEVICE DATA 1 screen [screen 4.2]. [Screen]
D I S C O D I C E R S E R I E S < DAD321 >YY-MM-DD [ ] 4.4 < DEVICE DATA3 > CHANNEL BLADE HEIGHT FEED SPEED Y INDEX TIMES JUMP CH3-( SWING : [14]% / STROKE : [15] mm )------------------------------CUT DIR 1. [9] 0.780 mm [10]100.0 mm/s [11]0.000 mm [12]0 [13]0 [1]REAR 2. 0.480 mm 100.0 mm/s 3.000 mm 0 0 AXIS 3. 0.780 mm 100.0 mm/s 0.000 mm 0 0 [2]0.000 4. 0.480 mm 100.0 mm/s 4.000 mm 0 0 CUT LINE 5. 0.000 mm 0.0 mm/s 0.000 mm 0 0 [3] 0 line 6. 0.000 mm 0.0 mm/s 0.000 mm 0 0 OFFSET NON-CUT AREA F [5] 0.0 mm BLADE WEAR [7] 0.0 m [4]0.000 mm R [6] 0.0 mm ADJUSTMENT [8] 0.0 mm CH4-( SWING : [14] % / STROKE : [15] mm )------------------------------CUT DIR 1. 0.980 mm 50.0 mm/s 0.000 mm 0 0 FRONT 2. 0.780 mm 50.0 mm/s 1.000 mm 0 0 AXIS 3. 0.980 mm 50.0 mm/s 0.000 mm 0 0 90.000 4. 0.780 mm 50.0 mm/s 2.000 mm 0 0 CUT LINE 5. 0.000 mm 0.0 mm/s 0.000 mm 0 0 0 line 6. 0.000 mm 0.0 mm/s 0.000 mm 0 0 OFFSET NON-CUT AREA F 0.0 mm BLADE WEAR 0.0 m 0.000 mm R 0.0 mm ADJUSTMENT 0.0 mm F1:SELECT F2:DATA1 F3:DATA2 F4: F5 : F6: F7:KERF CHECKF8:MEASURE F9:PRECUT F10:

[Setting Item]
Item No.

[1]

[2] [3] [4] [5]

[6]

Descriptions Enter the cutting direction for each channel. Select a cutting direction REAR or FRONT with the <F1> key. FRONT Cutting from rear to front. REAR Cutting from front to rear. Enter the rotation angle between the -axis origin and each channel. Enter the number of cut lines for each channel. If zero is entered, the system exercises stroke control. Cutting takes place with the cutting position shifted by the entered amount from the street adjusted position. Define the front width of the cutting prohibition area (such as the orientation flat) by entering the amount to be subtracted from the workpiece size. Define the rear width of the cutting prohibition area (such as the orientation flat) by entering the amount to be subtracted from the workpiece size.

D-50

DEVICE DATA 3 screen [screen 4.4] (Continued) [Setting Item]


Item No.

[7]

[8]

[9] [10] [11] [12] [13] [14] [15]

Descriptions Enter the cutting spacing intervals at which the Z-axis auto-down (blade wear compensation) function is to be executed. If zero is entered, the Z-axis auto-down function will not be executed. Enter the Z-axis auto-down (blade wear compensation) amount. If zero is entered, the Z-axis auto-down function will not be executed. Enter the amount-left-uncut setting for each channel. Enter the cutting speed for each channel. Enter the index amount for each channel. Enter the number of repetitive cutting lines for each item. Select a number for a jump to a cutting item. Enter the -axis swing width for each channel. Enter the -axis swing distance for each channel.

[Function Key] Press F1 F2 F3 F4 F5 F6 F7 F8 F9 F10 To Effect cutting direction changeover. Call up the DEVICE DATA 1 screen [screen 4.2]. Call up the DEVICE DATA 2 screen [screen 4.3]. Unused Unused Unused Call up the KERF CHECK FUNCTION PARAMETER screen [screen 4.7]. Call up the Y-AXIS MEASURE screen [screen 6.2]. Call up the PRECUT DATA screen [screen 6.1.1]. Unused

D-51

1-4-2-4. KERF CHECK FUNCTION PARAMETER screen [screen 4.7]


KERF CHECK FUNCTION PARAMETER screen [screen 4.7] KERF CHECK FUNCTION PARAMETER screen [screen 4.7] is used to specify, change or confirm the data related to a kerf check. - For the standard specification machine, data entries for the columns [1] through [10] can be made. For only the machine incorporating the kerf check function [optional accessory], data entries in the columns [11] through [33] can be made. [Screen]
D I S C O D I C E R S E R I E S < DAD321 >YY-MM-DD [ ] < KERF CHECK FUNCTION PARAMETER > CHECK FREQUENCY EVERY [1] 0 LINES 4.7

[2]0.000 m

CHANNEL FIRST CHECK SUBSEQUENT CHECKS CH1 [3] 10 LINE [7] 5 LINES CH2 [4] 10 LINE [8] 5 LINES CH3 [5] 0 LINE [9] 0 LINES CH4 [6] 0 LINE [10] 0 LINES -- PERMISSION -CHECK MODE : [11]KERF ERROR COUNTERMEASURE KERF SCORE [12] 50 % [13]CALL CHECK OBJECT [28]CENTER OFF CENTER CALL [14]0.070 mm SENSITIVENESS [29] 2 OFF CENTER ADJ. [15]0.000 mm RETRY TIMES [30] 3 KERF WIDTH MAX. [16]0.070 mm [17]CALL AIR BLOW TIMER [31] 5 s MIN. [18]0.030 mm [19]CALL LIGHT LEV(DIR) [32] 0 % INCLUDE CHIPPING [20]0.000 mm [21]CALL (OBL) [33] 0 % CENTER TO CHIPPING [22]0.020 mm [23]CALL CHIPPING SIZE MAX. [24]0.020 mm [25]CALL CHIPPING AREA [26] 4000 pix. [27]CALL F1:SELECT F2:DATA1 F3:DATA2 F4:DATA3 F5 : F6: F7: F8: F9:PRECUT F10:

[Setting Item]
Item No.

[1] [2]

[3] [4] [5] [6]

Descriptions Enter the number of lines to be subjected to the kerf check. Enter the distance setting for kerf check. When data entries [1] and [2] are both made, the kerf check will be conducted at each designated timing intervals. Specify the line to perform the first kerf check for the channel 1 by entering the number of lines counted from when starting cutting. Specify the line to perform the first kerf check for the channel 2 by entering the number of lines counted from when starting cutting. Specify the line to perform the first kerf check for the channel 3 by entering the number of lines counted from when starting cutting. Specify the line to perform the first kerf check for the channel 4 by entering the number of lines counted from when starting cutting.

D-52

KERF CHECK FUNCTION PARAMETER screen [screen 4.7] (Continued) [Setting Item]
Item No.

[7] [8] [9] [10] [11]

[12]

[13]

[14] [15] [16] [17]

[18] [19]

[20] [21]

[22]

Descriptions The frequency of checking after the check [3] should be set. The frequency of checking after the check [4] should be set. The frequency of checking after the check [5] should be set. The frequency of checking after the check [6] should be set. Specify the check mode. Use the <F1> key to switch between OPERATOR and KERF. OPERATOR Issues an operator call at the time of kerf check. KERF Checks the on-screen hairline and cut line. Enter the judgment threshold level for kerf recognition. If the recognized level is lower than this setting, the system gives an error indication. Specify the percentage as the contrast between the kerf and street. The greater the contrast value is, the greater the density difference between the kerf groove and street is and thus the higher the kerf measurement accuracy can be obtained. Specify the error processing to be performed when the recognized level is lower than the threshold level setting [12]. Use the <F1> key to switch between CALL and SKIP. CALL Issues an operator call. SKIP Skips the kerf check (ignores the error). Enter the threshold off-center value for operator call issuance. Enter the threshold off-center value for automatic correction processing. Enter the maximum permissible kerf width. Specify the processing to be performed when the kerf width exceeds the maximum limit defined in the column [16]. Use the <F1> key to switch between CALL and PRECUT. Enter the minimum permissible kerf width. Specify the processing to be performed when the kerf width exceeds the minimum limit defined in the column [18]. Use the <F1> key to switch between CALL and PRECUT. Enter the maximum permissible width including the kerf and maximum chipping on both sides. Specify the processing to be performed when the width exceeds the maximum limit defined in the column [20]. Use the <F1> key to switch between CALL and PRECUT. Enter the permissible distance between the kerf center and maximum chipping.

D-53

KERF CHECK FUNCTION PARAMETER screen [screen 4.7] (Continued) [Setting Item]
Item No.

[23]

[24] [25]

[26] [27]

[28]

[29]

[30] [31] [32] [33]

Descriptions Specify the processing to be performed when the distance exceeds the maximum limit defined in the column [22]. Use the <F1> key to switch between CALL and PRECUT. Enter the maximum permissible chipping width. Specify the processing to be performed when the chipping width exceeds the maximum limit defined in the column [24]. Use the <F1> key to switch between CALL and PRECUT. Enter the maximum permissible chipping area. Specify the processing to be performed when the area size exceeds the maximum limit defined in the column [26]. Use the <F1> key to switch between CALL and PRECUT. Specify the check target to establish the kerf center determination standard. The defined target is displayed at the center of the screen. Use the <F1> key to select CENTER, UPPER or LOWER. CENTER Makes kerf center measurement from both edges of the recognized kerf groove. UPPER Makes kerf center measurement with reference to the upper kerf edge. LOWER Makes kerf center measurement with reference to the lower kerf edge. Enter the check sensitivity. If, for instance, the central part of the wide kerf is reflected by water or the like, reduce the sensitivity to prevent the central part from being misrecognized as a kerf. Enter the number of retrials of kerf check to be repeated in the event of a kerf check error. Enter the time period of air blowing which is to be conducted before kerf check initiation. Displays the direct light intensity defined in the LIGHT ADJUSTMENT screen. --- 341/381 only --Displays the oblique light intensity defined in the LIGHT ADJUSTMENT screen. --- 341/381 only ---

D-54

KERF CHECK FUNCTION PARAMETER screen [screen 4.7] (Continued) [Function Key] Press F1 To Effect inch/mm changeover, check mode changeover or error processing (to be performed when the permissible limit is exceeded) method changeover. Call up the DEVICE DATA 1 screen [screen 4.2]. Call up the DEVICE DATA 2 screen [screen 4.3]. Call up the DEVICE DATA 3 screen [screen 4.4]. Unused Unused Unused Unused Call up the PRECUT DATA screen [screen 6.1.1]. Unused

F2 F3 F4 F5 F6 F7 F8 F9 F10

D-55

1-4-2-5. PRECUT DATA (auto control) screen [screen 6.1.1]


PRECUT DATA (auto control) screen [screen 6.1.1] The PRECUT DATA (auto control) screen [screen 6.1.1] is called up by pressing the <F9> key from the device data related screens [screen 4.*]. This screen enables you to change or confirm the precut process data setup while entering, editing or confirming the cutting conditions. - Pressing the <ENTER> key finalizes the entered precut data setup. - Pressing the <EXIT> key returns the system to a device data related screen [screen 4.*] [Screen]
D I S C O D I C E R S E R I E S < DAD321 >YY-MM-DD [ ] < PRECUT DATA > PRECUT DATA No. [1]0 UNIT : [3]MM [4] 5.00 [5] 50.00 [6] 10.00 [7] 100.00 [8] 150 mm/s mm/s mm/s mm/s LINES ID [2]SAMPLE 6.1.1

USED BLADE FEED SPEED NEW BLADE FEED SPEED PRECUT SET DURING PRECUT SPEED PRECUT END SPEED LINES OF PRECUT

SET FOR WORK THICKNESS GREATER [9] 0.000 mm

In order to store the data, press the ENTER key. Pressing the "EXIT" key returns to the previous screen. F1:SELECT F6: F2: F7: F3: F8: F4: F9:PRECUT(LINE) F5 : F10:

[Setting Item]
Item No.

[1] [2] [3] [4]

[5]

[6]

Descriptions The precut data No. is displayed. This number cannot be changed in this screen. The precut data ID name is displayed. Inch or mm is displayed. Switching between inch and mm can be effected by pressing the <F1> key. Enter the precutting start feed speed to be employed when a new blade set is installed through the BLADE REPLACEMENT screen [screen 5.1]. Enter the precutting start feed speed to be employed when an old blade set is installed through the BLADE REPLACEMENT screen [screen 5.1]. The feed speed defined here is employed also for the precut setup during cutting, precut process during kerf check and precut setup during auto-setup. If a precutting operation is executed again during the precutting process, the precutting speed is reduced from the current speed by the value entered in this column.
D-56

PRECUT DATA (auto control) screen [screen 6.1.1] (Continued) [Setting Item]
Item No.

[7] [8] [9]

Descriptions Enter the precutting end speed. Enter the total number of lines to be precut. Enter the cut depth difference between the current and previous precutting operations.

[Function Key] Press F1 F2 F3 F4 F5 F6 F7 F8 F9 F10 To Effect inch/mm shape changeover. Unused Unused Unused Unused Unused Unused Unused Call up the PRECUT DATA (number of lines control) screen [screen 6.1.1]. Unused

D-57

1-4-2-6. PRECUT DATA (number of lines control) screen [screen 6.1.1]


PRECUT DATA (number of lines control) screen [screen 6.1.1] PRECUT DATA (number of lines control) screen [screen 6.1.1] is called up by pressing the <F9> key from the PRECUT DATA (auto control) screen [screen 6.1.1]. - Pressing the <ENTER> key finalizes the entered precut data setup. - Pressing the <EXIT> key returns the system to a device data related screen [screen 4.*] [Screen]
D I S C O D I C E R S E R I E S < DAD321 >YY-MM-DD [ ] 6.1.1 < PRECUT DATA > UNIT : [1] PRECUT DATA No. [2] ID [3] USED BLD FEED SPD SEQ [4] /PRECUT SET DURING SEQ [5] DECREASE NEW BLD FEED SPD SEQ [6] /SET FOR WORK THICK GREATER [7] mm SEQ SPEED # OF CUT SEQ SPEED # OF CUT 1 [8] mm/s [9] LINES 16 mm/s LINES 2 17 3 18 4 19 5 20 6 21 7 22 8 23 9 24 10 25 11 26 12 27 13 28 14 29 15 30 F1:SELECT F2: F3: F4: F5 : F6: F7: F8:ALL CLR F9:PRECUT(LEN) F10:

[Setting Item]
Item No.

[1] [2] [3] [4]

[5]

Descriptions Inch or mm is displayed. Switching between inch and mm can be effected by pressing the <F1> key. The precut data No. is displayed. This number cannot be changed in this screen. The precut data ID name is displayed. The precutting start feed speed sequence No. after replacement of the old blade through the BLADE REPLACEMENT screen [screen 5.1]. The value defined here is employed also for the precut setup during cutting, precut process during kerf check and precut setup during auto-setup. The initial setting is 1. If precutting is executed again during precutting, the sequence is returned by the value set in step [5].

D-58

PRECUT DATA (number of lines control) screen [screen 6.1.1] (Continued) [Setting Item]
Item No.

[6]

[7]

[8] [9]

Descriptions When the new blade is set through the BLADE REPLACEMENT screen [screen 5.1], cutting is initially started from the precutting mode. The feed speed sequence No. for the initial precutting should be set. The initial setting is 1. Enter the maximum permissible cut depth difference between the previous and current workpieces. If any cut depth difference greater than this entry is encountered, the precutting process is automatically executed. The feed speed for each sequence should be set. The number of cut line for each sequence should be set.

[Function Key] Press F1 F2 F3 F4 F5 F6 F7 F8 F9 F10 To Switch unit between inch and mm. Unused Unused Unused Unused Unused Unused Entirely delete the displayed precut data. Call up the PRECUT DATA (length control) screen. Unused

D-59

1-4-2-7. PRECUT DATA (length control) screen [screen 6.1.1]


PRECUT DATA (length control) screen [screen 6.1.1] PRECUT DATA (length control) screen [screen 6.1.1] is called up by pressing the <F9> key from the PRECUT DATA (number of lines control) screen [screen 6.1.1]. - Pressing the <ENTER> key finalizes the entered precut data setup. - Pressing the <EXIT> key returns the system to a device data related screen [screen 4.*] [Screen]
D I S C O D I C E R S E R I E S < DAD321 >YY-MM-DD [ ] 6.1.1 < PRECUT DATA > UNIT : [1] PRECUT DATA No. [2] ID [3] USED BLD FEED SPD SEQ [4] /PRECUT SET DURING SEQ [5] DECREASE NEW BLD FEED SPD SEQ [6] /SET FOR WORK THICK GREATER [7] mm SEQ SPEED DISTANCE SEQ SPEED DISTANCE 1 [8] mm/s [9] m 16 mm/s m 2 17 3 18 4 19 5 20 6 21 7 22 8 23 9 24 10 25 11 26 12 27 13 28 14 29 15 30 F1:SELECT F2: F3: F4: F5 : F6: F7: F8:ALL CLR F9:PRECUT(LINE) F10:

[Setting Item]
Item No.

[1] [2] [3] [4]

[5] [6]

Descriptions Inch or mm is displayed. Switching between inch and mm can be effected by pressing the <F1> key. The precut data No. is displayed. This number cannot be changed in this screen. The precut data ID name is displayed. The precutting start feed speed sequence No. after replacement of the old blade through the BLADE EXCHANGE screen [screen 5.1]. The value defined here is employed also for precut setup during cutting, precut process during kerf check and precut setup during auto-setup. The initial setting is 1. If precutting is executed again during precutting, the sequence is returned by the value set in step [5]. When the new blade is set through the BLADE REPLACEMENT screen [screen 5.1], cutting is initially started from the precutting mode. The feed speed sequence No. for the initial precutting should be set. The initial setting is 1.

D-60

PRECUT DATA (length control) screen [screen 6.1.1] (Continued) [Setting Item]
Item No.

[7]

[8] [9]

Descriptions Enter the maximum permissible cut depth difference between the previous and current workpieces. If any cut depth difference greater than this entry is encountered, the precutting process is automatically executed. The feed speed for each sequence should be set. The cut distance for each sequence should be set.

[Function Key] Press F1 F2 F3 F4 F5 F6 F7 F8 F9 F10 To Switch unit between inch and mm. Unused Unused Unused Unused Unused Unused Entirely delete the displayed precut data. Call up the PRECUT DATA (auto control) screen. Unused

D-61

1-4-3. Device data related screens --- DAC mode --Summary of this section This section describes the device data related screens that are called up from the DEVICE DATA LIST screen [screen 4.0] in DAC mode. The PRECUT DATA screens and KERF CHECK FUNCTION PARAMETER screens for DAC mode are same as those for DAD mode. For these screens, see the section 1-4-2 of this chapter, [Device data related screen --- DAD mode ---]. Section No. 1-4-3-1 1-4-3-2 1-4-3-3 1-4-3-4 1-4-3-5 1-4-3-6 Title DEVICE DATA 1 screen [screen 4.2] DEVICE DATA 2 screen [screen 4.3] (normal program) DEVICE DATA 3 screen [screen 4.4] (normal program) DEVICE DATA 2 screen [screen 4.3] (special program) DEVICE DATA 3 screen [screen 4.4] (special program) SIMULATION screen

D-62

1-4-3-1. DEVICE DATA 1 screen [screen 4.2]


DEVICE DATA 1 screen [screen 4.2] To call up the DEVICE DATA 1 screen [screen 4.2], press the <ENTER> key from the DEVICE DATA LIST screen [screen 4.0] or the <F4> key from the MAIN MENU screen [screen 0.0]. This screen is used to specify, change or confirm the basic cutting data. The input of "data password" is required for calling up this screen. - Data entry in the columns [23], [24] and [25] can be made only when the optional noncontact setup feature is incorporated. [Screen]
D I S C O D I C E R S E R I E S < DAC351 >YY-MM-DD [ ] < DEVICE DATA1 > DIRECTRY [1] DEVICE DATA No. [2]87654321 UNIT SPINDLE REV. PROGRAM MODE CUT MODE HEIGHT MODE [4] MM [5]30000 rpm [6]NORMAL [7]A [8]HEIGHT X X 4.2

ID [3]DATA-4

WIDTH(X) DEPTH(Y) THICKNESS OFFSET

: : : :

[9]20.000 mm [10]10.000 mm [11]1.500 mm [12]0.000 mm Y Y : [14]0.000 mm : [16]0.000 mm

ALIGNMENT POS. WORK CENTER POS. INDEX DIR.

: [13]0.000 mm : [15]0.000 mm

BLADE WEAR ADJ. : [19]0.000 m : [20]0.000 mm PRECUT PROCESS No. [18] 0 TOTAL CUT LINE : [21] 6Lines << AUTO SETUP DATA >> -ADJUST STROKE : [22] 70 % AUTO SETUP FOR CUTTING : [23]YES CREATION DISTANCE : [24]0.000 mm EVERY : [25]1000 LINES F1:SELECT F2: F3:DATA2 F4:DATA3 F5 : F6:SIMULATION F7:KERF CHECK F8:MEASURE F9:PRECUT F10:

[17]REAR

[Setting Item]
Item No.

[1] [2] [3]

[4] [5] [6]

Descriptions Indicates the name of the directory where the device data to be used is stored. [optional accessory] The device data No. is displayed. This screen cannot be used to set the device No. The device data ID is displayed. To change the device ID, use the operation panel keys to write it over (20 characters maximum). Inch or mm is displayed. Switching between inch and mm can be effected by pressing the <F1> key. Enter the spindle rotating speed. Effects program mode switching. When "SPECIAL" is chosen, the machine operates according to the special program data entered from the DEVICE DATA (2) special program screen. Use the <F1> key to switch between NORMAL and SPECIAL.

D-63

DEVICE DATA 1 screen [screen 4.2] (Continued) [Setting Item]


Item No.

[7]

[8]

[9] [10] [11] [12] [13] [14] [15] [16] [17] [18] [19]

[20]

[21] [22]

Descriptions The A/B/BS/A_UP cutting mode is displayed. Switching between these modes can be effected by using the <F1> key. Selects either the amount left uncut (HEIGHT) setting or cut depth (DEPTH) setting as the blade height data (specified in the DEVICE DATA 2 screen). Enter the workpiece width (X-direction). Enter the workpiece width (Y-direction). Enter the workpiece thickness. Enter the distance between the alignment position and cutting start position. Enter the X position for alignment execution. Enter the Y position for alignment execution. Enter the workpiece setting position displacement of X-direction from the chuck table origin. Enter the workpiece setting position displacement of Y-direction from the chuck table origin. Specify the cutting direction by selecting either REAR or FRONT. Enter the precut data No. for defining the steps and number of cuts for the feed speed required for precutting. Enter the cutting distance interval as the frequency of executing the blade wear compensation (Z-axis auto-down). If zero is entered, blade wear compensation does not take place. Enter the amount of Z-axis auto-down for blade wear compensation. If zero is entered, blade wear compensation does not take place. Enter the number of cuts. When the <F5> key is pressed from the DAC ALIGNMENT screen [screen 1.0], the -alignment is performed. In this column, enter the percentage of the workpiece size (diameter) as the X-axis swing amount in the -alignment.

D-64

DEVICE DATA 1 screen [screen 4.2] (Continued) [Setting Item]


Item No.

[23]

[24]

[25]

Descriptions Make an entry to specify whether or not to perform auto-setup (noncontact setup) during cutting. Use the <F1> key to switch between YES and NO. NO Auto-setup is not performed if the cutting distance or the number of cut wafers is not specified in the columns [24] or [25]. Auto-setup is performed after completing cutting if the cutting distance or the number of cut wafers is specified. YES Auto-setup is performed in compliance with the setup conditions defined by [24] or [25]. The auto-setup frequency should be set by specifying the cutting distance. If zero is entered, auto-setup takes place according to the preselected number of wafers to be cut of [25]. The auto-setup frequency should be set by specifying the number of cut lines. If zero is entered, auto-setup takes place according to the preselected cutting distance of [24]. - When data entries [24] and [25] are both zero, auto-setup does not take place. - When data entries [24] and [25] are both other than zero, auto-setup takes place when the previously set up distance or number of lines is reached the specified value, whichever earlier.

[Function Key] Press F1 F2 F3 F4 F5 F6 F7 F8 F9 F10 To Effect switching between inch/mm, cutting modes, blade height or cutting direction. Unused Call up the DEVICE DATA 2 screen [screen 4.3]. Call up the DEVICE DATA 3 screen [screen 4.4]. Unused Call up the SIMULATION screen. Call up the KERF CHECK FUNCTION PARAMETER screen [screen 4.7]. Call up the Y-AXIS MEASURE screen [screen 6.2]. Call up the PRECUT DATA screen [ screen 6.1.1]. Unused

D-65

1-4-3-2. DEVICE DATA 2 screen [screen 4.3] (normal program)


DEVICE DATA 2 screen [screen 4.3] (normal program) DEVICE DATA 2 screen [screen 4.3] (normal program) is used to define the DAC mode cutting operation conditions. While regarding A or B mode cutting operations as basic operations, this screen registers or edits the multiple indexing, multi-level cutting and other cutting sequences. This screen is displayed only when the "NORMAL" program mode is selected from the DEVICE DATA 1 screen [screen 4.2]. - For DAC mode "normal programs", two different screens are provided. The DEVICE DATA 2 screen [screen 4.3] provides programs No.1 through 15. The DEVICE DATA 3 screen [screen 4.4] provides programs No.16 through 30. [Screen]
D I S C O D I C E R S E R I E S < DAC351 >YY-MM-DD [ ] < DEVICE DATA2 > 4.3

HEIGHT SPEED INDEX REPEAT JUMP --------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------1. [1]0.900 mm [2]10.0 mm/s [3] 1.000 mm [4] 0 [5] 0 2. mm mm/s mm 3. mm mm/s mm 4. mm mm/s mm 5. mm mm/s mm 6. mm mm/s mm 7. mm mm/s mm 8. mm mm/s mm 9. mm mm/s mm 10. mm mm/s mm 11. mm mm/s mm 12. mm mm/s mm 13. mm mm/s mm 14. mm mm/s mm 15. mm mm/s mm F1: F2:DATA1 F3: F6:SIMULATION F7:KERF CHECK F8:MEASURE F4:DATA3 F9:PRECUT F5 : F10:

[Setting Item]
Item No.

Descriptions Enter the amount left cut. Enter the feed speed. Enter the index amount. Enter the number of [1][2][3] as cutting cycle repeating times. Enter the [1] through [4] as the program jump destination.

[1] [2] [3] [4] [5]

D-66

DEVICE DATA 2 screen [screen 4.3] (normal program) (Continued) [Function Key] Press F1 F2 F3 F4 F5 F6 F7 F8 F9 F10 To Unused Call up the DEVICE DATA 1 screen [screen 4.2]. Unused Call up the DEVICE DATA 3 screen [screen 4.4]. Unused Call up the SIMULATION screen. Call up the KERF CHECK FUNCTION PARAMETER screen [screen 4.7]. Call up the Y-AXIS MEASURE screen [screen 6.2]. Call up the PRECUT DATA screen [screen 6.1.1]. Unused

D-67

1-4-3-3. DEVICE DATA 3 screen [screen 4.4] (normal program)


DEVICE DATA 3 screen [screen 4.4] (normal program) To call up the DEVICE DATA 3 screen [screen 4.4], press the <F4> key from the DEVICE DATA 2 screen [screen 4.3]. [Screen]
D I S C O D I C E R S E R I E S < DAC351 >YY-MM-DD [ ] < DEVICE DATA3 > 4.4

HEIGHT SPEED INDEX REPEAT JUMP -------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------16. [1]0.900 mm [2]10.0 mm/s [3] 1.000 mm [4] 0 [5] 0 17. mm mm/s mm 18. mm mm/s mm 19. mm mm/s mm 20. mm mm/s mm 21. mm mm/s mm 22. mm mm/s mm 23. mm mm/s mm 24. mm mm/s mm 25. mm mm/s mm 26. mm mm/s mm 27. mm mm/s mm 28. mm mm/s mm 29. mm mm/s mm 30. mm mm/s mm F1: F2:DATA1 F3:DATA2 F6:SIMULATION F7:KERF CHECK F8:MEASURE F4: F9:PRECUT F5 : F10:

[Setting Item]
Item No.

[1] [2] [3] [4] [5]

Descriptions Enter the amount left uncut setting. Enter the feed speed. Enter the index amount. Enter the number of [1][2][3] as cutting cycle repeating times. Enter the [1] through [4] as the program jump destination.

D-68

DEVICE DATA 3 screen [screen 4.4] (normal program) (Continued) [Function Key] Press F1 F2 F3 F4 F5 F6 F7 F8 F9 F10 To Unused Call up the DEVICE DATA 1 screen [screen 4.2]. Call up the DEVICE DATA 2 screen [screen 4.3]. Unused Unused Call up the SIMULATION screen. Call up the KERF CHECK FUNCTION PARAMETER screen [screen 4.7]. Call up the Y-AXIS MEASURE screen [screen 6.2]. Call up the PRECUT DATA screen [screen 6.1.1]. Unused

D-69

1-4-3-4. DEVICE DATA 2 screen [screen 4.3] (special program)


DEVICE DATA 2 screen [screen 4.3] (special program) DEVICE DATA 2 screen [screen 4.3] is used to register or edit DAC mode special cutting sequences. This screen is displayed only when the "SPECIAL" program mode is selected from the DEVICE DATA 1 screen [screen 4.2]. - The DAC mode offers two "SPECIAL" screens. The DEVICE DATA 2 screen [screen 4.3] displays programs No.1 through 15. The DEVICE DATA 3 screen [screen 4.4] displays programs No.16 through 30. [Screen]
D I S C O D I C E R S E R I E S < DAC351 >YY-MM-DD [ ] < DEVICE DATA2 > MODE PARA_1 PARA_2 PARA_3 4.3

HEIGHT MODE SPEED INDEX MODE mm mm/s mm -----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------1 [1] A [2] 0 [3] 0 [4] 0 [5]0.400 [6] H [7]10.0 [8]2.000 [9] R 2 Idx T 0 0 0 0.000 H 0.0 90.000 R 3 Idx Y 0 0 0 0.000 H 0.0 100.000 R 4 A 0 0 0 0.400 H 100.0 1.000 R 5 End 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 F1:SELECT F2:DATA1 F3: F4:DATA3 F5 :HELP F6:SIMULATION F7:KERF CHECK F8:MEASURE F9:PRECUT F10:

D-70

DEVICE DATA 2 screen [screen 4.3] (special program) (Continued) [Setting Item]
Item No.

[1]

Descriptions Enter a command for program operation. Select a desired command with the <F1> key. A Performs cutting in the A mode (DOWN cutting). A_up Performs cutting in the A_UP mode (the chuck table moves from left to right). B Performs cutting in the B mode (repetition of DOWN/UP operation). Achop Performs cutting in the A chopper traverse mode. BS Disables the Z-axis escape feature during a B mode operation. Workw Permits workpiece width setting changes. Idx_Y Performs indexing in the Y-axis direction only. Idx_X Performs indexing in the X-axis direction only. Idx_T Performs indexing in the -axis direction only. Ali_p Invokes a movement to the alignment position (this command provides for future expansion of alignment feature). Loop Repeatedly runs the program. Call Recall a DAC SPECIAL mode program which has been setup with other device data. End Terminates the program. Gosub Jumps to the specified number. Ret Returns to the original sequence after completing the Gosub procedure.

D-71

DEVICE DATA 2 screen [screen 4.3] (special program) (Continued) [Setting Item]
Item No.

[2]

Mode Defined in [1]

Descriptions Parameter 1 Enter the number of cuts. Enter the number of cuts. Enter the number of cuts. Enter the number of cuts. Enter the Z-axis descent speed. Enter the cutting speed in nm; 1 mm/s = 1000000 nm/s. No entry is to be made. No entry is to be made. No entry is to be made. Enter the number of times the loop is to be repeated. Enter the number of the device data to be recalled. Jumps to the specified number.

A A_up B BS Achop Idx_Y Idx_T Ali_p Loop Call Gosub

Item No.

[3]

Mode Defined in [1]

Descriptions Parameter 2 No entry is to be made. No entry is to be made. No entry is to be made. Enter the X-axis cut stroke length for traverse cutting. Specify the length in nm; 1 mm = 1000000 nm/s. No entry is to be made. No entry is to be made. No entry is to be made. Enter a jump destination number within the program for loop execution. Enter the start number within the SPECIAL program defined in [1]. Jumps to the specified number.

A_up B BS Achop

Idx_Y Idx_T Ali_p Loop Call Gosub

D-72

DEVICE DATA 2 screen [screen 4.3] (special program) (Continued) [Setting Item]
Item No.

[4]

Mode Defined in [1]

Descriptions Parameter 3 Enter the alignment axis (X, Y or T). Enter the angle (entering zero will provide normal cutting). Enter the angle (entering zero will provide normal cutting). Enter the angle (entering zero will provide normal cutting). Enter the angle (entering zero will provide normal cutting). Enter the angle (entering zero will provide normal cutting).

Ali_p A A_up B BS Achop

- No entry is to be made for Idx_Y, Idx_X, Idx_T, Loop, Call or Gosub.

Item No.

[5]

[6]

[7]

Descriptions Enter the blade position for the A, A_up, B, BS or Achop mode operation. The meaning of the numerical data entry made here is to be defined by mode selection [6]. - No entry is to be made for Idx_Y, Idx_X, Idx_T, Ali_p, Loop, Call or Gosub. Define the meaning of the blade position numerical value entry for the A, A_up, B, BS or Achop mode operation. - No entry is to be made for Idx_Y, Idx_X, Idx_T, Ali_p, Loop, Call or Gosub. H Uses setting [5] as the height from the chuck table. D Uses setting [5] as the cut depth (relative to the workpiece thickness) entered from the DEVICE DATA 1 screen [screen 4.2]. R Determines the blade position with reference to the blade height employed for the preceding line which is considered to be zero. A minus value will provide a shallower blade position than the reference position. Enter the cutting speed for the A, A_up, B, BS or Achop.

D-73

DEVICE DATA 2 screen [screen 4.3] (special program) (Continued) [Setting Item]
Item No.

[8]

Mode Defined in [1]

Descriptions Index Enter the Y-direction index amount. Enter the Y-direction index amount. Enter the Y-direction index amount. Enter the Y-direction index amount. Enter the X-direction index amount. Enter the Y-direction index amount. Enter the X-direction index amount. Enter the -direction index amount.

A A_up B BS Achop Idx_Y Idx_X Idx_T

- No entry is to be made for Ali_p, Loop, Call or Gosub.

Item No.

[9]

Descriptions Select either the relative (R) or absolute (A) positioning mode for the index operation selected in [8] for A, B, BS, Idx_Y, Idx_X or Idx_T.

[Function Key] Press F1 F2 F3 F4 F5 F6 F7 F8 F9 F10 To Make a parameter change. Call up the DEVICE DATA 1 screen [screen 4.2]. Unused Call up the DEVICE DATA 3 screen [screen 4.4]. Call up the SPECIAL program explanation screen (HELP1 HELP2 SAMPL). Call up the SIMULATION screen. Call up the KERF CHECK FUNCTION PARAMETER screen [screen 4.7]. Call up the Y-AXIS MEASURE screen [screen 6.2]. Call up the PRECUT DATA screen [screen 6.1.1]. Unused

D-74

1-4-3-5. DEVICE DATA 3 screen [screen 4.4] (special program)


DEVICE DATA 3 screen [screen 4.4] (special program) To call up the DEVICE DATA 3 screen [screen 4.4] (special program), press the <F4> key from the DEVICE DATA 4 screen [screen 4.3] (special program). [Screen]
D I S C O D I C E R S E R I E S < DAC351 >YY-MM-DD [ ] < DEVICE DATA3 > 4.4

MODE PARA_1 PARA_2 PARA_3 HEIGHT MODE SPEED INDEX MODE mm mm/s mm ----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------16 [1]A [2] 0 [3] 0 [4] 0 [5]0.400 [6] H [7]10.0 [8]2.000 [9] R 17 Idx T 0 0 0 0.000 H 0.0 90.0 R 18 Idx Y 0 0 0 0.000 H 0.0 100.0 R 19 A 0 0 0 0.400 H 100.0 1.000 R 20 End 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 F1:SELECT F2:DATA1 F3:DATA2 F4: F5 :HELP F6:SIMLATION F7:KERF CHECK F8:MEASURE F9:PRECUT F10:

D-75

DEVICE DATA 3 screen [screen 4.4] (special program) (Continued) [Setting Item]
Item No.

[1]

Descriptions Enter a command for program operation. Select a desired command with the <F1> key. A Performs cutting in the A mode (DOWN cutting). A_up Performs cutting in the A_UP mode (the chuck table moves from left to right). B Performs cutting in the B mode (repetition of DOWN/UP operation). Achop Performs cutting in the A chopper traverse mode. BS Disables the Z-axis escape feature during a B mode operation. Workw Permits workpiece width setting changes. Idx_Y Performs indexing in the Y-axis direction only. Idx_X Performs indexing in the X-axis direction only. Idx_T Performs indexing in the -axis direction only. Ali_p Invokes a movement to the alignment position (this command provides for future expansion of alignment feature). Loop Repeatedly runs the program. Call Recall a DAC SPECIAL mode program which has been setup with other device data. End Terminates the program. Gosub Jumps to the specified number. Ret Returns to the original sequence after completing the Gosub procedure.

D-76

DEVICE DATA 3 screen [screen 4.4] (special program) (Continued) [Setting Item]
Item No.

[2]

Mode Defined in [1]

Descriptions Parameter 1 Enter the number of cuts. Enter the number of cuts. Enter the number of cuts. Enter the number of cuts. Enter the Z-axis descent speed. Enter the cutting speed in nm; 1 mm/s = 1000000 nm/s. No entry is to be made. No entry is to be made. No entry is to be made. Enter the number of times the loop is to be repeated. Enter the number of the device data to be recalled. Jumps to the specified number.

A A_up B BS Achop Idx_Y Idx_T Ali_p Loop Call Gosub

Item No.

[3]

Mode Defined in [1]

Descriptions Parameter 2 No entry is to be made. No entry is to be made. No entry is to be made. Enter the X-axis cut stroke length for traverse cutting. Specify the length in nm; 1 mm = 1000000 nm. No entry is to be made. No entry is to be made. No entry is to be made. Enter a jump destination number within the program for loop execution. Enter the start number within the SPECIAL program defined in [1]. Jumps to the specified number.

A_up B BS Achop

Idx_Y Idx_T Ali_p Loop Call Gosub

D-77

DEVICE DATA 3 screen [screen 4.4] (special program) (Continued) [Setting Item]
Item No.

[4]

Mode Defined in [1]

Descriptions Parameter 3 Enter the alignment axis (X, Y or T). Enter the angle (entering zero will provide normal cutting). Enter the angle (entering zero will provide normal cutting). Enter the angle (entering zero will provide normal cutting). Enter the angle (entering zero will provide normal cutting). Enter the angle (entering zero will provide normal cutting).

Ali_p A A_up B BS Achop

- No entry is to be made for Idx_Y, Idx_X, Idx_T, Loop, Call or Gosub.


Item No.

[5]

[6]

[7]

Descriptions Enter the blade position for the A, A_up, B, BS or Achop mode operation. The meaning of the numerical data entry made here is to be defined by mode selection [6]. - No entry is to be made for Idx_Y, Idx_X, Idx_T, Ali_p, Loop, Call or Gosub. Define the meaning of the blade position numerical value entry for the A, A_up, B, BS or Achop mode operation. - No entry is to be made for Idx_Y, Idx_X, Idx_T, Ali_p, Loop, Call or Gosub. H Uses setting [5] as the height from the chuck table. D Uses setting [5] as the cut depth (relative to the workpiece thickness) entered from the DEVICE DATA 1 screen [screen 4.2]. R Determines the blade position with reference to the blade height employed for the preceding line which is considered to be zero. A minus value will provide a shallower blade position than the reference position. Enter the cutting speed for the A, A_up, B, BS or Achop.

D-78

DEVICE DATA 3 screen [screen 4.4] (special program) (Continued) [Setting Item]
Item No.

[8]

Mode Defined in [1]

Descriptions Index Enter the Y-direction index amount. Enter the Y-direction index amount. Enter the Y-direction index amount. Enter the Y-direction index amount. Enter the X-direction index amount. Enter the Y-direction index amount. Enter the X-direction index amount. Enter the -direction index amount.

A A_up B BS Achop Idx_Y Idx_X Idx_T

- No entry is to be made for Ali_p, Loop, Call or Gosub.

Item No.

[9]

Descriptions Select either the relative (R) or absolute (A) positioning mode for the index operation selected in [8] for A, B, BS, Idx_Y, Idx_X or Idx_T.

[Function Key] Press F1 F2 F3 F4 F5 F6 F7 F8 F9 F10 To Make a parameter change. Call up the DEVICE DATA 1 screen [screen 4.2]. Call up the DEVICE DATA 2 screen [screen 4.3]. Unused Call up the SPECIAL program explanation screen (HELP1 HELP2 SAMPL). Call up the SIMULATION screen. Call up the KERF CHECK FUNCTION PARAMETER screen [screen 4.7]. Call up the Y-AXIS MEASURE screen [screen 6.2]. Call up the PRECUT DATA screen [screen 6.1.1]. Unused

D-79

1-4-3-6. SIMULATION screen


SIMULATION screen SIMULATION screen graphically displays the cutting results that would produced by the setup of DEVICE DATA 1 screen [screen 4.2], DEVICE DATA 2 screen [screen 4.3] and DEVICE DATA 3 screen [screen 4.4]. - A latticed graph appears to provide upper and lateral surface simulation according to the cutting data programmed by device data. [Screen]
1 QUBE= 5 mm

EXIT to quit.

OVERVIEW

SIDEVIEW

D-80

1-5. Blade Maintenance Related Screens


Summary of this section This section describes screens related to BLADE MAINTENANCE screen [screen 5.0] that are to be used for blade maintenance. Section No. Title 1-5-1 BLADE MAINTENANCE screen [screen 5.0] 1-5-2 Blade replacement related screens - BLADE REPLACEMENT screen [screen 5.1] - BLADE SELECTER screen [screen 5.1.5] 1-5-3 ADJUSTMENT OF B.B.D. (Blade Breakage Detector) screen [screen 5.2] [optional accessory] 1-5-4 Hairline alignment related screens - HAIRLINE ALIGNMENT screen [screen 5.5] - HAIRLINE ALIGNMENT IN PROGRESS screen [screen 5.5.1] 1-5-5 BLADE LIFE/WEAR INFORMATION screen [screen 5.6]

D-81

1-5-1. BLADE MAINTENANCE screen [screen 5.0]


BLADE MAINTENANCE screen [screen 5.0] To call up the BLADE MAINTENANCE screen [screen 5.0], press the <F5> key from the MAIN MENU screen [screen 0.0]. [Screen]
D I S C O D I C E R S E R I E S < DAD321 >YY-MM-DD [ ] < BLADE MAINTENANCE > F1. F2 F3. F4. F5. F6. F7 F8 BLADE REPLACEMENT BLADE BREAKAGE DETECTOR ADJUSTMENT SETUP FUNCTIONS DRESS [ DRESS No. [1] (1-4)] 5.0

HAIRLINE ALIGNMENT CORRECTION BLADE LIFE/WEAR INFORMATION SETUP DATA NONCONTACT SENSOR CLEANING

[Setting Item]
Item No.

[1]

Descriptions Shows the dress data No. to be used for dressing.

[Function Key] Press F1 F2 To Call up the BLADE REPLACEMENT screen [screen 5.1]. Call up the ADJUSTMENT OF B.B.D. (Blade Breakage Detector) screen [screen 5.2] [optional accessory]. Call up the SETUP screen [screen 5.3]. Call up the BLADE DRESS DATA screen [screen 5.4]. Call up the HAIRLINE ALIGNMENT screen [screen 5.5]. Call up the BLADE LIFE/WEAR INFORMATION screen [screen 5.6]. Call up the SETUP DATA 1 screen [screen 5.7]. (The input "DATA PASSWORD" is required for calling up this screen.) Call up the NONCONTACT SETUP SENSOR CLEANING screen [screen 5.8] [optional accessory].

F3 F4 F5 F6 F7

F8

D-82

1-5-2. Blade replacement related screens


Summary of this section This section describes BLADE REPLACEMENT screen [screen 5.1] and BLADE SELECTER screen [screen 5.1.5]. Section No. Title 1-5-2-1 BLADE REPLACEMENT screen [screen 5.1] 1-5-2-2 BLADE SELECTER screen [screen 5.1.5]

D-83

1-5-2-1. BLADE REPLACEMENT screen [screen 5.1]


BLADE REPLACEMENT screen [screen 5.1] BLADE REPLACEMENT screen [screen 5.1] is used to register data of the installed blade when replacing the blade. This screen appears when you press the <F1> key from the BLADE MAINTENANCE screen [screen 5.0]. [Screen]
D I S C O D I C E R S E R I E S < DAD321 >YY-MM-DD [ ] < BLADE REPLACEMENT > UNIT : [1] BLADE SPEC. : BLADE O.D. BLADE THICKNESS BLADE LIFE [2] : : : NEW/USED: [4] mm [5] mm [6] LINES [7] m [3] 5.1

BLADE DATA [BLADE TYPE: [8] ] 1. WHEEL MOUNT TYPE 2. HUBLESS TYPE EXPOSURE [9] mm FLANGE O.D.

[10] mm

F1:SELECT F6:

F2: F7:

F3: F8:

F4: F9:

F5 :BLADE SELECT F10:B.B.D. ADJ

[Setting Item]
Item No.

[1] [2] [3]

[4] [5] [6] [7] [8]

Descriptions The selected unit, inch or mm is displayed. Switching between inch and mm can be effected by using the <F1> key. The specification name of the blade to be installed is displayed. The installed blade type, NEW or OLD should be displayed or set. Switching between NEW and OLD can be effected by using the <F1> key. The outer diameter of the blade to be used should be displayed or set. The thickness of the blade to be used should be displayed or set. The maximum number of lines should be set as the allowable service limit (blade replacement line number). The maximum distance should be set as the allowable service limit (blade replacement distance). The selected blade type HUB or FLANGE should be displayed or set. Switching between HUB or FLANGE can be effected by using the <F1> key.

D-84

BLADE REPLACEMENT screen [screen 5.1] (Continued) [Setting Item]


Item No.

[9] [10]

Descriptions The hub type blade tip protrusion amount should be displayed or set. The flange outer diameter of the flange type should be displayed or set.

[Function Key] Press F1 F2 F3 F4 F5 To Effect switching between inch/mm, NEW/OLD for the blade replaced or HUB/FLANGE for the blade type. Unused Unused Unused Call up the BLADE SELECTER screen [screen 5.1.5]. In this screen, you can refer the specifications of the registered standard hub type blades or make registration of the user blades up to 50 blades. Unused Unused Unused Unused Call up the ADJUSTMENT OF B.B.D. (Blade Breakage Detector) screen [screen 5.2] [optional accessory].

F6 F7 F8 F9 F10

D-85

1-5-2-2. BLADE SELECTER screen [screen 5.1.5]


BLADE SELECTER screen [screen 5.1.5] BLADE SELECTER screen [screen 5.1.5] facilitates the setting of the blade spec and other data through the BLADE REPLACEMENT screen [screen 5.1] at the time of blade replacement. This screen appears when you press the <F5> key from the BLADE REPLACEMENT screen [screen 5.1]. [Screen]
D I S C O D I C E R S E R I E S < DAD321 >YY-MM-DD [ ] < BLADE SELECTER > +------Blade_Spec----Type---Blade----Flange-------Blade-------Blade-+ | Outward-Diameter Exposure Thick | |-------+-------------------+-------+( mm )-+-( mm )----+-( mm )-+-( mm ) | | Now [1] [2] [3] [4] [5] [6] | | No.-+-------------------+-------+----------+--------------+-----------+----------| | 001 [7] [8] [9] [10] [11] [12] | | 002 | | 003 | | 004 | | 005 | | 006 | | 007 | | 008 | | 009 | | 010 | +-----------------------------------------------------------------------Page 01/15-+ F1:NEXT PAGE F2:PAGE BEFORE F6:USER ENTRY F7: F3: F8: F4: F9: F5 :USER BLADE F10:DISCO BLADE 5.1.5

[Setting Item]
Item No.

[1] [2] [3] [4] [5] [6] [7] [8] [9] [10]

Descriptions The specification name of the currently installed blade is displayed. The type (HUB/FLANGE) of the currently installed blade is displayed. The outer diameter of the currently installed blade is displayed. The outer diameter of the currently installed flange is displayed in cases where the flange type blade is installed. The blade tip protrusion amount of the currently installed blade is displayed. The thickness of the currently installed blade is displayed. The specification name of a registered blade is displayed. The type (HUB/FLANGE) of a registered blade is displayed. The outer diameter of a registered blade is displayed. The outer diameter of a registered flange is displayed in cases where the flange type blade is selected.

D-86

BLADE SELECTER screen [screen 5.1.5] (Continued) [Setting Item]


Item No.

[11] [12]

Descriptions The blade tip protrusion amount of a registered blade is displayed. The thickness of a registered blade is displayed. - Entries No.001 through 049 are for user blade registration. - Entries No.050 through 150 are for standard hub type blade registration.

[Function Key] Press F1 F2 F3 F4 F5 F6 F7 F8 F9 F10 To Display the next page of the blade selector list. Display the previous page of the blade selector list. Unused Unused Display the first page of the user blade registration which shows entry No.001. Register a user blade specification after it has been entered from the BLADE REPLACEMENT screen [screen 5.1]. Unused Unused Unused Display the first page of the standard hub type blade registration which shows entry No.050.

D-87

1-5-3. ADJUSTMENT OF B.B.D. (Blade Breakage Detector) screen [screen 5.2] [optional accessory]
ADJUSTMENT OF B.B.D. (Blade Breakage Detector) screen [screen 5.2] [optional accessory] ADJUSTMENT OF B.B.D. (Blade Breakage Detector) screen [screen 5.2] is used for adjusting the blade breakage detector. This screen appears when you press the <F2> key from the BLADE MAINTENANCE screen [screen 5.0]. [Screen]
DAD321 YY-MM-DD [ ] 5.2 ADJUSTMENT OF B.B.D.(Blade Breakage Detector)

SENSITIVITY LEVEL 0 10 20 30 40 50 60 70 80 90 100 120 (%) --------------------------------------------------------[1] ---------------------------------------------------------

SENSITIVITY :[2]

<< ADJUSTMENT >> Verify that max sensitivity comes between 90% and 99%, then adjust sensor so that sensitivity will be 105% (5 to 15%). When max sensitivity does not exceed 90%, clean sensor.

[Setting Item]
Item No.

[1] [2]

Descriptions Shows the blade breakage detector sensor sensitivity level with a bar graph. The numerical value (%) corresponding to the sensitivity level shown at [1] is displayed.

D-88

1-5-4. Hairline alignment related screens


Summary of this section This section describes HAIRLINE ALIGNMENT screen [screen 5.5] and HAIRLINE ALIGNMENT IN PROGRESS screen [screen 5.5.1] that are used to align the cutting line with the hairline on the microscope image. Section No. Title 1-5-4-1 HAIRLINE ALIGNMENT screen [screen 5.5] 1-5-4-2 HAIRLINE ALIGNMENT IN PROGRESS screen [screen 5.5.1]

D-89

1-5-4-1. HAIRLINE ALIGNMENT screen [screen 5.5]


HAIRLINE ALIGNMENT screen [screen 5.5] HAIRLINE ALIGNMENT screen [screen 5.5] is used for aligning the cutting line with the hairline given as a microscope image. This screen appears when you press the <F5> key from the BLADE MAINTENANCE screen [screen 5.0]. - Pressing the <ENTER> key finalizes the entered data. - When you press the <START> key, the machine cuts one line and then displays the HAIRLINE ALIGNMENT IN PROGRESS screen [screen 5.5.1]. [Screen]
D I S C O D I C E R S E R I E S < DAD321 >YY-MM-DD [ ] < HAIRLINE ALIGNMENT > UNIT: 5.5 [1]

Press the ENTER key to confirm the cutting data Press the START/STOP key to begin. F1:SELECT F6: F2: F7: F3: F8:

CUT SHAPE [2] RND WORK SIZE [3] mm SQR WORK SIZE CH1 [4] mm CH2 [5] mm WORK HIGHT [6] mm TAPE HIGHT [7] mm BLADE HEIGHT [8] mm CUT SPEED [9] mm/s SPINDLE REV. [10] rpm F4: F5 :ALIGN F9: F10:LIGHT ADJ

[Setting Item]
Item No.

[1] [2]

[3] [4] [5] [6]

Descriptions The selected unit, inch or mm is displayed. Switching between inch and mm can be effected by using the <F1> key. ROUND or SQUARE is displayed. Switching between ROUND and SQUARE can be effected by pressing the <F1> key. When ROUND is displayed at [2], the size of the dummy work should be set. When SQUARE is displayed at [2], the size of the channel 1 dummy work should be set. When SQUARE is displayed at [2], the size of the channel 2 dummy work should be set. Enter the thickness of the dummy work.

D-90

HAIRLINE ALIGNMENT screen [screen 5.5] (Continued) [Setting Item]


Item No.

[7] [8] [9] [10]

Descriptions Enter the thickness of the tape. Enter the amount left uncut setting for the dummy work. Enter the cutting speed. Enter the spindle rotating speed.

[Function Key] Press F1 F2 F3 F4 F5 F6 F7 F8 F9 F10 To Switch unit between inch and mm or cutting shape. Unused Unused Unused Achieve automatic X-axis scanning and angle adjustment. Unused Unused Unused Unused Call up the LIGHT ADJUSTMENT screen. --- 341/381 only ---

D-91

1-5-4-2. HAIRLINE ALIGNMENT IN PROGRESS screen [screen 5.5.1]


HAIRLINE ALIGNMENT IN PROGRESS screen [screen 5.5.1] HAIRLINE ALIGNMENT IN PROGRESS screen [screen 5.5.1] is used to execute the hairline alignment process. This screen appears after one-line cutting is completed by pressing the <START> key from the HAIRLINE ADJUSTMENT screen [screen 5.5]. [Screen]
D I S C O D I C E R S E R I E S < DAD321 >YY-MM-DD [ ] 5.5.1 < HAIRLINE ALIGNMENT IN PROGRESS > Align the hairline and press the ENTER key.

F1: F6:

F2: F7:

F3: F8:

F4: F9:

F5 :ALIGN F10:LIGHT ADJ

[Setting Item]
Item No.

[1] [2]

Descriptions Align the hairline with the cutting line. Press the <ENTER> key. - The system then executes the hairline alignment process.

[Function Key] Press F1 F2 F3 F4 F5 F6 F7 F8 To Unused Unused Unused Unused Achieve the automatic X-axis scanning and angle adjustment. Unused Unused Unused

D-92

HAIRLINE ALIGNMENT IN PROGRESS screen [screen 5.5.1] (Continued) [Function Key] Press F9 F10 To Unused Call up the LIGHT ADJUSTMENT screen. --- 341/381 only ---

D-93

1-5-5. BLADE LIFE/WEAR INFORMATION screen [screen 5.6]


BLADE LIFE/WEAR INFORMATION screen [screen 5.6] BLADE LIFE/WEAR INFORMATION screen [screen 5.6] displays blade life/wear information controlled by the machine. This screen appears when you press the <F6> key from the BLADE MAINTENANCE screen [screen 5.0]. [Screen]
D I S C O D I C E R S E R I E S < DAD321 >YY-MM-DD [ ] < BLADE LIFE/WEAR INFORMATION > UNIT: [1] - CUMULATIVE CUT SINCE BLADE EXCHANGE LAST SETUP LAST RESET - WEAR AMOUNT SINCE BLADE EXCHANGE FROM LAST SETUP AUTO DOWN AMOUNT CURRENT BLADE EXPOSURE DISTANCE [2] [4] [6] # OF CUT [3] [5] [7] 5.6

m m m

LINE LINE LINE

[8] [9] [10] [11]

mm mm mm mm

- SETUP ABS. POSITION SETUP POSITION [12] mm ( [13] mm) BETWEEN C/T AND SENSOR [14] mm BLADE RUN OUT VOLUME [15] mm ------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------F1:SELECT F2: F3:COUNTER CLR F4: F5 : F6: F7: F8: F9:PRECUT OFF F10:

[Setting Item]
Item No.

[1] [2] [3] [4] [5] [6] [7]

Descriptions The selected unit, inch or mm is displayed. Switching between inch and mm can be effected by using the <F1> key. Displays the cumulative cut distance that have been counted since the last blade replacement. Displays the cumulative number of cut lines that have been counted since the last blade replacement. Displays the cumulative cut distance that have been counted since the last setup. Displays the cumulative number of cut lines that have been counted since the last setup. Displays the cumulative cut distance that have been counted since the counter was cleared last by pressing the <F3>. Displays the cumulative number of cut lines that have been counted since the counter was cleared last by pressing the <F3> key.

D-94

BLADE LIFE/WEAR INFORMATION screen [screen 5.6] (Continued) [Setting Item]


Item No.

[8] [9] [10]

[11]

[12] [13]

[14] [15]

Descriptions Displays the amount of blade wear that has been accumulated since the last blade replacement. Displays the amount of blade wear that has been accumulated since the last setup. Displays the amount of Z-axis down when the blade wear compensation (Z-axis auto-down) function defined by the device data is executed. The amount of cumulative blade wear is compared with the blade tip protrusion amount preset upon the last blade replacement and the current blade tip protrusion amount is displayed. Displays the setup position relative to the Z-axis zero-point position (origin). Displays the noncontact setup position shifted from the Z-axis origin. In the case of chuck table setup, the same position as [12] is displayed. Displays the chuck table-to-sensor distance which is defined by sensor calibration setup. Indicates the blade decentering amount. This amount is detected by the noncontact setup sensor.
B

Blade

| A-B | = Blade decentering amount

[Function Key] Press F1 F2 F3 F4 F5 F6 F7 F8 F9 F10 To Switch unit between inch and mm. Unused Clear the accumulative distance and line counter. Unused Unused Unused Unused Unused Stop the currently performed precutting process. Unused

D-95

1-6. Dressing Related Screens


Summary of this section This section explains the dressing operation and dressing related screens to be used for dressing operation. Section No. Title 1-6-1 About dressing 1-6-2 1-6-3 Contents - Truing - Abrasive grain dressing BLADE DRESS DATA screen [screen 5.4] DRESS IN PROGRESS screen [screen 5.4.1]

D-96

1-6-1. About dressing


About dressing Dressing is a preliminary step for cutting and performed to provide three basic blade elements (abrasive grains, bond and pores). Blade dressing falls roughly into two operations: truing and abrasive grain dressing. - The dressing conditions vary with the employed blade type. If an appropriate dresser board or dressing conditions are not available, consult DISCO's sales representative. Truing and abrasive grain dressing The descriptions of truing and abrasive grain dressing are as follows: Truing Abrasive Grain Dressing Provides the mounted blade with true Removes metal from the blade edge circumference roundness in to expose diamond abrasive grains. compliance with the dimensional tolerance on the blade inside diameter and flange.
When mounted
Direction of rotation

Blade inside diameter

Roundness

Grinding chip Chip pocket

About hub type blade The hub type blade needs no truing because its inside diameter tolerance is small. It does not have to be dressed either because the blade tip will not be damaged by truing.

D-97

1-6-2. BLADE DRESS DATA screen [screen 5.4]


BLADE DRESS DATA screen [screen 5.4] BLADE DRESS DATA screen [screen 5.4] is used to register or edit the dressing condition data. This screen appears when you press the <F4> key from the BLADE MAINTENANCE screen [screen 5.0]. - When you press the <ENTER> key, the system registers the entered data. - Pressing the <EXIT> key subsequently to <ENTER> key returns the system to the MAIN MENU screen [screen 0.0]. - When you press the <EXIT> key without pressing the <ENTER> key, the system cancels any edits on the data setup and returns to the MAIN MENU screen [screen 0.0]. [Screen]
D I S C O D I C E R S E R I E S < DAD321 >YY-MM-DD [ ] < BLADE DRESS DATA > DATA No. UNIT [1] [3] [9] [10] [11] [12] #OF CUT(0=ALL) CUT MODE X-STROKE rpm Y-STROKE mm OFFSET mm Y INDEX mm [2] [4] [5] [6] [7] [8] mm mm mm mm 5.4

SPINDLE REV. WORK THICKNESS TAPE THICKNESS BLADE HEIGHT

SEQ CUT SPEED # OF CUT SEQ CUT SPEED # OF CUT [13] 1 [14] mm/s [15] LINES 6 mm/s LINES 2 mm/s LINES 7 mm/s LINES 3 mm/s LINES 8 mm/s LINES 4 mm/s LINES 9 mm/s LINES 5 mm/s LINES 10 mm/s LINES --------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------After changing data, press the ENTER key to confirm. Select the Cut direction using the F5 and F10 keys. F1:SELECT F2: F3:ALL CLR F4:1ch ALIGN. F5 :REAR F6: F7: F8: F9: F10:FRONT

[Setting Item]
Item No.

[1] [2] [3] [4] [5]

Descriptions Indicates the dress data No. Enter the total number of cuts for dressing. If zero is entered, the system exercises stroke control. Shows the selected unit of measure (inches or millimeters). Effect inch/mm changeover with the <F1> key. Displays the selected cut mode (A, B or A UP). Use the <F1> key to select a desired cut mode from A, B or A UP. Enter the dresser board size in X-direction (stroke length).

D-98

BLADE DRESS DATA screen [screen 5.4] (Continued) [Setting Item]


Item No.

[6] [7] [8] [9] [10] [11] [12] [13] [14] [15]

Descriptions Enter the dresser board size in Y-direction (stroke length). Enter the distance between the cutting start position and alignment position. Enter the Y-axis indexing amount. Enter the spindle rotating speed for dressing. Enter the dresser board thickness data. Enter the mount tape thickness data. Enter the amount left uncut setting for the dresser board. Shows the SEQ (sequence) number. Up to 10 steps can be displayed. This displayed data cannot be edited. Enter the feed speed for each sequence. Enter the number of cuts to be made for each sequence.

[Function Key] Press F1 F2 F3 F4 F5 F6 F7 F8 F9 F10 To Effect inch/mm changeover or cut mode changeover (A, B or A UP). Unused Entirely erase the displayed dress data set. Call up the SINGLE CHANNEL ALIGNMENT screen. Select the rearward cutting mode for the cutting operation to be initiated from the alignment position. Unused Unused Unused Unused Select the forward cutting mode for the cutting operation to be initiated from the alignment.

D-99

1-6-3. DRESS IN PROGRESS screen [screen 5.4.1]


DRESS IN PROGRESS screen [screen 5.4.1] DRESS IN PROGRESS screen [screen 5.4.1] is displayed while a dressing operation is being conducted under the dressing conditions entered from the BLADE DRESS DATA screen [screen 5.4]. [Screen]
D I S C O D I C E R S E R I E S < DAD321 >YY-MM-DD [ ] < DRESS IN PROGRESS > DATA No. [1] SENSITIVITY(B.B.D) BLADE HEIGHT SPINDLE REV. 5.4.1

: [2] % : [3] mm : [4] rpm

F1: F6:

F2: F7:

F3: F8:

CUT POSITION : [5] / [6] CURRENT FEED SPEED : [7] mm/s NOW FEED SPEED : [8] mm/s F4: F5 :ADJ H_LINE F9: F10:LIGHT ADJ

[Setting Item]
Item No.

[1] [2] [3] [4] [5] [6] [7] [8]

Descriptions Displays the dress data No. Indicates the amount of blade breakage detector sensitivity during cutting [optional accessory]. Indicates the blade height prevailing during cutting. Indicates the spindle rotating speed setting which is entered from the BLADE DRESS DATA screen [screen 5.4]. Displays the number of dressing lines in progress. Indicates the total number of lines to be used for dressing. Displays the feed speed for dressing defined from the BLADE DRESS DATA screen [screen 5.4]. Displays the current dressing feed speed.

D-100

DRESS IN PROGRESS screen [screen 5.4.1] (Continued) [Function Key] Press F1 F2 F3 F4 F5 F6 F7 F8 F9 F10 To Unused Unused Unused Unused Finalize the correction data for hairline and kerf position alignment during a temporary stop. Unused Unused Unused Unused Call up the LIGHT ADJUSTMENT screen. --- 341/381 only ---

D-101

1-7. Setup Related Screens


Summary of this section This section describes the setup-related screens. Section No. 1-7-1 1-7-2 1-7-3 1-7-4 1-7-5 1-7-6 Title SETUP screen [screen 5.3] CHUCK TABLE SETUP screen [screen 5.3.1] POINTED CHUCK TABLE SETUP screen [screen 5.3.2] NONCONTACT SETUP screen [screen 5.3.3] [optional accessory] SENSOR CALIBRATION SETUP screen [screen 5.3.4] [optional accessory] NONCONTACT SETUP SENSOR CLEANING screen [screen 5.8] [optional accessory]

D-102

1-7-1. SETUP screen [screen 5.3]


SETUP screen [screen 5.3] The SETUP screen [screen 5.3] is used to select the type of setup to be performed. This screen appears by pressing the <F3> key from the BLADE MAINTENANCE screen [screen 5.0]. [Screen]
D I S C O D I C E R S E R I E S < DAD321 >YY-MM-DD [ ] < SETUP > F1. F2. F3. F4. CHUCK TABLE SETUP POINTED CHUCK TABLE SETUP NONCONTACT SETUP SENSOR CALIBRATION SETUP 5.3

[Function Key] Press F1 F2 F3 F4 To Call up the CHUCK TABLE SETUP screen [screen 5.3.1]. Call up the POINTED CHUCK TABLE SETUP screen [screen 5.3.2] which is used for setup position designation. Call up the optical sensor based NONCONTACT SETUP screen [screen 5.3.3]. [optional accessory] Call up the SENSOR CALIBRATION SETUP screen [screen 5.3.4]. [optional accessory]

D-103

1-7-2. CHUCK TABLE SETUP screen [screen 5.3.1]


CHUCK TABLE SETUP screen [screen 5.3.1] CHUCK TABLE SETUP screen [screen 5.3.1] is used to confirm the data before executing chuck table setup. This screen appears when you press the <F1> key from the SETUP screen [screen 5.3]. - Pressing the <ENTER> key initiates chuck table setup process execution. [Screen]
D I S C O D I C E R S E R I E S < DAD321 >YY-MM-DD [ ] < CHUCK TABLE SETUP > 5.3.1

SPINDLE REV. BLADE O.D. CHUCK TABLE SIZE SETUP KIND

: : : :

[1] [2] [3] [4]

rpm mm inch

PLEASE CHECK BLADE OUT DIAMETER AND SPINDLE REVOLUTIONS. PRESS 'ENTER' KEY, SETUP STARTING.

F1: F6:

F2: F7:

F3:BLADE INF. F8:

F4: F9:

F5 : F10:

[Setting Item]
Item No.

[1]

[2]

[3]

[4]

Descriptions Displays the spindle rotating speed during the setup process. - The value set by the SETUP DATA 1 screen [screen 5.7] is displayed. Displays the blade outside diameter. - The value set by the BLADE REPLACEMENT screen [screen 5.1] is displayed. Displays the chuck table size (setup position). - The value entered from the SETUP DATA 1 screen [screen 5.7] is displayed. Displays the chuck table type. The value entered from the SETUP DATA 1 screen [screen 5.7], UNIVERSAL or POROUS is displayed.

D-104

CHUCK TABLE SETUP screen [screen 5.3.1] (Continued) [Function Key] Press F1 F2 F3 F4 F5 F6 F7 F8 F9 F10 To Unused Unused Call up the BLADE LIFE/WEAR INFORMATION screen [screen 5.6]. Unused Unused Unused Unused Unused Unused Unused

D-105

1-7-3. POINTED CHUCK TABLE SETUP screen [screen 5.3.2]


POINTED CHUCK TABLE SETUP screen [screen 5.3.2] POINTED CHUCK TABLE SETUP screen [screen 5.3.2] is used to confirm data prior to execution of the pointed chuck table setup. This screen appears when you press the <F2> key from the SETUP screen [screen 5.3]. - Pressing the <ENTER> key initiates the position-designated chuck table setup process. [Screen]
D I S C O D I C E R S E R I E S < DAD321 >YY-MM-DD [ ] < POSITIONED CHUCK TABLE SETUP > SETUP POS. (X): (Y): ( ): [1] [2] [3] 5.3.2

mm mm

SPINDLE REV. BLADE O.D. SETUP KIND

: : :

[4] [5] [6]

rpm mm

DETERMINE SETUP POSITION MANUALLY THEN PRESS<F5>. PRESS<F10>TO MOVE TO SETUP POSITION. VERIFY BLADE O.D. AND SPINDLE REVOLUTION. TO START SETUP,PRESS<ENTER>. F1: F6: F2: F7: F3:BLADE INF. F8: F4: F9: F5 :REGISTER F10:POSITION

[Setting Item]
Item No.

[1] [2] [3] [4]

[5]

[6]

Descriptions Enter the X-axis position for setup execution. Enter the Y-axis position for setup execution. Enter the -axis position for setup execution. Indicates the spindle rotating speed during the setup process. - The value entered from the SETUP DATA 1 screen [screen 5.7] is displayed. Indicates the blade outside diameter. - The value entered from the BLADE REPLACEMENT screen [screen 5.1] is displayed.. Indicates the chuck table type. - The value entered from the SETUP DATA 1 screen [screen 5.7], UNIVERSAL or POROUS is displayed.

D-106

POINTED CHUCK TABLE SETUP screen [screen 5.3.2] (Continued) [Function Key] Press F1 F2 F3 F4 F5 F6 F7 F8 F9 F10 To Unused Unused Call up the BLADE LIFE/WEAR INFORMATION screen [screen 5.6]. Unused Setup the position of the axes moved by the JOG key. Sets data in [1], [2] and [3]. Unused Unused Unused Unused Move the X-, Y- and -axes to their respective positions defined by data entries of [1], [2] and [3].

D-107

1-7-4. NONCONTACT SETUP screen [screen 5.3.3] [optional accessory]


NONCONTACT SETUP screen [screen 5.3.3] [optional accessory] NONCONTACT SETUP screen [screen 5.3.3] is used to confirm data prior to noncontact setup process execution. This screen appears when you press the <F3> key from the SETUP screen [screen 5.3]. - Pressing the <ENTER> key initiates noncontact setup process execution. [Screen]
D I S C O D I C E R S E R I E S < DAD321 >YY-MM-DD [ ] < NONCONTACT SETUP > 5.3.3

0 10 20 30 40 50 60 70 80 90 100 120 (%) ------------------------------------------------------[1] ------------------------------------------------------VOLTAGE LEVEL [2] % ( [3] V )

SPINDLE REV. BLADE O.D.

: :

[4] [5]

rpm mm

PLEASE CONFIRM BLADE OUT DIAMETER AND SPINDLE REVOLUTIONS. PRESS 'ENTER' KEY SETUP STARTING. F1: F2: F6:SENSOR CLEAN F7: F3:BLADE INF. F8: F4: F9: F5 : F10:

[Setting Item]
Item No.

[1] [2] [3] [4]

[5]

Descriptions Displays the sensitivity of noncontact setup sensor with a bar graph. Displays the voltage level (%) of noncontact setup sensor. Displays the sensitivity amount (V) of noncontact setup sensor. Displays the spindle rotating speed during the setup process. - The value entered from the SETUP DATA 1 screen [screen 5.7] is displayed. Displays the blade outside diameter. - The value entered from the BLADE REPLACEMENT screen [screen 5.1] is displayed.

D-108

NONCONTACT SETUP screen [screen 5.3.3] [optional accessory] (Continued) [Function Key] Press F1 F2 F3 F4 F5 F6 F7 F8 F9 F10 To Unused Unused Call up the BLADE LIFE/WEAR INFORMATION screen [screen 5.6]. Unused Unused Call up the NONCONTACT SETUP SENSOR CLEANING screen [screen 5.8]. Unused Unused Unused Unused

D-109

1-7-5. SENSOR CALIBRATION SETUP screen [screen 5.3.4] [optional accessory]


SENSOR CALIBRATION SETUP screen [screen 5.3.4] [optional accessory] SENSOR CALIBRATION SETUP screen [screen 5.3.4] is used to confirm data prior to sensor calibration setup execution. This screen appears when you press the <F4> key from the SETUP screen [screen 5.3]. - Pressing the <ENTER> key initiates sensor calibration setup process execution. [Screen]
D I S C O D I C E R S E R I E S < DAD321 >YY-MM-DD [ ] 5.3.4 < SENSOR CALIBRATION SETUP > - POSITIONED(MODE: [1] ) SETUP POS. (X): [2] mm (Y): [3] mm ( ): [4] 0 10 20 30 40 50 60 70 80 90 100 120 (%) ------------------------------------------------------[5] ------------------------------------------------------VOLTAGE LEVEL [6] % ( [7] V ) SPINDLE REV. : [8] rpm BLADE O.D. : [9] mm CHUCK TABLE SIZE : [10] inch SETUP KIND : [11] IF POSITIONED MODE IS 'YES', PRESS MANUAL KEY MOVE TO SETUP POSITION, THEN PRESS 'F5' TO DECIDE. PRESS 'F10' KEY, BE MOVED TO DECIDED SETUP POSITION. PRESS 'ENTER' KEY, SETUP IS FIRST PERFORMED ON CHUCK TABLE, THEN ON NONCONTACT SENSOR, AND THE HEIGHT DIFFERENCE IS CALIBRATED. F1:SELECT F2: F3:BLADE INF. F4: F5 :REGISTER F6:SENSOR CLEAN F7: F8: F9: F10:POSITION

[Setting Item]
Item No.

[1]

[2] [3] [4] [5]

Descriptions Enter YES or NO to specify whether or not to perform setup using the pointed chuck table setup feature. Use the <F1> key to choose between YES and NO. YES Performs chuck table setup at the position defined by data entries [2][3][4]. NO Performs chuck table setup at the chuck table size position defined from the SETUP DATA 1 screen [screen 5.7]. Enter the X-axis position for setup execution. Enter the Y-axis position for setup execution. Enter the -axis position for setup execution. Displays the sensitivity of noncontact setup sensor with a bar graph.

D-110

SENSOR CALIBRATION SETUP screen [screen 5.3.4] [optional accessory] (Continued) [Setting Item]
Item No.

[6] [7] [8]

[9]

[10]

[11]

Descriptions Displays the voltage level (%) of noncontact setup sensor. Displays the sensitivity amount (V) of noncontact setup sensor. Displays the spindle rotating speed during the setup process. - The value entered from the SETUP DATA 1 screen [screen 5.7] is displayed. Displays the blade outside diameter. - The value entered from the BLADE REPLACEMENT screen [screen 5.1] is displayed. Displays the chuck table size (setup position). - The value entered from the SETUP DATA 1 screen [screen 5.7] is displayed. Displays the chuck table type. - The value entered from the SETUP DATA 1 screen [screen 5.7], UNIVERSAL or POROUS is displayed.

[Function Key] Press F1 F2 F3 F4 F5 F6 F7 F8 F9 F10 To Choose between YES and NO. Unused Call up the BLADE LIFE/WEAR INFORMATION screen [screen 5.6]. Unused Setup the position of the axes moved by the JOG key. Sets data in [2], [3] and [4]. Call up the NONCONTACT SETUP SENSOR CLEANING screen [screen 5.8]. Unused Unused Unused Move the X-, Y- and -axes to their respective positions defined by data entries of [2], [3] and [4].

D-111

1-7-6. NONCONTACT SETUP SENSOR CLEANING screen [screen 5.8] [optional accessory]
NONCONTACT SETUP SENSOR CLEANING screen [screen 5.8] [optional accessory] NONCONTACT SETUP SENSOR CLEANING screen [screen 5.8] is used to clean the noncontact setup sensor section. This screen appears when you press the <F6> key from the NONCONTACT SETUP screen [screen 5.3.3] or SENSOR CALIBRATION SETUP screen [screen 5.3.4] or <F8> key from the BLADE MAINTENANCE screen [screen 5.0]. [Screen]
D I S C O D I C E R S E R I E S < DAD321 >YY-MM-DD [ ] 5.8 < NONCONTACT SETUP SENSOR CLEANING >

0 10 20 30 40 50 60 70 80 90 100 120 (%) ------------------------------------------------------[1] ------------------------------------------------------VOLTAGE LEVEL [2] % ([3] V)

F1. F2.

NONCONTACT SENSOR POSITION WATER ON/OFF NONCONTACT SENSOR POSITION BLOW ON/OFF

ADJUSTMENT METHOD: STOP WATER AND CLEANING THE HEAD OF NONCONTACT SENSOR. CONFIRM VOLTAGE LEVEL IS IN 1002%.

[Setting Item]
Item No.

[1] [2] [3]

Descriptions Displays the sensitivity of noncontact setup sensor with a bar graph. Displays the voltage level (%) of noncontact setup sensor. Displays the sensitivity amount (V) of noncontact setup sensor.

[Function Key] Press F1 F2 To Turn ON and OFF the water supply to the noncontact setup sensor section. Turn ON and OFF the air-blowing to the noncontact setup sensor section.

D-112

1-8. Error Recovery Related Screens


Summary of this section This section describes the error recovery screens that are displayed when an error occurs during kerf check operation, blade breakage detection by the blade breakage detector or auto-setup. Section No. Title 1-8-1 ERROR RECOVERY (KERF CHECK) screen [optional accessory] 1-8-2 ERROR RECOVERY (B.B.D) screen [optional accessory] 1-8-3 ERROR RECOVERY (SETUP) screen [optional accessory]

D-113

1-8-1. ERROR RECOVERY (KERF CHECK) screen [optional accessory]


ERROR RECOVERY (KERF CHECK) screen [optional accessory] ERROR RECOVERY (KERF CHECK) screen is displayed when an error occurs while the kerf check function [optional accessory] is executed. Criteria for recovery selection are as follows: Recovery Option Selection F1: Kerf check retry Situation Select the "Kerf check retry" option when the kerf check error is caused by "a detection failure due to water remaining on the work" or other factors and the operation can be resumed by retrying. Select the "Kerf check teach" option when the kerf check error is caused by "improper kerf check data setup" or the like and you intend to correct the data. Select the "Stop adjust" option when you intend to conduct kerf check by viewing the camera image on the STOP CORRECTION screen. Select the "Start cut" option when you intend to resume the cutting operation because visual checkout by the operator reveals that the kerf condition is normal.

F2: Kerf check teach

F3: Stop adjust

F4: Start cut

D-114

ERROR RECOVERY (KERF CHECK) screen [optional accessory] (continued) [Screen]


D I S C O D I C E R S E R I E S < DAD321 >YY-MM-DD [ ] < ERROR RECOVERY(KERF CHECK) > F1. F2. F3. F4. KERF CHECK RETRY KERF CHECK TEACH STOP ADJUST START CUT

[Function Key] Press F1 To Perform the kerf check again. The machine resumes a cutting operation after the kerf check is normally ended. Call up the KERF CHECK DATA 1 screen [screen KERF1] to edit data. Call up the STOP CORRECTION screen. The machine resumes a cutting operation after completion of correction. Allow the machine to resume a cutting operation immediately.

F2 F3 F4

D-115

1-8-2. ERROR RECOVERY (B.B.D) screen [optional accessory]


ERROR RECOVERY (B.B.D) screen [optional accessory] ERROR RECOVERY (B.B.D) screen is displayed when the blade breakage detector [optional accessory] detects a blade breakage. [Screen]
D I S C O D I C E R S E R I E S < DAD321 >YY-MM-DD [ ] < ERROR RECOVERY(B.B.D) >

SENSITIVITY LEVEL Adjust sensor so that sensitivity level is 105% (515%). 0 10 20 30 40 50 60 70 80 90 100 120 (%) ------------------------------------------------------[1] ------------------------------------------------------SENSITIVITY : [2] %

F1 F2 F3 F4

RESTART ABOUT CUT BLADE REPLACEMENT BLADE LIFE/WEAR INFORMATION

[Setting Item]
Item No.

[1] [2]

Descriptions Displays a bar graph to indicate the sensitivity level. Shows a percentage value to indicate the sensitivity level.

[Function Key] Press F1 F2 F3 F4 To Allow the machine to resume the cutting operation immediately. Discontinue the cutting operation. Call up the BLADE REPLACEMENT screen [screen 5.1]. Call up the BLADE LIFE/WEAR INFORMATION screen [screen 5.6].

D-116

1-8-3. ERROR RECOVERY (SETUP) screen [optional accessory]


ERROR RECOVERY (SETUP) screen [optional accessory] ERROR RECOVERY (SETUP) screen is used to achieve error recovery when an error occurs in the auto-setup [optional accessory]. [Screen]
D I S C O D I C E R S E R I E S < DAD321 >YY-MM-DD [ ] < ERROR RECOVERY(SETUP) > F1. F2. F3. F4. AUTO SETUP PASS AUTO SETUP RETRY ABOUT CUT NONCONTACT SENSOR CLEAN

[Function Key] Press F1 F2 To Terminate the setup process and resume a cutting operation. Perform setup again. The machine resumes a cutting operation when setup is normally ended. Discontinue the cutting operation. Call up the NONCONTACT SETUP SENSOR CLEANING screen [screen 5.8].

F3 F4

D-117

2. Cutting Data Setup


Summary of this section Before conducting actual cutting operations, it is necessary to enter, edit or confirm various cutting conditions. This section mainly deals with such cutting data as well as specifications of cutting function and examples of cutting data setup. Section No. Title 2-1 Cutting Function Contents - Cutting shape - Cutting mode - Blade wear compensation function - Examples of cutting data (in DAD mode) - Setting procedure (in DAD mode) - Examples of cutting data (in DAC mode) - Setting procedure (in DAC mode)

2-2

2-3

Cutting Data Setup Example --- DAD Mode --Cutting Data Setup Example --- DAC Mode ---

D-118

2-1. Cutting Function


Summary of this section This section describes the specifications of cutting functions to be set on the DEVICE DATA 1 screen [screen 4.2]. Section No. Title 2-1-1 Cutting shape 2-1-2 Cutting mode Contents - Cutting shape of round cut - Cutting shape of square cut - A cutting mode - B cutting mode - AS cutting mode - BS cutting mode - B ZKEEP cutting mode - BS ZKEEP cutting mode - A UP/AS UP cutting mode - Function of blade wear compensation - Precautions for using blade wear compensation function

2-1-3

Blade wear compensation function

DAD321 YY-MM-DD [ ] 4.2 DEVICE DATA1 DIRECTRY DEVICE DATA No. UNIT CUT MODE CUT SHAPE SPINDLE REV.

ID

rpm

RND WORK SIZE SQR WORK SIZE CH1 CH2 FEED SPEED Y INDEX

mm mm mm mm/s mm mm m mm mm/s % % LINES F5 : F10:

WORK THICKNESS mm TAPE THICKNESS mm BLADE HEIGHT mm BLADE WEAR ADJUSTMENT PRECUT DATA No.

CH1 CH2

<< AUTO SETUP DATA >> AUTO SETUP FOR CUTTING : CREATION DISTANCE : m EVERY : F1:SELECT F2: F3:DATA2 F4:DATA3 F6: F7:KERF CHECK F8:MEASURE F9:PRECUT

CUT LENGTH Z-ADJUST Z-AXIS DOWN SPEED -ADJUST SWING CH1 CH2

D-119

2-1-1. Cutting shape


About cutting shape The term cutting shape refers to the form into which the work is shaped in the cutting. Specify the cutting shape at the column "CUT SHAPE" of the DEVICE DATA 1 screen [screen 4.2]. Round cutting (ROUND) Cutting is performed according to the circular shape of the work.

Square cutting (SQUARE) Cutting is performed according to the square or rectangular shape of the work. For rectangular works, the respective stroke of the CH1 and CH2 should be specified.

D-120

2-1-2. Cutting mode


Summary of this section This section describes various types of cutting mode and the machine movement in each mode. Section No. 2-1-2-1 2-1-2-2 2-1-2-3 2-1-2-4 2-1-2-5 2-1-2-6 2-1-2-7 Title A cutting mode B cutting mode AS cutting mode BS cutting mode B ZKEEP cutting mode BS ZKEEP cutting mode A UP/AS UP cutting mode

D-121

2-1-2-1. A cutting mode


About A cutting mode The A mode is for one-way cutting (DOWN CUT). Movement in A cutting mode The machine movement in A cutting mode is as shown below.
[3] With the Z-axis lifted by the escape amount, the X-axis returns to the right and the Y-axis advances by the preselected indexing amount. [1] X-axis moves leftward to cut. [4] Z-axis descends to the blade height position.

[2] Z-axis rises by the escape amount.

No. [1] [2]

[3]

[4]

Movement Cutting is performed only when the chuck table moves from right to left. The Z-axis ascends by the escape amount that is specified with the reference to the position of workpiece thickness plus tape thickness. - The Z-axis escape amount can be specified from the OPERATION DATA MAINTENANCE screen [screen 6.4] which is a lower-level screen linked to the OPERATOR MAINTENANCE screen [screen 6.0]. With the Z-axis rising by the escape amount, the chuck table returns rapidly and the Y-axis advances by the predefined index amount. The Z-axis descends to the blade height position and resumes cutting.

D-122

2-1-2-2. B cutting mode


About B cutting mode The B mode is for reciprocating cutting (DOWN CUT/UP CUT). Movement in B cutting mode The machine movement in B cutting mode is as shown below.
[3] Y-axis indexing [2] Z-axis rises [4] Z-axis descends. [1] X-axis leftward cutting (DOWN CUT)

[5] X-axis rightward cutting (UP CUT)

No. [1] [2]

[3] [4] [5]

Movement Cutting is performed when the chuck table moves from right to left. The Z-axis ascends by the escape amount that is specified with the reference to the position of workpiece thickness plus tape thickness. - The Z-axis escape amount can be specified from the OPERATION DATA MAINTENANCE screen [screen 6.4] which is a lower-level screen linked to the OPERATOR MAINTENANCE screen [screen 6.0]. The Y-axis advances by the predefined index amount. The Z-axis descends to the blade height position. Cutting restarts in the opposite direction to [1]. - Cutting is performed when the chuck table moves from left to right.

D-123

2-1-2-3. AS cutting mode


About AS cutting mode In the AS cutting mode, the machine performs cutting according to the DEVICE DATA 2 screen [screen 4.3] and DEVICE DATA 3 screen [screen 4.4] for individual axis movements, which have been setup with reference to the A cutting mode (one-way cutting) operation. The DEVICE DATA 2 screen [screen 4.3] and DEVICE DATA 3 screen [screen 4.4] consists of the following setting items: -axis rotation angle (from the origin), cut line number limitation, blade height, feed speed and index. Up to six data can be set for each channel, regarding the blade height, feed speed and index as constituting one cutting cycle and a cut sequence more complicated than the A cutting mode sequence can be formulated. Movement in AS cutting mode The machine movement in AS cutting mode is as shown below.

Index Blade DOWN

Z UP by escape amount

Feed speed

Blade height Chuck table top surface

Solid line : Operation performed in compliance with device data. Broken line : Operation performed in compliance with device data and operating screen setup. Arrow : Direction of operation.

D-124

2-1-2-4. BS cutting mode


About BS cutting mode In the BS cutting mode, the machine performs cutting according to the DEVICE DATA 2 screen [screen 4.3] and DEVICE DATA 3 screen [screen 4.4] for individual axis movements, which have been setup with reference to the B cutting mode (reciprocating cutting) operation. The DEVICE DATA 2 screen [screen 4.3] and DEVICE DATA 3 screen [screen 4.4] consists of the following setting items -axis rotation angle (from the origin), cut line number limitation, blade height, feed speed and index. Up to six data can be set for each channel, regarding the blade height, feed speed and index as constituting one cutting cycle and a cut sequence more complicated than the B cutting mode sequence can be formulated. Movement in BS cutting mode The machine movement in BS cutting mode is as shown below.

Blade DOWN

Index

Feed speed

Blade height Chuck table top surface

D-125

2-1-2-5. B ZKEEP cutting mode


About B ZKEEP cutting mode The B ZKEEP mode operation is based on the B mode, but the Z-direction escape operation is not performed in the indexing sequence.

2-1-2-6. BS ZKEEP cutting mode


About BS ZKEEP cutting mode The BS ZKEEP mode operation is based on the BS mode, but the Z-direction escape operation is not performed in the indexing sequence.

D-126

2-1-2-7. A UP/AS UP cutting mode


About A UP/AS UP cutting mode In the A cutting mode, the machine performs cutting while the chuck table moves from right to left. In the A UP cutting mode, on the other hand, the machine conducts cutting while the chuck table moves from left to right. In the AS UP cutting mode for which data are specified from the DEVICE DATA 2 screen [screen 4.3] and DEVICE DATA 3 screen [screen 4.4], the machine carries out cutting when the chuck table moves from the left to the right, in the same manner as A_UP. Movement in A UP/AS UP cutting mode The machine movement in A UP/AS UP cutting mode are as shown below. A cutting mode A UP cutting mode AS UP cutting mode
Direction of rotation

Direction of rotation

Chuck table Moves from right to left

Chuck table Moves from left to right

D-127

2-1-3. Blade wear compensation function


Summary of this section This section describes the specifications and cautions for the blade wear compensation function. Section No. Title 2-1-3-1 About blade wear compensation (Z-axis auto-down) 2-1-3-2 Blade wear compensation precautions Contents - Function of blade wear compensation (Z-axis auto-down) - Movement in blade wear compensation - Precautions for using blade wear compensation function

Precautions for using the blade wear compensation function

NOTICE

When the blade wear compensation function is enabled, be sure to thoroughly understand and follow the precautions given below before performing data setup. The chuck table surface may be damaged by the blade, depending on the set data. The blade wear compensation amount and frequency setup must be properly controlled at all times.

D-128

2-1-3-1. About blade wear compensation (Z-axis auto-down)


About blade wear compensation (Z-axis auto-down) The blade wear compensation (Z-axis auto-down) function is effective in the cutting in which the blade wear amount is high. If this function is selected, each time the cut distance (in meters) reaches the predefined value, the Z-axis automatically descends by the specified distance to keep constant the amount left uncut. This function is effective in the auto cutting and semi-auto cutting. Data setup for blade wear compensation (Z-axis auto-down) can be made from the DEVICE DATA 1 screen [screen 4.2]. For the data setup procedure, see the section 1-4 of this chapter, [Device Data Related Screens] and 2 of this chapter, [Cutting Data Setup]. Movement in blade wear compensation (Z-axis auto-down) - When the blade wear compensation (Z-axis auto-down) function is used in the auto cutting, the auto-down distance counting starts from a count of zero. - When the cutting distance count reaches the preset distance, the Z-axis (blade) automatically descends by the specified distance.

After cutting preset distance Automatic Z correction

D-129

2-1-3-2. Blade wear compensation precautions


Precautions 1: Setting [BLADE WEAR ADJUSTMENT] (Z-axis correction amount) When setting the [BLADE WEAR ADJUSTMENT], careful consideration must be given to the actual blade wear amount and the value set as [BLADE HEIGHT]. In the cases below, for example, the workpiece or chuck table may be broken. - When the value of [BLADE WEAR ADJUSTMENT] is greater than the actual blade wear amount: Every time the blade wear adjustment (Z-axis auto-down) is performed, the machine cuts the workpiece more deep than the predefined blade height. In such cases, there is a possibility to finally cause a breakage of the workpiece or chuck table. - When the value of [BLADE WEAR ADJUSTMENT] is greater than that of [BLADE HEIGHT]: At the time of the first blade wear adjustment, the workpiece or chuck table may be broken. Setting place of [BLADE WEAR ADJUSTMENT]
DAD321 YY-MM-DD [ ] 4.2 DEVICE DATA1 DIRECTRY [1] DEVICE DATA No. [2]1234567 UNIT CUT MODE CUT SHAPE SPINDLE REV. [4] MM [5] A [6] ROUND [7] 30000 rpm

ID [3]DATA-1

RND WORK SIZE [8] 152.400 mm SQR WORK SIZE CH1 [9] 0.000 mm CH2 [10] 0.000 mm FEED SPEED Y INDEX [14] 100.0 mm/s CH1 [15] 2.000 mm CH2 [16] 1.000 mm CUT LENGTH [17] 0.000 m Z-ADJUST [18] 0.020 mm Z-AXIS DOWN SPEED [20] 10.00 mm/s -ADJUST SWING CH1 [21] 70 % CH2 [22] 70 % LINES F5 : F10:

WORK THICKNESS [11]1.000 mm TAPE THICKNESS [12]0.080 mm BLADE HEIGHT [13]0.480 mm BLADE WEAR ADJUSTMENT PRECUT DATA No. [19] 1

<< AUTO SETUP DATA >> AUTO SETUP FOR CUTTING :[23] YES CREATION DISTANCE :[24] 0.000 m EVERY :[25] 0 F1:SELECT F2: F3:DATA2 F4:DATA3 F6: F7:KERF CHECK F8:MEASURE F9:PRECUT

D-130

Precautions 2: Setting the blade wear compensation amount and frequency The blade wear compensation amount and frequency must be properly controlled at all times. When the setup operation is performed with the blade wear compensation function enabled, the Z-axis amount left uncut is initialized without respect to the actual blade wear. Therefore, when the Z-axis auto-down function is executed, the Z-axis descends by the auto-down amount from the setup point, which may incur work breakage.
After use (Blade is worn) Flange Blade D E Immediately after setup At auto-down

AB

Flange contacts with wafer A: Wafer thickness B: Amount left uncut caused by worn blade C: Predefined amount left uncut D: Amount corrected by setup E: Auto-down amount

D-131

Precautions 3: "Cut depth" and "blade tip protrusion amount" Give due attention to the "cut depth" and "blade tip protrusion amount". If the Z-axis correction amount (blade wear compensation) predefined on the DEVICE DATA 1 screen [screen 4.2] is greater than the actual blade wear amount, the Z-axis automatically descends over the specified cutting distance without regard to the actual blade wear amount. In such a case, it is conceivable that the actual amount left uncut may become gradually smaller than the predefined amount left uncut.

After cutting specified distance

After auto-down Actual amount left uncut Predefined amount left uncut

Supplementary explanation Other characteristics of the blade wear compensation function are as follows: [1] The position to which the Z-axis automatically moves down (DOWN) is set as the Z-axis setup position. [2] Data are retained even after the machine power supply is turned OFF. [3] Blade wear compensation cannot be made during the auto cutting or semi-auto cutting.

D-132

2-2. Cutting Data Setup Example --- DAD Mode --Summary of this section This section describes the setup examples of cutting data in DAD mode. These examples are on the assumption that the optional accessory kerf check and auto-setup features are both incorporated. Section No. Title 2-2-1 Cutting data setup example 1
--- A/B/A UP/ B ZKEEP cutting mode ---

Contents - Data setup example and setting procedure for cutting mode of A, B, A_UP and B_ZKEEP - Data setup example and setting procedure for cutting in which the cutting sequence involves multiple indexing and multilevel cutting - Data setup example and setting procedure for the rectangular cutting which includes multiple indexing - Data setup example and setting procedure for AS cutting mode with multi-channel to cut chips in hexagon - Verification of device data registration after entering example 1 through 4

2-2-2

Cutting data setup example 2


--- AS/BS/AS UP/ BS ZKEEP cutting mode ---

2-2-3

Cutting data setup example 3


--- AS cutting mode/ multiple indexing/ rectangular cutting ---

2-2-4

Cutting data setup example 4


--- AS cutting mode/ multi-channel/ hexagonal-shaped chip ---

2-2-5

Device data registration

D-133

2-2-1. Cutting data setup example 1 --- A/B/A UP/B ZKEEP cutting mode --Summary of this section This section describes the data setup examples and setting procedures for cutting in A, B, A_UP and B_ZKEEP cutting modes. Section No. Title 2-2-1-1 Description of cutting data <example 1> Contents - Illustration showing the result when cutting is performed based on the example 1 - Cutting conditions - Auto-setup conditions - Precutting conditions - Kerf check conditions - Data setting procedure for the example 1

2-2-1-2

Procedures for data setup <example 1>

D-134

2-2-1-1. Description of cutting data <example 1>


Illustrated description of cutting data <example 1>

CH2

1.0mm

2.0mm CH1

Cut depth 0.6 mm

Workpiece thickness 1.0 mm Tape thickness 0.08 mm

Amount left uncut = (Workpiece thickness + Tape thickness) - Cut depth = (1.0 + 0.08) - 0.6 = 0.48mm

D-135

Cutting conditions for <example 1> Item Device No. ID name Workpiece diameter Workpiece thickness Tape thickness Cut depth Amount left uncut (blade height) Cutting shape Cutting mode Spindle rotation speed Cutting speed Cutting direction Blade wear correction (auto-down) Precut data No. Auto-setup conditions for <example 1> Item Auto-setup Auto-setup timing Conditions Auto-setup operation is performed even while one workpiece is being cut. Auto-setup operation is performed every 1000 lines. Conditions 12345678 DATA-1 152.4 mm 1.0 mm 0.08 mm 0.6 mm (Workpieces thickness + tape thickness) - cut depth = 0.48 mm Round cutting (ROUND) A cutting mode 30,000 rpm 100 mm/s CH1 and CH2, index cutting from front to rear (standard). Wear compensation distance: Every 10 m Wear compensation: 0.002 mm No.1

D-136

Precutting conditions for <example 1> The descriptions of precutting conditions (precut data No. 1) for <example 1> are as follows: - Old blade start data SEQ : 5 - New blade start data SEQ: 1 - Step number to which a return is made from the old blade start data SEQ at the time of resuming precutting: 1 SEQ 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 30 Feed speed (mm/s) 10 20 30 40 50 60 70 80 90 100 110 120 130 140 150 0 0 Lines 20 10 10 20 20 30 30 40 40 50 50 50 50 50 50 0 0

D-137

Kerf check conditions for <example 1> [optional accessory] Item Check cycle Workpiece check First check line Subsequent check lines Check mode Recognition range Check target Kerf check sensitivity Kerf recognition lower limit (kerf point) Allowable Automatic value correction Alarm call Conditions No setting Every 1 workpiece The 10th line of each channel Every 5 line of each channel Check the center of both the kerf lines and hairlines. The whole of one screen is monitored. Kerf center Sensitivity = 2 50%

When the off-center value is 0.002 mm or more. When a kerf point is 50% or lower. If the off-center value is 0.01 mm or more. If the kerf width is recognized to be 0.046 mm or more or 0.009 mm or less. If the total width of the kerf width and side chipping are recognized to be 0.068 mm or more. If the width from the kerf center to the maximum chipping is recognized to be 0.036 mm or more. Precut execution When the chipping is 0.011 mm or more. conditions When the chipping occurrence area on the check screen is 7000 pixels or more. Check retry times 3 times Air blow time 5s

D-138

2-2-1-2. Procedures for data setup <example 1>


Operation flow <example 1> The outline of procedures for data setup <example 1> are as indicated below. The reference device No. 000 data is stored in machine memory. Many data can be shared between various device data. It is therefore recommended that the copy function be used for new device data setup. In the DEVICE DATA 1 screen [screen 4.2] used in the setting procedures for <example 1> data, the -axis rotation angle from channel 1 to 2 is fixed at 90 . Further, the cutting direction is fixed to "FRONT to REAR". However, you may want to perform cutting with rotation angle other than 90 or designate different cutting direction for each channel. In such cases, select the cutting mode of AS, BS or AS_UP and then specify data from DEVICE DATA 2 screen [screen 4.3] and DEVICE DATA 3 screen [screen 4.4]. The flow shown below is the outline procedures for device data setup. Copying reference device data

Device data setup

Precut data setup

Kerf check data setup [optional accessory]

D-139

Procedures for copying reference device data <example 1>


Step No.

Do This Press the <DEVICE DATA > key on the operation panel or press the <F4> key from the MAIN MENU screen [screen 0.0]. - The DEVICE DATA LIST screen [screen 4.0] then appears. - This screen performs device data listing, copying, deleting and calling up in order to set, edit or confirm the cutting conditions. - Note that the input of "data password" is required for the call up of this screen.
D I S C O D I C E R S E R I E S < DAD321 >YY-MM-DD [ ] 4.0 < DEVICE DATA LIST > +-----------------------+------------------------------------------------------------+ | DIRECTORY | DEVICE No. DEVICE ID. | +-----------------------+------------------------------------------------------------+ | | 000 DISCO | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | +-----------------------------------------------------------+ | | DEVICE No. DATA: TOTAL: | | | DEVICE ID | +-------------------------------------------------------------------------------------+ Device data can be called up with the ENTER key. F1:PREVIOUS F2:COPY F3: F4:RENAME F5:DELETE F6:NEXT F7:MOVE CUR F8: F9: F10:REGISTRATION

D-140

Procedures for copying reference device data <example 1> (Continued)


Step No.

Do This Copy the reference device No. 000 data to the new device No. 12345678 position. 1) Reverse the line of device No. (No. 000 in this example) using the arrow key. 2) Press the <F2> key. - The window to input the number is open. - Note that the input of "data password" is required for calling up this screen. 3) Enter the new device No. (12345678 in this example) in [7].
D I S C O D I C E R S E R I E S < DAD321 >YY-MM-DD [ ] 4.0 < DEVICE DATA LIST > +-----------------------+-----------------------------------------------------------------+ | DIRECTORY | DEVICE No. DEVICE ID. | +-----------------------+-----------------------------------------------------------------+ | | [1] 000 [2] DISCO | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | Input device No. | | | [7]12345678 | | | | | | | | | | +----------------------------------------------------------------+ | | DEVICE No. [3] DATA: [5] TOTAL: [6] | | | DEVICE ID [4] | +------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------+ Device data can be called up with the ENTER key. F1:PREVIOUS F2:COPY F3: F4:RENAME F5:DELETE F6:NEXT F7:MOVE CUR F8: F9: F10:REGISTRATION

D-141

Procedures for copying reference device data <example 1> (Continued)


Step No.

Do

This

Press the <ENTER> key. - The reference device No. 000 data is copied to the new device No. 12345678 position. - The screen shows device No. 12345678 that has just been added using the copy function.
D I S C O D I C E R S E R I E S < DAD321 >YY-MM-DD [ ] 4.0 < DEVICE DATA LIST > +-----------------------+--------------------------------------------------------------+ | DIRECTORY | DEVICE No. DEVICE ID. | +-----------------------+--------------------------------------------------------------+ | | 000 DISCO | | | 12345678 DISCO | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | +-------------------------------------------------------------+ | | DEVICE No.12345678 DATA: 2 TOTAL: 2 | | | DEVICE ID DISCO | +---------------------------------------------------------------------------------------+ Device data can be called up with the ENTER key. F1:PREVIOUS F2:COPY F3: F4:RENAME F5:DELETE F6:NEXT F7:MOVE CUR F8: F9: F10:REGISTRATION

4 5

Reverse the line of copied device No. (No. 12345678 in the example) using the arrow key. After checking the device No. displayed at [3], press the <ENTER> key. - The DEVICE DATA 1 screen [screen 4.2] then appears. - Note that the input of "data password" is required for the call up of DEVICE DATA 1 screen [screen 4.2]. - Now the procedures for copying the reference data is completed. - The next step is the device data setup.

D-142

Procedures for device data setup <example 1>


Step No.

Do This On the DEVICE DATA 1 screen [screen 4.2], enter the data of "cutting conditions for <example 1>". - See the section 1-4-2-1 of this chapter, "DEVICE DATA 1 screen [screen 4.2]". - Entries for <<AUTO SETUP DATA>> can be made only when the noncontact setup optional accessory is incorporated.
DAD321 YY-MM-DD [ ] 4.2 DEVICE DATA1 DIRECTRY DEVICE DATA No. UNIT CUT MODE CUT SHAPE SPINDLE REV. [1] [2]12345678

DEVICE ID

[3]DATA-1

[4] MM [5] A RND WORK SIZE [8] 152.400 [6] ROUND SQR WORK SIZE CH1 [9] 0.000 [7] 30000 rpm CH2 [10] 0.000

mm mm mm

mm FEED SPEED [14] 100.0 mm/s mm Y INDEX CH1 [15] 2.000 mm mm CH2 [16] 1.000 mm CUT LENGTH [17] 10.00 m Z-ADJUST [18] 0.002 mm PRECUT DATA No. [19] 1 Z-AXIS DOWN SPEED [20] 10.00 mm/s -ADJUST SWING CH1 [21] 70 % << AUTO SETUP DATA >> CH2 [22] 70 % AUTO SETUP FOR CUTTING :[23] YES CREATION DISTANCE :[24] 0.000 m EVERY :[25] 1000 LINES F1:SELECT F2: F3:DATA2 F4:DATA3 F5: F6: F7:KERF CHECKF8:MEASURE F9:PRECUT F10:

WORK THICKNESS [11]1.000 TAPE THICKNESS [12]0.080 BLADE HEIGHT [13]0.480 BLADE WEAR ADJUSTMENT

After entering data, press the <ENTER> key to finalize editing. - If data is updated and the maintenance mode is cleared by the function keys or the <EXIT> key without registering the data by the <ENTER> key, the data modification will be invalid. - Pressing the <EXIT> key causes the screen to return to the DEVICE DATA LIST screen [screen 4.0]. - Now the procedures for device data setup is completed. - The next step is the precut data setup.

Procedures for precut data setup <example 1> For the procedures for precut data setup, see the section 4-2 of this chapter, [Precut Data Maintenance]. - The next step is the kerf check data setup.

D-143

Procedures for kerf check data setup <example 1> [optional accessory] The data shown below are recommended data. [Kerf check data instruction view]
Kerf center [22] [20] [24] [15]

[16][18]

Hairline center

Item Blade thickness Maximum allowable chipping width Off-center (allowable shift) [15]: Off-center adjust

Conditions 0.025 to 0.030 mm 0.010 mm 0.001 mm Allowable shift + 0.001 mm* (0.04 mil) = 0.001 mm + 0.001 mm = 0.002 mm Blade thickness (maximum) + 0.010 mm (0.4 mil) + 0.002 mm* (0.08 mil) + 0.004 mm** (0.16 mil) = 0.030 mm + 0.016 mm = 0.046 mm Blade thickness (minimum) - 0.010 mm (0.4 mil) - 0.002 mm* (0.08 mil) - 0.004 mm** (0.16 mil) = 0.025 mm - 0.016 mm = 0.009 mm [16] + [24] + [24] = 0.046 mm + 0.011 mm + 0.011 mm = 0.068 mm [20] / 2 + [14] = 0.068 mm / 2 + 0.002 mm = 0.036 mm Maximum allowable chipping width + 0.001 mm* = 0.010 mm + 0.001 mm = 0.011 mm

[16]: Upper kerf width limit

[18]: Lower kerf width limit

[20]: Kerf width (including chipping) [22]: Kerf width (hairline center-chipping) [24]: Allowable chipping width

* **

This value is added at tape cutting. When adding the minimum recognition accuracy of image processing.

D-144

Procedures for kerf check data setup <example 1> [optional accessory] (Continued)
Step No.

Do This With a device data related screen ([screen 4.2] through [screen 4.10]) displayed, press the <F7> key. - The KERF CHECK FUNCTION PARAMETER screen [screen 4.7] will appear. - This screen is used to set, edit or confirm the data related to kerf check operation. Enter kerf check conditions <example 1> data. - See the section 1-4-2-4 of this chapter, "KERF CHECK FUNCTION PARAMETER screen [screen 4.7]".
D I S C O D I C E R S E R I E S < DAD321 >YY-MM-DD [ ] 4.7 < KERF CHECK FUNCTION PARAMETER > CHECK FREQUENCY EVERY [1] 0 LINES [2]0.000 m CHANNEL FIRST CHECK SUBSEQUENT CHECKS CH1 [3] 10 LINE [7] 5 LINES CH2 [4] 10 LINE [8] 5 LINES CH3 [5] 0 LINE [9] 0 LINES CH4 [6] 0 LINE [10] 0 LINES -- PERMISSION -CHECK MODE : [11]KERF ERROR COUNTERMEASURE KERF SCORE [12] 50 % [13]CALL CHECK OBJECT OFF CENTER CALL [14]0.002 mm SENSITIVENESS OFF CENTER ADJ. [15]0.000 mm RETRY TIMES KERF WIDTH MAX. [16]0.046 mm [17]CALL AIR BLOW TIMER MIN. [18]0.009 mm [19]CALL LIGHT LEV(DIR) INCLUDE CHIPPING [20]0.068 mm [21]CALL (OBL) CENTER TO CHIPPING [22]0.036 mm[23]CALL CHIPPING SIZE MAX. [24]0.011 mm[25]CALL CHIPPING AREA [26] 4000pix. [27]CALL F1:SELECT F2:DATA1 F3:DATA2 F4:DATA3 F6: F7: F8: F9:PRECUT

[28]CENTER [29] 2 [30] 3 [31] 5 s [32] 0 % [33] 0 %

F5 : F10:

After entering data, press the <ENTER> key. - If data is updated and the maintenance mode is cleared by the function keys or the <EXIT> key without registering the data by the <ENTER> key, the data modification will be invalid.

- Now the procedures for kerf check data setup is completed. - That's all the procedures for data setup of <example 1>. - If you press the <EXIT> key, the system returns to the DEVICE DATA 1 screen [screen 4.2].

D-145

2-2-2. Cutting data setup example 2 --- AS/BS/AS UP/BS ZKEEP cutting mode --Summary of this section This section describes the data setup example and setting procedures for cutting in which the cut sequence includes multiple indexing and multi-level cutting and the DEVICE DATA 2 and DEVICE DATA 3 screen should be used for setting. Section No. Title 2-2-2-1 Description of cutting data <example 2> Contents - Illustration showing the result when cutting is performed based on the example 2 - Cutting conditions - Auto-setup conditions - Precutting conditions - Kerf check conditions - Data setting procedure for the example 2

2-2-2-2

Procedures for data setup <example 2>

D-146

2-2-2-1. Description of cutting data <example 2>


Illustrated description of cutting data <example 2>

CH2

2.0mm 1.0mm 2.0mm 1.0mm 3.0 4.0 3.0 4.0 mm mm mm mm

CH1

[CH1 (feed speed: 100 mm/s)]


Workpiece thickness 1.0mm 1st level cut depth 0.3mm 2nd level cut depth 0.3mm Tape thickness0.08mm

2nd level amount left uncut = (Workpiece thickness + tape thickness) - (1st level cut depth + 2nd level cut depth) = (1.0 + 0.08) - (0.3 + 0.3) = 0.48mm 1st level amount left uncut = (Workpiece thickness + tape thickness) - 1st level cut depth = (1.0 + 0.08) - 0.3 = 0.78mm

[CH2 (feed speed: 50 mm/s)]


Workpiece thickness 1.0mm 1st level cut depth 0.1mm 2nd level cut depth 0.2mm

Tape thickness 0.08mm 2nd level amount left uncut = (Workpiece thickness + tape thickness) - (1st level cut depth + 2nd level cut depth) = (1.0 + 0.08) - (0.1 + 0.2) = 0.78mm 1st level amount left uncut = (Workpiece thickness + tape thickness) - 1st level cut depth = (1.0 + 0.08) - 0.1 = 0.98mm

D-147

Cutting conditions for <example 2> Item Device No. * ID name * Workpiece diameter Workpiece thickness Tape thickness Cut depth * Conditions

87654321 DATA-2 152.4 mm 1.0 mm 0.08 mm CH1 1st level: 0.3 mm 2nd level: 0.3 mm CH2 1st level: 0.1 mm 2nd level: 0.2 mm Amount left uncut * CH1 1st level: 0.78 mm 2nd level: 0.48 mm (blade height) CH2 1st level: 0.98 mm 2nd level: 0.78 mm Cutting shape Round cutting (ROUND) Cutting mode * AS cutting mode (multi-level cutting/multiple indexing) Spindle rotating speed 30,000 rpm Cutting speed * CH1 100 mm/s CH2 * 50 mm/s Cutting direction CH1 Index cutting from front to rear. CH2 * Index cutting from rear to front. Blade wear compensation Wear compensation distance: Every 10 m (auto-down) Wear compensation: 0.002 mm Precut data No. No.1 *: Indicates the data differing from the <example 1> or those newly set in the <example 2>. Auto-setup conditions for <example 2> Item Auto-setup Auto-setup timing Conditions Auto-setup operation is performed even while one workpiece is being cut. Auto-setup operation is performed every 1000 lines.

D-148

Precutting conditions for <example 2> The descriptions of precutting conditions (precut data No. 1) for <example 2> are as follows: - Old blade start data SEQ : 5 - New blade start data SEQ: 1 - Step number to which a return is made from the old blade start data SEQ at the time of resuming precutting: 1 SEQ 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 30 Feed speed (mm/s) 10 20 30 40 50 60 70 80 90 100 110 120 130 140 150 0 0 Lines 20 10 10 20 20 30 30 40 40 50 50 50 50 50 50 0 0

D-149

Kerf check conditions for <example 2> [optional accessory] Item Check cycle Workpiece check First check line Subsequent check lines Check mode Recognition range Check target Kerf check sensitivity Kerf recognition lower limit (kerf point) Allowable Automatic value correction Alarm call Conditions No setting Every 1 piece The 10th line of each channel Every 5 line of each channel Check the center of both the kerf lines and hairlines. The whole of one screen is monitored. Kerf center Sensitivity = 2 50%

When the off-center value is 0.002 mm or more. When a kerf point is 50% or lower. If the off-center value is 0.01 mm or more. If the kerf width is recognized to be 0.046 mm or more or 0.009 mm or less. If the total width of the kerf width and side chipping are recognized to be 0.068 mm or more. If the width from the kerf center to the maximum chipping is recognized to be 0.036 mm or more. Precut execution When the chipping is 0.011 mm or more. conditions When the chipping occurrence area on the check screen is 7000 pixels or more. Check retry times 3 times Air blow time 5s

D-150

2-2-2-2. Procedures for data setup <example 2>


Operation flow <example 2> The outline of procedures for data setup <example 2> are as indicated below. Data setup procedures can be summarized as follows: Copying reference device data

Device data 1 setup

Device data 2 setup

Precut data setup

Kerf check data setup [optional accessory]

D-151

Procedures for copying reference device data <example 2> The device data used for the <example 2> is same as the one used in the "Procedures for copying reference device data <example 1>" in the section 22-1-2 of this chapter, with only difference of device No. being replaced with 87654321.
Step No.

2 3

4 5

6 7

Do This Press the <DEVICE DATA > key on the operation panel or press the <F4> key with the MAIN MENU screen [screen 0.0] displayed. - The DEVICE DATA LIST screen [screen 4.0] then appears. - Note that the input of "data password" is required for the call up of this screen. Reverse the line of device No. (No. 12345678 in this example) by using the arrow key. Press the <F2> key. - The window to input the number is open. - Note that the input of "data password" is required for the call up of this screen. Enter the new device No. 87654321. Press the <ENTER> key. - The No. 12345678 device data is copied to the new device No. 87654321 position. - The screen shows device No. 87654321 that has just been added using the copy function. Reverse the line of device No. (No. 87654321 in this example) by using the arrow key. After checking the device No., press the <ENTER> key. - The DEVICE DATA 1 screen [screen 4.2] then appears. - Note that the input of "data password" is required for the call up of DEVICE DATA 1 screen [screen 4.2]. - Now the procedures for copying the reference data is completed. - The next step is the device data 1 setup.

D-152

Procedures for device data 1 setup <example 2>


Step No.

1 2

Do This Make sure that the DEVICE DATA 1 screen [screen 4.2] is displayed. For cutting conditions <example 2> data setup, change the data shaded by from the "Procedures for data setup <example 1>" described in the section 2-2-1-2 of this chapter, as shown below. - See the section 1-4-2-1 of this chapter, "DEVICE DATA 1 screen [screen 4.2]". - Data entry for <<AUTO SETUP DATA>> can be made only when the noncontact setup optional accessory is incorporated.
DAD321 YY-MM-DD [ ] 4.2 DEVICE DATA1 DIRECTRY DEVICE DATA No. UNIT CUT MODE CUT SHAPE SPINDLE REV. [1] [2]87654321

ID [3]DATA-2

[4] MM [5] AS RND WORK SIZE [8] 152.400 mm [6] ROUND SQR WORK SIZE CH1 [9] 0.000 mm [7] 30000 rpm CH2 [10] 0.000 mm

FEED SPEED [14] 100.0 mm/s Y INDEX CH1 [15] 3.000 mm CH2 [16] 1.000 mm CUT LENGTH [17]10.000 m Z-ADJUST [18] 0.002 mm PRECUT DATA No. [19] 1 Z-AXIS DOWN SPEED [20]10.000 mm/s -ADJUST SWING CH1[21] 70 % << AUTO SETUP DATA >> CH2 [22] 70 % AUTO SETUP FOR CUTTING : [23] YES CREATION DISTANCE : [24] 0.000 m EVERY : [25]1000 LINES F1:SELECT F2: F3:DATA2 F4:DATA3 F5: F6: F7:KERF CHECKF8:MEASURE F9:PRECUT F10:

WORK THICKNESS [11]1.000 mm TAPE THICKNESS [12]0.080 mm BLADE HEIGHT [13]0.780 mm BLADE WEAR ADJUSTMENT

After entering data, press the <ENTER> key. - Since the cutting conditions of <example 2> include a multi-level cutting, it is necessary to setup DEVICE DATA 2 screen [screen 4.3]. - If data is updated and the maintenance mode is cleared by the function keys or the <EXIT> key without registering the data by the <ENTER> key, the data modification will be invalid. - Pressing the <EXIT> key returns the system to the DEVICE DATA LIST screen [screen 4.0]. - Now the procedures for setting the device data 1 is completed. - The next step is the device data 2 setup.

D-153

Procedures for device data 2 setup <example 2> In the procedures below, data for multi-level cutting are specified.
Step No.

Do This With a device data related screen ([screen 4.2] through [screen 4.10]) displayed, press the <F3> key. - The DEVICE DATA 2 screen [screen 4.3] will appear. - This screen is for CH1/CH2 setup operations. For CH3/CH4 data setup, call up the DEVICE DATA 3 screen [screen 4.4] by pressing the <F4> key. - This screen is used to set, edit or confirm data for multiple indexing, multi-level cutting, cutting with a rotation angle other than 90 employed and other operations. Enter data to the appropriate columns. - See the section 1-4-2-2 of this chapter, "DEVICE DATA 2 screen [screen 4.3]".
D I S C O D I C E R S E R I E S < DAD321 >YY-MM-DD [ ] 4.3 < DEVICE DATA2 > CUTTING CH. SEQ.: 21 CHANNEL BLADE HEIGHT FEED SPEED Y INDEX TIMES JUMP CH1-( SWING : 70 % / STROKE : 0 mm )----------------------------CUT DIR 1. 0.780 mm 100.0 mm/s 0.000 mm 0 0 REAR 2. 0.480 mm 100.0 mm/s 1.000 mm 0 0 AXIS 3. 0.780 mm 100.0 mm/s 0.000 mm 0 0 0.000 4. 0.480 mm 100.0 mm/s 2.000 mm 0 0 CUT LINE 5. 0.000 mm 0.0 mm/s 0.000 mm 0 0 0 line 6. 0.000 mm 0.0 mm/s 0.000 mm 0 0 OFFSET NON-CUT AREA F 0.0 mm BLADE WEAR 0.0m 0.000 mm R 0.0 mm ADJUSTMENT 0.0 mm CH2-( SWING : 70 % / STROKE : 0 mm )---------------------------CUT DIR 1. 0.980 mm 50.0 mm/s 0.000 mm 0 0 FRONT 2. 0.780 mm 50.0 mm/s 3.000 mm 0 0 AXIS 3. 0.980 mm 50.0 mm/s 0.000 mm 0 0 90.000 4. 0.780 mm 50.0 mm/s 4.000 mm 0 0 CUT LINE 5. 0.000 mm 0.0 mm/s 0.000 mm 0 0 0 line 6. 0.000 mm 0.0 mm/s 0.000 mm 0 0 OFFSET NON-CUT AREA F 0.0 mm BLADE WEAR 0.0 m 0.000 mm R 0.0 mm ADJUSTMENT 0.0 mm F1:SELECT F2:DATA1 F3: F4:DATA3 F5 : F6: F7:KERF CHECK F8:MEASURE F9:PRECUT F10:

After entering data, press the <ENTER> key. - If data is updated and the maintenance mode is cleared by the function keys or the <EXIT> key without registering the data by the <ENTER> key, the data modification will be invalid. - Pressing the <EXIT> key returns the system to the DEVICE DATA 1 screen [screen 4.2]. - Now the procedures for setting the device data 2 is completed. - The next step is the precut data setup.

D-154

Procedures for precut data setup <example 2> For the procedures for precut data setup, see the section 4-2 of this chapter, "Precut data maintenance". Procedures for kerf check data setup <example 2> [optional accessory] For the procedures for kerf check data setup, see "Procedures for kerf check data setup <example 1>" of the section 2-2-1 of this chapter, "Cutting data setup <example 1>". - Now all the procedures for setting data <example 2> are completed. - If you press the <EXIT> key, the system returns to the DEVICE DATA 1 screen [screen 4.2].

D-155

2-2-3. Cutting data setup example 3 --- AS cutting mode/multiple indexing/ rectangular cutting --Summary of this section This section describes the data setup example and setting procedures for cutting in which the cutting shape is rectangle, the cutting mode is AS and the cut sequence includes multiple indexing. Section No. Title 2-2-3-1 Description of cutting data <example 3> Contents - Illustration showing the result when cutting is performed based on the example 3 - Cutting conditions - Auto-setup conditions - Precutting conditions - Kerf check conditions - Data setting procedure for the example 3

2-2-3-2

Procedures for data setup <example 3>

D-156

2-2-3-1. Description of cutting data <example 3>


Illustrated description of cutting data <example 3>

CH2

5.0 mm 10.0 mm 1.0mm CH1

[CH1 (feed speed: 100 mm/s)]


Cut depth 0.7mm

Workpiece thickness 1.0mm

Amount left uncut = Workpiece thickness - cut depth = 1.0 - 0.7 = 0.3mm

[CH2 (feed speed: 50 mm/s)]


Cut depth 0.4mm Workpiece thickness 1.0mm

Amount left uncut = Workpiece thickness - cut depth = 1.0 - 0.4 = 0.6mm

D-157

Cutting conditions for <example 3> Item Device No. ID name Workpiece size Conditions

55555555 DATA-3 100.0 80.0 mm Workpiece thickness 1.0 mm Tape thickness 0.000 mm Cut depth CH1 0.7 mm CH2 0.4 mm Amount left uncut CH1 0.3 mm (blade height) CH2 0.6 mm Cutting shape Rectangular cutting (SQUARE) Cutting mode AS cutting mode Spindle rotating speed 30,000 rpm Cutting speed CH1 100 mm/s CH2 50 mm/s Cutting direction CH1 Index cutting from front to rear. (standard) CH2 Index cutting from front to rear. (standard) Blade wear compensation Not used. (auto-down) Precut data No. No.1 Auto-setup conditions for <example 3> Item Auto-setup Auto-setup timing Conditions Auto-setup operation is performed even while one workpiece is being cut. Auto-setup operation is performed every 1000 lines.

D-158

Precutting conditions for <example 3> The descriptions of precutting conditions (precut data No.1) for <example 3> are as follows: - Old blade start data SEQ : 5 - New blade start data SEQ: 1 - Step number to which a return is made from the old blade start data SEQ at the time of resuming precutting: 1 SEQ 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 30 Feed speed (mm/s) 10 20 30 40 50 60 70 80 90 100 110 120 130 140 150 0 0 Lines 20 10 10 20 20 30 30 40 40 50 50 50 50 50 50 0 0

D-159

Kerf check conditions for <example 3> [optional accessory] Item Check cycle Workpiece check First check line Subsequent check lines Check mode Recognition range Check target Kerf check sensitivity Kerf recognition lower limit (kerf point) Allowable Automatic value correction Alarm call Conditions No setting Every 1 piece The 10th line of each channel Every 5 line of each channel Check the center of both the kerf lines and hairlines. The whole of one screen is monitored. Kerf center Sensitivity = 2 50%

When the off-center value is 0.002 mm or more. When a kerf point is 50% or lower. If the off-center value is 0.01 mm or more. If the kerf width is recognized to be 0.046 mm or more or 0.009 mm or less. If the total width of the kerf width and side chipping are recognized to be 0.068 mm or more. If the width from the kerf center to the maximum chipping is recognized to be 0.036 mm or more. Precut execution When the chipping is 0.011 mm or more. conditions When the chipping occurrence area on the check screen is 7000 pixels or more. Check retry times 3 times Air blow time 5s

D-160

2-2-3-2. Procedures for data setup <example 3>


Operation flow <example 3> The outline of procedures for data setup <example 3> are as indicated below. Data setup procedures can be summarized as follows: Copying reference device data

Device data 1 setup

Device data 2 setup

Precut data setup

Kerf check data setup [optional accessory]

D-161

Procedures for copying reference device data <example 3> The device data used for the <example 3> is same as the one used in the "Procedures for copying reference device data <example 2>" in the section 22-2-2 of this chapter, with only difference of device No. being replaced with 55555555.
Step No.

2 3

4 5

6 7

Do This Press the <DEVICE DATA > key on the operation panel or press the <F4> key with the MAIN MENU screen [screen 0.0] displayed. - The DEVICE DATA LIST screen [screen 4.0] then appears. - Note that the input of "data password" is required for the call up of this screen. Reverse the line of device No. (No. 87654321 in this example) by using the arrow key. Press the <F2> key. - The window to input the number is open. - Note that the input of "data password" is required for the call up of this screen. Enter the new device No. 55555555. Press the <ENTER> key. - The No. 87654321 device data is copied to the new device No. 55555555 position. - The screen shows device No. 55555555 that has just been added using the copy function. Reverse the line of device No. (No. 55555555 in this example) by using the arrow key. After checking the device No., press the <ENTER> key. - The DEVICE DATA 1 screen [screen 4.2] then appears. - Note that the input of "data password" is required for the call up of DEVICE DATA 1 screen [screen 4.2]. - Now the procedures for copying the reference data is completed. - The next step is the device data 1 setup.

D-162

Procedures for device data 1 setup <example 3>


Step No.

1 2

Do This Make sure that the DEVICE DATA 1 screen [screen 4.2] is displayed. For cutting conditions <example 3> data setup, change the data shaded by from the "Procedures for data setup <example 2>" described in the section 2-2-2-2 of this chapter, as shown below. - See the section 1-4-2-1 of this chapter, "DEVICE DATA 1 screen [screen 4.2]". - Data entry for <<AUTO SETUP DATA>> can be made only when the noncontact setup optional accessory is incorporated.
DAD321 YY-MM-DD [ ] 4.2 DEVICE DATA1 DIRECTRY [1] DEVICE DATA No. [2]55555555 UNIT CUT MODE CUT SHAPE SPINDLE REV. [4] MM [5] AS [6] SQUARE [7] 30000 rpm

ID [3]DATA-3

RND WORK SIZE [8] 0.000 SQR WORK SIZECH1 [9]100.000 CH2 [10] 80.000

mm mm mm

WORK THICKNESS [11]1.000 mm FEED SPEED [14] 100.0 mm/s TAPE THICKNESS [12]0.000 mm Y INDEX CH1 [15] 5.000 mm BLADE HEIGHT [13]0.300 mm CH2 [16] 16.000 mm BLADE WEAR ADJUSTMENT CUT LENGTH [17] 0.000 m Z-ADJUST [18] 0.000 mm PRECUT DATA No. [19] 1 Z-AXIS DOWN SPEED [20] 0.000 mm/s -ADJUST SWING CH1 [21] 70 % << AUTO SETUP DATA >> CH2 [22] 70 % AUTO SETUP FOR CUTTING :[23] YES CREATION DISTANCE : [24] 0.000 m EVERY :[25]1000 LINES F1:SELECT F2: F3:DATA2 F4:DATA3 F5: F6: F7:KERF CHECKF8:MEASURE F9:PRECUT F10:

After entering data, press the <ENTER> key. - Since the cutting conditions of <example 3> include multiple indexing, it is necessary to setup DEVICE DATA 2 screen [screen 4.3]. - If data is updated and the maintenance mode is cleared by the function keys or the <EXIT> key without registering the data by the <ENTER> key, the data modification will be invalid. - Pressing the <EXIT> key returns the system to the DEVICE DATA LIST screen [screen 4.0]. - Now the procedures for setting the device data 1 is completed. - The next step is the device data 2 setup.

D-163

Procedures for device data 2 setup <example 3> In the procedures below, data for multi-level cutting are specified.
Step No.

Do This With a device data related screen ([screen 4.2] through [screen 4.10]) displayed, press the <F3> key. - The DEVICE DATA 2 screen [screen 4.3] will appear. - This screen is for CH1/CH2 setup operations. For CH3/CH4 data setup, call up the DEVICE DATA 3 screen [screen 4.4] by pressing the <F4> key. - This screen is used to set, edit or confirm data for multiple indexing, multi-level cutting, cutting with a rotation angle other than 90 employed and other operations. Enter data to the appropriate columns. - See the section 1-4-2-2 of this chapter, "DEVICE DATA 2 screen [screen 4.3]".
D I S C O D I C E R S E R I E S < DAD321 >YY-MM-DD [ ] 4.3 < DEVICE DATA2 > CUTTING CH. SEQ.: 21 CHANNEL BLADE HEIGHT FEED SPEED Y INDEX TIMES JUMP CH1-( SWING : 70% / STROKE : 0 mm )----------------------------CUT DIR 1. 0.300 mm 100.0 mm/s 5.000 mm 0 0 REAR 2. 0.000 mm 0.0 mm/s 0.000 mm 0 0 AXIS 3. 0.000 mm 0.0 mm/s 0.000 mm 0 0 0.000 4. 0.000 mm 0.0 mm/s 0.000 mm 0 0 CUT LINE 5. 0.000 mm 0.0 mm/s 0.000 mm 0 0 0 line 6. 0.000 mm 0.0 mm/s 0.000 mm 0 0 OFFSET NON-CUT AREA F 0.0 mm BLADE WEAR 0.0 m 0.000 mm R 0.0 mm ADJUSTMENT 0.0 mm CH2-( SWING : 70% / STROKE : 0 mm )---------------------------CUT DIR 1. 0.600 mm 50.0 mm/s 10.00 mm 0 0 FRONT 2. 0.600 mm 50.0 mm/s 1.000 mm 6 0 AXIS 3. 0.000 mm 0.0 mm/s 0.000 mm 0 0 90.000 4. 0.000 mm 0.0 mm/s 0.000 mm 0 0 CUT LINE 5. 0.000 mm 0.0 mm/s 0.000 mm 0 0 0 line 6. 0.000 mm 0.0 mm/s 0.000 mm 0 0 OFFSET NON-CUT AREA F 0.0 mm BLADE WEAR 0.0 m 0.000 mm R 0.0 mm ADJUSTMENT 0.0 mm F1:SELECT F2:DATA1 F3: F4:DATA3 F5 : F6: F7:KERF CHECK F8:MEASURE F9:PRECUT F10:

After entering data, press the <ENTER> key. - If data is updated and the maintenance mode is cleared by the function keys or the <EXIT> key without registering the data by the <ENTER> key, the data modification will be invalid. - Pressing the <EXIT> key returns the system to the DEVICE DATA 1 screen [screen 4.2]. - Now the procedures for setting the device data 2 is completed. - The next step is the precut data setup.

D-164

Procedures for precut data setup <example 3> For the procedures for precut data setup, see the section 4-2 of this chapter, "Precut data maintenance". Procedures for kerf check data setup <example 3> [optional accessory] For the procedures for kerf check data setup, see "Procedures for kerf check data setup <example 1>" of the section 2-2-1 of this chapter, "Cutting data setup <example 1>". - Now all the procedures for setting data <example 3> are completed. - If you press the <EXIT> key, the system returns to the DEVICE DATA 1 screen [screen 4.2].

D-165

2-2-4. Cutting data setup example 4 --- AS cutting mode/multi-channel/ hexagonal-shaped chip --Summary of this section This section describes the data setup and setting procedures for cutting in which AS cutting mode and multiple channels are used and chips are cut in hexagonal shape. Section No. Title 2-2-4-1 Description of cutting data <example 4> Contents - Illustration showing the result when cutting is performed based on the example 4 - Cutting conditions - Auto-setup conditions - Precutting conditions - Kerf check conditions Procedures for data setup - Data setting procedure for the <example 4> example 4

2-2-4-2

D-166

2-2-4-1. Description of cutting data <example 4>


Illustrated description of cutting data <example 4>

CH2

CH3

5mm 5mm

CH1

5mm

Workpiece front

Cut depth 0.6mm

Workpiece thickness 1.0mm

Tape thickness 0.08mm Amount left uncut = (Workpiece thickness + tape thickness) - Cut depth = (1.0 + 0.08) - 0.6 = 0.48mm

D-167

Cutting conditions for <example 4> Item Device No. ID name Workpiece diameter Workpiece thickness Tape thickness Cut depth Amount left uncut (blade height) Cutting shape Cutting mode Index Spindle rotating speed Cutting speed Cutting direction Conditions 66666666 DATA-4 152.4 mm 1.0 mm 0.08 mm 0.6 mm (Workpiece thickness + tape thickness) cut depth = 0.48 mm Round cutting (ROUND) AS cutting mode 5.000 mm 30,000 rpm 50 mm/s (CH1 CH3)

CH3 CH2 CH1 (front to rear indexing and cutting: standard) Blade wear compensation Not used. (auto-down) Precut data No. No. 1 Auto-setup conditions for <example 4> Item Auto-setup Auto-setup timing Conditions Auto-setup operation is performed even while one wafer is being cut. Auto-setup operation is performed every 1000 lines.

D-168

Precutting conditions for <example 4> The descriptions of precutting conditions (precut data No. 1) for <example 4> are as follows: - Old blade start data SEQ : 5 - New blade start data SEQ: 1 - Step number to which a return is made from the old blade start data SEQ at the time of resuming precutting: 1 SEQ 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 30 Feed speed (mm/s) 10 20 30 40 50 60 70 80 90 100 110 120 130 140 150 0 0 Lines 20 10 10 20 20 30 30 40 40 50 50 50 50 50 50 0 0

D-169

Kerf check conditions for <example 4> [optional accessory] Item Check cycle Workpiece check First check line Subsequent check lines Check mode Recognition range Check target Kerf check sensitivity Kerf recognition lower limit (kerf point) Allowable Automatic value correction Alarm call Conditions No setting Every 1 piece The 10th line of each channel Every 5 line of each channel Check the center of both the kerf lines and hairlines. The whole of one screen is monitored. Kerf center Sensitivity = 2 50%

When the off-center value is 0.002 mm or more. When a kerf point is 50% or lower. If the off-center value is 0.01 mm or more. If the kerf width is recognized to be 0.046 mm or more or 0.009 mm or less. If the total width of the kerf width and side chipping are recognized to be 0.068 mm or more. If the width from the kerf center to the maximum chipping is recognized to be 0.036 mm or more. Precut execution When the chipping is 0.011 mm or more. conditions When the chipping occurrence area on the check screen is 7000 pixels or more. Check retry times 3 times Air blow time 5s

D-170

2-2-4-2. Procedures for data setup <example 4>


Operation flow <example 4> The outline of procedures for data setup <example 4> are as indicated below. Data setup procedures can be summarized as follows: Copying reference device data

Device data 1 setup

Device data 2 setup

Device data 3 setup

Precut data setup

Kerf check data setup [optional accessory]

D-171

Procedures for copying reference device data <example 4> The device data used for the <example 4> is same as the one used in the "Procedures for copying reference device data <example 1>" in the section 22-1-2 of this chapter, with only difference of device No. being replaced with 66666666.
Step No.

2 3

4 5

6 7

Do This Press the <DEVICE DATA > key on the operation panel or press the <F4> key with the MAIN MENU screen [screen 0.0] displayed. - The DEVICE DATA LIST screen [screen 4.0] then appears. - Note that the input of "data password" is required for the call up of this screen. Reverse the line of device No. (No. 12345678 in this example) by using the arrow key. Press the <F2> key. - The window to input the number is open. - Note that the input of "data password" is required for the call up of this screen. Enter the new device No. 66666666. Press the <ENTER> key. - The No. 12345678 device data is copied to the new device No. 66666666 position. - The screen shows device No. 66666666 that has just been added using the copy function. Reverse the line of device No. (No. 66666666 in this example) by using the arrow key. After checking the device No., press the <ENTER> key. - The DEVICE DATA 1 screen [screen 4.2] then appears. - Note that the input of "data password" is required for the call up of DEVICE DATA 1 screen [screen 4.2]. - Now the procedures for copying the reference data is completed. - The next step is the device data 1 setup.

D-172

Procedures for device data 1 setup <example 4>


Step No.

1 2

Do This Make sure that the DEVICE DATA 1 screen [screen 4.2] is displayed. For cutting conditions <example 4> data setup, change the data shaded by from the "cutting conditions for <example 1>" described in the section 2-2-1-1 of this chapter, as shown below. - For the details of the DEVICE DATA 1 screen [screen 4.2], see the section 1-4-2-1 of this chapter, "DEVICE DATA 1 screen [screen 4.2]". - Data entry for <<AUTO SETUP DATA>> can be made only when the noncontact setup feature [optional accessory] is incorporated.
DAD321 YY-MM-DD [ ] 4.2 DEVICE DATA1 DIRECTRY [1] DEVICE DATA No. [2]66666666 UNIT CUT MODE CUT SHAPE SPINDLE REV. [4] MM [5] AS [6] ROUND [7] 30000 rpm

ID [3]DATA-4

RND WORK SIZE [8] 152.400 mm SQR WORK SIZE CH1 [9] 0.000 mm CH2 [10] 0.000 mm

WORK THICKNESS [11]1.000 mm FEED SPEED [14] 50.0 mm/s TAPE THICKNESS [12]0.080 mm Y INDEX CH1 [15] 5.000 mm BLADE HEIGHT [13]0.480 mm CH2 [16] 5.000 mm BLADE WEAR ADJUSTMENT CUT LENGTH [17] 0.000 m Z-ADJUST [18] 0.000 mm PRECUT DATA No. [19] 1 Z-AXIS DOWN SPEED [20] 0.000 mm/s -ADJUST SWING CH1 [21] 70 % << AUTO SETUP DATA >> CH2 [22] 70 % AUTO SETUP FOR CUTTING : [23] YES CREATION DISTANCE : [24] 0.000 m EVERY :[25] 1000 LINES F1:SELECT F2: F3:DATA2 F4:DATA3 F5: F6: F7:KERF CHECK F8:MEASURE F9:PRECUT F10:

After entering data, press the <ENTER> key. - Since cutting conditions <example 4> dictate multi-channel operations, it is necessary to setup DEVICE DATA 2 screen [screen 4.3] and DEVICE DATA 3 screen [screen 4.4]. - If data is updated and the maintenance mode is cleared by the function keys or the <EXIT> key without registering the data by the <ENTER> key, the data modification will be invalid. - Pressing the <EXIT> key returns the system to the DEVICE DATA LIST screen [screen 4.0]. - Now the procedures for setting the device data 1 is completed. - The next step is the device data 2 setup.

D-173

Procedures for device data 2 setup <example 4> In the procedures below, data for multi-channel (hexagonal cutting) are specified. - Ensure to perform the rotation shift adjustment. - Set "NO" for "Alignment" in the AUTO CUTTING screen [screen 1.0]. (See the section 1-2-1 of this chapter, "Auto cutting related screens".)
Step No.

Do This With a device data related screen ([screen 4.2] through [screen 4.10]) displayed, press the <F3> key. - The DEVICE DATA 2 screen [screen 4.3] will appear. - This screen is for CH1/CH2 setup operations. For CH3/CH4 data setup, call up the DEVICE DATA 3 screen [screen 4.4] by pressing the <F4> key. Enter data to the appropriate columns. - See the section 1-4-2-2 of this chapter, "DEVICE DATA 2 screen [screen 4.3]".
D I S C O D I C E R S E R I E S < DAD321 >YY-MM-DD [ ] 4.3 < DEVICE DATA2 > CUTTING CH. SEQ.: 321 CHANNEL BLADE HEIGHT FEED SPEED Y INDEX TIMES JUMP CH1-( SWING : 70% / STROKE : 0 mm )----------------------------CUT DIR 1. 0.480 mm 50.0 mm/s 5.000 mm 0 0 REAR 2. 0.000 mm 0.0 mm/s 0.000 mm 0 0 AXIS 3. 0.000 mm 0.0 mm/s 0.000 mm 0 0 0.000 4. 0.000 mm 0.0 mm/s 0.000 mm 0 0 CUT LINE 5. 0.000 mm 0.0 mm/s 0.000 mm 0 0 0 line 6. 0.000 mm 0.0 mm/s 0.000 mm 0 0 OFFSET NON-CUT AREA F 0.0 mm BLADE WEAR 0.0 m 0.000 mm R 0.0 mm ADJUSTMENT 0.0 mm CH2-( SWING : 70% / STROKE : 0 mm )---------------------------CUT DIR 1. 0.480 mm 50.0 mm/s 5.000 mm 0 0 REAR 2. 0.000 mm 0.0 mm/s 0.000 mm 0 0 AXIS 3. 0.000 mm 0.0 mm/s 0.000 mm 0 0 60.000 4. 0.000 mm 0.0 mm/s 0.000 mm 0 0 CUT LINE 5. 0.000 mm 0.0 mm/s 0.000 mm 0 0 0 line 6. 0.000 mm 0.0 mm/s 0.000 mm 0 0 OFFSET NON-CUT AREA F 0.0 mm BLADE WEAR 0.0 m 0.000 mm R 0.0 mm ADJUSTMENT 0.0 mm F1:SELECT F2:DATA1 F3: F4:DATA3 F5 : F6: F7:KERF CHECK F8:MEASURE F9:PRECUT F10:

After entering data, press the <ENTER> key. - If data is updated and the maintenance mode is cleared by the function keys or the <EXIT> key without registering the data by the <ENTER> key, the data modification will be invalid. - Pressing the <EXIT> key returns the system to the DEVICE DATA 1 screen [screen 4.2]. - Now the procedures for setting the device data 2 is completed. - The next step is the device data 3 setup.

D-174

Procedures for device data 3 setup <example 4>


Step No.

Do This From the DEVICE DATA 2 screen [screen 4.3], press the <F4> key. - The DEVICE DATA 3 screen [screen 4.4] then appears. Enter data to the appropriate columns. - See the section 1-4-2-3 of this chapter, "DEVICE DATA 3 screen [screen 4.4]".
D I S C O D I C E R S E R I E S < DAD321 >YY-MM-DD [ ] 4.4 < DEVICE DATA3 > CHANNEL BLADE HEIGHT FEED SPEED Y INDEX TIMES JUMP CH3-( SWING : 70% / STROKE : 0 mm )------------------------------CUT DIR 1. 0.480 mm 50.0 mm/s 5.000 mm 0 0 REAR 2. 0.000 mm 0.0 mm/s 0.000 mm 0 0 AXIS 3. 0.000 mm 0.0 mm/s 0.000 mm 0 0 120.0 4. 0.000 mm 0.0 mm/s 0.000 mm 0 0 CUT LINE 5. 0.000 mm 0.0 mm/s 0.000 mm 0 0 0 line 6. 0.000 mm 0.0 mm/s 0.000 mm 0 0 OFFSET NON-CUT AREA F 0.0 mm BLADE WEAR 0.0 m 2.500 mm R 0.0 mm ADJUSTMENT 0.0 mm CH4-( SWING : 70% / STROKE : 0 mm )------------------------------CUT DIR 1. 0.000 mm 0.0 mm/s 0.000 mm 0 0 REAR 2. 0.000 mm 0.0 mm/s 0.000 mm 0 0 AXIS 3. 0.000 mm 0.0 mm/s 0.000 mm 0 0 0.000 4. 0.000 mm 0.0 mm/s 0.000 mm 0 0 CUT LINE 5. 0.000 mm 0.0 mm/s 0.000 mm 0 0 0 line 6. 0.000 mm 0.0 mm/s 0.000 mm 0 0 OFFSET NON-CUT AREA F 0.0 mm BLADE WEAR 0.0 m 0.000 mm R 0.0 mm ADJUSTMENT 0.0 mm F1:SELECT F2:DATA1 F3:DATA2 F4: F5 : F6: F7:KERF CHECK F8:MEASURE F9:PRECUT F10:

After entering data, press the <ENTER> key. - If data is updated and the maintenance mode is cleared by the function keys or the <EXIT> key without registering the data by the <ENTER> key, the data modification will be invalid. - Pressing the <EXIT> key returns the system to the DEVICE DATA 1 screen [screen 4.2]. - Now the procedures for setting the device data 3 is completed. - The next step is the precut data setup.

D-175

Procedures for precut data setup <example 4> For the procedures for precut data setup, see the section 4-2 of this chapter, "Precut data maintenance". Procedures for kerf check data setup <example 4> [optional accessory] For the procedures for kerf check data setup, see "Procedures for kerf check data setup <example 1>" of the section 2-2-1 of this chapter, "Cutting data setup <example 1>". - Now all the procedures for setting data <example 4> are completed. - If you press the <EXIT> key, the system returns to the DEVICE DATA 1 screen [screen 4.2].

D-176

2-2-5. Device data registration


Procedures for checking the device data registration After entering the example 1 through 4, check the device data registration following the procedures below.
Step No.

Do This Press the <F4> key with the MAIN MENU screen [screen 0.0] displayed. - The DEVICE DATA LIST screen [screen 4.0] then appears.

[DEVICE DATA LIST screen after entering example data]


D I S C O D I C E R S E R I E S < DAD321 >YY-MM-DD [ ] 4.0 < DEVICE DATA LIST > +----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------+ | DIRECTORY | DEVICE No. DEVICE ID. | +------------------+--------------------------------------------------------------------------+ | | 000 DISCO | | | 12345678 DATA-1 | | | 87654321 DATA-2 | | | 55555555 DATA-3 | | | 66666666 DATA-4 | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | +--------------------------------------------------------------------------+ | | DEVICE No. 66666666 DATA: 5 TOTAL: 5 | | | DEVICE ID DATA-4 | +----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------+ Device data can be called up with the ENTER key. F1:PREVIOUS F2:COPY F3: F4:RENAME F5 :DELETE F6:NEXT F7:MOVE CUR F8: F9: F10:REGISTRATION

D-177

2-3. Cutting Data Setup Example --- DAC Mode --Summary of this section This section describes the setup examples and setting procedures of cutting data in DAC mode. - For the data setup procedure for the kerf check data [optional accessory], see the section 2-2 of this chapter, "Cutting Data Setup Example --- DAD Mode ---". - To initiate cutting in the DAC mode, it is necessary to change the machine mode to "DAC" beforehand. Machine mode switching is classified as an engineering maintenance task and therefore should be effected by qualified maintenance personnel. Section No. Title 2-3-1 Cutting data setup example 5
--- A cutting mode ---

2-3-2

Cutting data setup example 6


--- A cutting mode/ normal program/alternately using two different index and amount left uncut ---

2-3-3

Cutting data setup example 7


--- A cutting mode/ normal program/ multiple indexing/ multi-level cutting ---

2-3-4

Cutting data setup example 8


--- A cutting mode/ special program ---

Contents - Data setup example and setting procedure for cutting in A cutting mode with the single index - Data setup example and setting procedure for cutting in normal program and A cutting mode. Cutting is performed alternately using two different index and amount left cut - Data setup example and setting procedure for cutting in normal program and A cutting and with multiple indexing. The cutting is multi-level cutting using three types of amount left cut - Data setup example and setting procedure for cutting in special program and A cutting mode

D-178

2-3-1. Cutting data setup example 5 --- A cutting mode --Summary of this section This section describes the setup example and setting procedures of cutting data to perform cutting in A cutting mode with a single index. Section No. Title 2-3-1-1 Description of cutting data <example 5> Contents - Illustration showing the result when cutting is performed based on the example 5 - Cutting conditions - Auto-setup conditions - Precutting conditions Procedures for data setup - Data setting procedure for the <example 5> example 5

2-3-1-2

D-179

2-3-1-1. Description of cutting data <example 5>


Illustrated description of cutting data <example 5>

- Cut line counts: 6 lines


Alignment end position

Amount left uncut 0.5mm Indexing 1.0mm

Workpiece thickness 1.5mm

Cutting conditions for <example 5> Item Device No. ID name Workpiece width Workpiece depth Workpiece thickness Amount left uncut (blade height) Cutting mode Spindle rotating speed Cutting speed Blade wear compensation (auto-down) Precut data No. Auto-setup conditions for <example 5> The auto-setup operation will not be executed. Conditions 111 DATA-5 20 mm 10 mm 1.5 mm 0.5 mm A cutting mode 30,000 rpm 10 mm/s Not used No. 2

D-180

Precutting conditions for <example 5> The descriptions of precutting conditions (precut data No. 2) for <example 5> are as follows: - Old blade start data SEQ : 3 - New blade start data SEQ: 1 - Step number to which a return is made from the old blade start data SEQ at the time of resuming precutting: 1 SEQ 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 30 Feed speed (mm/s) 2 4 6 8 10 12 14 16 18 20 22 24 26 28 30 0 0 Lines 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 0 0

D-181

2-3-1-2. Procedures for data setup <example 5>


Operation flow <example 5> The outline of procedures for data setup <example 5> are as indicated below. The reference device No. 000 data is stored in machine memory. Many data can be shared between various device data. It is therefore recommended that the copy function be used for new device data setup. The flow shown below is the outline procedures for device data setup. Copying reference device data

Device data 1 setup

Device data 2 setup

Precut data setup

Kerf check data setup [optional accessory]

D-182

Procedures for copying reference device data <example 5>


Step No.

Do This Press the <DEVICE DATA > key on the operation panel or press the <F4> key with the MAIN MENU screen [screen 0.0] displayed. - The DEVICE DATA LIST screen [screen 4.0] then appears. - This screen performs device data listing, copying, deleting, renaming and call up in order to set, edit or confirm the cutting conditions. - Note that the input of "data password" is required for the call up of this screen.
D I S C O D I C E R S E R I E S < DAD321 >YY-MM-DD [ ] 4.0 < DEVICE DATA LIST > +------------------------+----------------------------------------------------------------+ | DIRECTORY | DEVICE No. DEVICE ID. | +------------------------+----------------------------------------------------------------+ | | 000 DISCO | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | +----------------------------------------------------------------+ | | DEVICE No. DATA: TOTAL: | | | DEVICE ID | +------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------+ Device data can be called up with the ENTER key.
F1:PREVIOUS F6:NEXT F2:COPY F7:MOVE CUR F3: F8: F4:RENAME F9: F5:DELETE F10:REGISTRATION

D-183

Procedures for copying reference device data <example 5> (Continued)


Step No.

Do This Copy the reference device No. 000 data to the new device No. 111 position. 1) Reverse the line of device No. (No. 000 in this example) by using the arrow key. 2) Press the <F2> key. - The window to input the number is open. - Note that the input of "data password" is required for the call up of this screen. 3) Enter the new device No. (111 in this example) in [7].
D I S C O D I C E R S E R I E S < DAD321 >YY-MM-DD [ ] 4.0 < DEVICE DATA LIST > +------------------------+-------------------------------------------------------------------+ | DIRECTORY | DEVICE No. DEVICE ID. | +------------------------+-------------------------------------------------------------------+ | | [1] 000 [2] DISCO | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | Input device No. | | | [7]111 | | | | | | | | | | | | | +-------------------------------------------------------------------+ | | DEVICE No. [3] DATA: [5] TOTAL: [6] | | | DEVICE ID [4] | +---------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------+ Device data can be called up with the ENTER key. F1:PREVIOUS F2:COPY F3: F4:RENAME F5:DELETE F6:NEXT F7:MOVE CUR F8: F9: F10:REGISTRATION

D-184

Procedures for copying reference device data <example 5> (Continued)


Step No.

Do

This

Press the <ENTER> key. - The reference device No. 000 data is copied to the new device No. 111 position. - The screen shows device No. 111 that has just been added using the copy function.
D I S C O D I C E R S E R I E S < DAD321 >YY-MM-DD [ ] 4.0 < DEVICE DATA LIST > +-----------------------+-----------------------------------------------------------------+ | DIRECTORY | DEVICE No. DEVICE ID. | +-----------------------+-----------------------------------------------------------------+ | | 000 DISCO | | | 111 DISCO | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | +----------------------------------------------------------------+ | | DEVICE No. 111 DATA: 2 TOTAL: 2 | | | DEVICE ID DISCO | +------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------+ Device data can be called up with the ENTER key. F1:PREVIOUS F2:COPY F3: F4:RENAME F5:DELETE F6:NEXT F7:MOVE CUR F8: F9: F10:REGISTRATION

4 5

Reverse the line of device No. (No. 111 in the example) by using the arrow key. After checking the device No., press the <ENTER> key. - The DEVICE DATA 1 screen [screen 4.2] then appears. - Note that the input of "data password" is required for the call up of DEVICE DATA 1 screen [screen 4.2]. - Now the procedures for copying the reference data is completed. - The next step is the device data setup.

D-185

Procedures for device data 1 setup <example 5>


Step No.

Do This On the DEVICE DATA 1 screen [screen 4.2], enter the data of "cutting conditions for <example 5>". - See the section 1-4-3-1 of this chapter, "DEVICE DATA 1 screen [screen 4.2]". - Data entry for <<AUTO SETUP DATA>> can be made only when the noncontact setup optional accessory is incorporated.
D I S C O D I C E R S E R I E S < DAC351 >YY-MM-DD [ ] 4.2 < DEVICE DATA1 > DIRECTRY [1] DEVICE DATA No. [2]111 UNIT SPINDLE REV. PROGRAM MODE CUT MODE HEIGHT MODE [4] MM [5]30000 rpm [6]NORMAL [7]A [8]HEIGHT

ID

[3]DATA-5

WIDTH(X) DEPTH(Y) THICKNESS OFSET Y Y

: : : :

[9] 20.000 [10]10.000 [11] 1.500 [12] 0.000

mm mm mm mm

ALIGNMENT POS. X :[13] 0.000 mm WORK CENTER POS. X :[15] 0.000 mm INDEX DIR. [17]REAR

:[14] 0.000 mm :[16] 0.000 mm

BLADE WEAR ADJ. : [19]0.000 m : [20]0.000 mm PRECUT PROCESS No. [18] 0 TOTAL CUT LINE :[21] 6 Lines << AUTO SETUP DATA >> -ADJUST STROKE :[22] 70 % AUTO SETUP FOR CUTTING : [23]YES CREATION DISTANCE : [24]0.000 mm EVERY : [25] 0 LINES F1:SELECT F2: F3:DATA2 F4:DATA3 F5 : F6:SIMULATION F7:KERF CHECK F8:MEASURE F9:PRECUT F10:

After entering data, press the <ENTER> key. - In the cutting data setup for <example 5>, it is necessary to use DEVICE DATA 2 screen [screen 4.3]. - If data is updated and the maintenance mode is cleared by the function keys or the <EXIT> key without registering the data by the <ENTER> key, the data modification will be invalid. - Pressing the <EXIT> key returns the system to the DEVICE DATA LIST screen [screen 4.0]. - Now the procedures for setting the device data 1 is completed. - The next step is the device data 2 setup.

D-186

Procedures for device data 2 setup <example 5>


Step No.

Do This With a device data related screen ([screen 4.2] through [screen 4.10]) displayed, press the <F3> key. - The DEVICE DATA 2 screen [screen 4.3] will appear. - This screen is used to specify the indexing amount, feed speed and amount left uncut. Enter data to the appropriate columns. - See the section 1-4-3-2 of this chapter, "DEVICE DATA 2 screen [screen 4.3] (normal program)".
D I S C O D I C E R S E R I E S < DAC351 >YY-MM-DD [ ] 4.3 < DEVICE DATA2 > HEIGHT SPEED INDEX REPEAT JUMP --------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------1. 0.500 mm 10.0 mm/s 1.000 mm 0 0 2. 0.000 mm 0.0 mm/s 0.000 mm 0 0 3. 0.000 mm 0.0 mm/s 0.000 mm 0 0 4. 0.000 mm 0.0 mm/s 0.000 mm 0 0 5. 0.000 mm 0.0 mm/s 0.000 mm 0 0 6. 0.000 mm 0.0 mm/s 0.000 mm 0 0 7. 0.000 mm 0.0 mm/s 0.000 mm 0 0 8. 0.000 mm 0.0 mm/s 0.000 mm 0 0 9. 0.000 mm 0.0 mm/s 0.000 mm 0 0 10. 0.000 mm 0.0 mm/s 0.000 mm 0 0 11. 0.000 mm 0.0 mm/s 0.000 mm 0 0 12. 0.000 mm 0.0 mm/s 0.000 mm 0 0 13. 0.000 mm 0.0 mm/s 0.000 mm 0 0 14. 0.000 mm 0.0 mm/s 0.000 mm 0 0 15. 0.000 mm 0.0 mm/s 0.000 mm 0 0 F1: F2:DATA1 F3: F4:DATA3 F5 : F6:SIMULATION F7:KERF CHECK F8:MEASURE F9:PRECUT F10:

After entering data, press the <ENTER> key. - If data is updated and the maintenance mode is cleared by the function keys or the <EXIT> key without registering the data by the <ENTER> key, the data modification will be invalid. - Pressing the <EXIT> key causes the screen to return to the DEVICE DATA 1 screen [screen 4.2]. - Now the procedures for setting the device data 2 is completed. - The next step is the precut data setup.

D-187

Procedures for precut data setup <example 5> For the procedures for precut data setup, see the section 4-2 of this chapter, "Precut data maintenance". The following figures shows the PRECUT DATA screen after entering data based on <example 5>.
D I S C O D I C E R S E R I E S < DAD351 >YY-MM-DD [ ] 6.1.1 < PRECUT DATA > UNIT : [1] MM PRECUT DATA No. [2] 2 ID [3]ABC USED BLD FEED SPD SEQ [4] 3 /PRECUT SET DURING SEQ[5]1 DECREASE NEW BLD FEED SPD SEQ [6] 3 /SET FOR WORK THICK GREATER [7] 0 mm SEQ SPEED # OF CUT SEQ SPEED # OF CUT 1 [7]2.0 mm/s [8] 4 LINES 16 0.0 mm/s 0 LINES 2 4.0 mm/s 4 LINES 17 0.0 mm/s 0 LINES 3 6.0 mm/s 4 LINES 18 0.0 mm/s 0 LINES 4 8.0 mm/s 4 LINES 19 0.0 mm/s 0 LINES 5 10.0 mm/s 4 LINES 20 0.0 mm/s 0 LINES 6 12.0 mm/s 4 LINES 21 0.0 mm/s 0 LINES 7 14.0 mm/s 4 LINES 22 0.0 mm/s 0 LINES 8 16.0 mm/s 4 LINES 23 0.0 mm/s 0 LINES 9 18.0 mm/s 4 LINES 24 0.0 mm/s 0 LINES 10 20.0 mm/s 4 LINES 25 0.0 mm/s 0 LINES 11 22.0 mm/s 4 LINES 26 0.0 mm/s 0 LINES 12 24.0 mm/s 4 LINES 27 0.0 mm/s 0 LINES 13 26.0 mm/s 4 LINES 28 0.0 mm/s 0 LINES 14 28.0 mm/s 4 LINES 29 0.0 mm/s 0 LINES 15 30.0 mm/s 4 LINES 30 0.0 mm/s 0 LINES F1: F2: F3: F4: F5 : F6: F7: F8:ALL CLR F9:PRECUT(LEN) F10:

Procedures for kerf check data setup <example 5> [optional accessory] For the procedures for kerf check data setup, see "Procedures for kerf check data setup <example 1>" of the section 2-2-1 of this chapter, "Cutting data setup <example 1>". - Now all the procedures for setting data <example 5> are completed. - If you press the <EXIT> key, the system returns to the DEVICE DATA 1 screen [screen 4.2].

D-188

2-3-2. Cutting data setup example 6 --- A cutting mode/normal program/alternately using two different index and amount left uncut --Summary of this section This section describes the setup example and setting procedures of cutting data in normal program and A cutting mode. The cutting is performed alternately using two different index and amount left cut. Section No. Title 2-3-2-1 Description of cutting data <example 6> Contents - Illustration showing the result when cutting is performed based on the example 6 - Cutting conditions - Auto-setup conditions - Precutting conditions Procedures for data setup - Data setting procedure for the <example 6> example 6

2-3-2-2

D-189

2-3-2-1. Description of cutting data <example 6>


Illustrated description of cutting data <example 6>

- Cut line counts: 10 lines


Offset amount 10mm Alignment end position Amount left uncut [1] 0.9mm Amount left uncut [2] 0.3mm Indexing [1] 1.0mm Indexing [2] 1.2mm Work thickness 1.5mm

Cutting conditions for <example 6> Item Device No. ID name Workpiece width Workpiece depth Workpiece thickness Cutting mode Spindle rotating speed Cutting speed Blade wear compensation (auto-down) Precut data No. Auto-setup conditions for <example 6> The auto-setup operation will not be executed. Conditions 222 DATA-6 20 mm 25 mm 1.5 mm A cutting mode 30,000 rpm 10 mm/s Not used No. 2

D-190

Precutting conditions for <example 6> The descriptions of precutting conditions (precut data No. 2) for <example 6> are as follows: - Old blade start data SEQ : 3 - New blade start data SEQ: 1 - Step number to which a return is made from the old blade start data SEQ at the time of resuming precutting: 1 SEQ 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 30 Feed speed (mm/s) 2 4 6 8 10 12 14 16 18 20 22 24 26 28 30 0 0 Lines 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 0 0

D-191

2-3-2-2. Procedures for data setup <example 6>


Operation flow <example 6> The outline of procedures for data setup <example 6> are as indicated below. Data setup procedures can be summarized as follows: Copying reference device data

Device data 1 setup

Device data 2 setup

Precut data setup

Kerf check data setup [optional accessory]

D-192

Procedures for copying reference device data <example 6> The device data used for the <example 6> is same as the one used in the "Procedures for copying reference device data <example 5>" in the section 23-1-2 of this chapter, with only difference of device No. being replaced with 222.
Step No.

2 3

4 5

6 7

Do This Press the <DEVICE DATA> key on the operation panel or press the <F4> key with the MAIN MENU screen [screen 0.0] displayed. - The DEVICE DATA LIST screen [screen 4.0] then appears. - Note that the input of "data password" is required for the call up of this screen. Reverse the line of device No. (No. 111 in this example) by using the arrow key. Press the <F2> key. - The window to input the number is open. - Note that the input of "data password" is required for the call up of this screen. Enter the new device No. (222 in this example). Press the <ENTER> key. - The reference device No. 111 data is copied to the new device No. 222 position. - The screen shows device No. 222 which has just been added using the copy function. Reverse the line of device No. (No. 222 in the example) by using the arrow key. After checking the device No., press the <ENTER> key. - The DEVICE DATA 1 screen [screen 4.2] then appears. - Note that the input of "data password" is required for the call up of DEVICE DATA 1 screen [screen 4.2]. - Now the procedures for copying the reference data is completed. - The next step is the device data setup.

D-193

Procedures for device data 1 setup <example 6>


Step No.

1 2

Do This Make sure that the DEVICE DATA 1 screen [screen 4.2] is displayed. From the DEVICE DATA 1 screen [screen 4.2], enter the data of "cutting conditions for <example 6>". - See the section 1-4-3-1 of this chapter, "DEVICE DATA 1 screen [screen 4.2]". - Data entry for <<AUTO SETUP DATA>> can be made only when the noncontact setup optional accessory is incorporated.
D I S C O D I C E R S E R I E S < DAC351 >YY-MM-DD [ ] 4.2 < DEVICE DATA1 > DIRECTRY [1] DEVICE DATA No. [2] 222 UNIT SPINDLE REV. PROGRAM MODE CUT MODE HEIGHT MODE [4] MM [5]30000 rpm [6]NORMAL [7]A [8]HEIGHT

ID [3]DATA-6

WIDTH(X) DEPTH(Y) THICKNESS OFFSET

: : : :

[9]20.000 [10]10.000 [11]1.500 [12]0.000

mm mm mm mm

ALIGNMENT POS. X WORK CENTER POS. X INDEX DIR. [17]REAR

: [13]0.000 mm Y : [15]0.000 mm Y

: [14]0.000 mm : [16]0.000 mm

BLADE WEAR ADJ. : [19]0.000 m : [20]0.000 mm PRECUT PROCESS No. [18] 2 TOTAL CUT LINE : [21] 10Lines << AUTO SETUP DATA >> -ADJUST STROKE : [22] 70 % AUTO SETUP FOR CUTTING : [23]YES CREATION DISTANCE : [24]0.000 mm EVERY : [25] 0 LINES F1:SELECT F2: F3:DATA2 F4:DATA3 F5 : F6:SIMULATION F7:KERF CHECK F8:MEASURE F9:PRECUT F10:

After entering data, press the <ENTER> key. - In the cutting data setup for <example 6>, it is necessary to use DEVICE DATA 2 screen [screen 4.3]. - If data is updated and the maintenance mode is cleared by the function keys or the <EXIT> key without registering the data by the <ENTER> key, the data modification will be invalid. - Pressing the <EXIT> key returns the system to the DEVICE DATA LIST screen [screen 4.0]. - Now the procedures for setting the device data 1 is completed. - The next step is the device data 2 setup.

D-194

Procedures for device data 2 setup <example 6>


Step No.

Do This With a device data related screen ([screen 4.2] through [screen 4.10]) displayed, press the <F3> key. - The DEVICE DATA 2 screen [screen 4.3] will appear. - This screen is used to enter the indexing amount, feed speed and amount left uncut setting. Enter data to the appropriate columns. - See the section 1-4-3-2 of this chapter, "DEVICE DATA 2 screen [screen 4.3] (normal program)".
D I S C O D I C E R S E R I E S < DAC351 >YY-MM-DD [ ] 4.3 < DEVICE DATA2 > HEIGHT SPEED INDEX REPEAT JUMP --------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------1. 0.900 mm 10.0 mm/s 1.000 mm 0 0 2. 0.300 mm 10.0 mm/s 1.200 mm 0 0 3. 0.000 mm 0.0 mm/s 0.000 mm 0 0 4. 0.000 mm 0.0 mm/s 0.000 mm 0 0 5. 0.000 mm 0.0 mm/s 0.000 mm 0 0 6. 0.000 mm 0.0 mm/s 0.000 mm 0 0 7. 0.000 mm 0.0 mm/s 0.000 mm 0 0 8. 0.000 mm 0.0 mm/s 0.000 mm 0 0 9. 0.000 mm 0.0 mm/s 0.000 mm 0 0 10. 0.000 mm 0.0 mm/s 0.000 mm 0 0 11. 0.000 mm 0.0 mm/s 0.000 mm 0 0 12. 0.000 mm 0.0 mm/s 0.000 mm 0 0 13. 0.000 mm 0.0 mm/s 0.000 mm 0 0 14. 0.000 mm 0.0 mm/s 0.000 mm 0 0 15. 0.000 mm 0.0 mm/s 0.000 mm 0 0 F1: F2:DATA1 F3: F4:DATA3 F5 : F6:SIMULATION F7:KERF CHECK F8:MEASURE F9:PRECUT F10:

After entering data, press the <ENTER> key. - If data is updated and the maintenance mode is cleared by the function keys or the <EXIT> key without registering the data by the <ENTER> key, the data modification will be invalid. - Pressing the <EXIT> key returns the system to the DEVICE DATA 1 screen [screen 4.2]. - Now the procedures for setting the device data 2 is completed. - The next step is the precut data setup.

D-195

Procedures for precut data setup <example 6> For the procedures for precut data setup, see the section 4-2 of this chapter, "Precut data maintenance". Procedures for kerf check data setup <example 6> [optional accessory] For the procedures for kerf check data setup, see "Procedures for kerf check data setup <example 1>" of the section 2-2-1 of this chapter, "Cutting data setup <example 1>". - Now all the procedures for setting data <example 6> are completed. - If you press the <EXIT> key, the system returns to the DEVICE DATA 1 screen [screen 4.2].

D-196

2-3-3. Cutting data setup example 7 --- A cutting mode/normal program/multiple indexing/ multi-level cutting --Summary of this section This section describes the setup example and setting procedures of cutting data in normal program and A cutting mode employing multiple indexing. In this cutting, the multi-level cutting is performed using the three different data for the amount left uncut. Section No. Title 2-3-3-1 Description of cutting data <example 7> Contents - Illustration showing the result when cutting is performed based on the example 7 - Cutting conditions - Auto-setup conditions - Precutting conditions - Data setting procedure for the example 7

2-3-3-2

Procedures for data setup <example 7>

D-197

2-3-3-1. Description of cutting data <example 7>


Illustrated description of cutting data <example 7>

Cutting condition

Offset amount Alignment end position 10mm a Amount left uncut [1] 1.5mm Amount left uncut [2] 1.2mm

Indexing a:5mm b:7mm c:9mm b c

Work thickness 2.0mm

Amount left uncut [2]-1 1.5mm

[2]-2 1.0mm [2]-3 0.5mm

Top view

d d:30mm Direction of cutting

FRONT

REAR

Cross sectional view

A B

A
C

A
C

A
C

A
C

D A:1.5mm B:1.0mm C:0.5mm D:1.2mm

Center/alignment start position X:-50mm Setting position Chuck table

Work depth 120mm Work width 20mm

Center position Y:20mm Alignment start position Y:80mm

D-198

Cutting conditions for <example 7> The cutting conditions for <example 7> are as follows: Item Device No. ID name Workpiece width Workpiece depth Workpiece thickness Cutting mode Spindle rotating speed Cutting speed Blade wear compensation (auto-down) Precut data No. Auto-setup conditions for <example 7> The auto-setup operation will not be executed. Conditions 333 DATA-7 20 mm 120 mm 2.0 mm A cutting mode 30,000 rpm 10 mm/s Not used No. 2

D-199

Precutting conditions for <example 7> The descriptions of precutting conditions (precut data No. 2) for <example 7> are as follows: - Old blade start data SEQ : 3 - New blade start data SEQ: 1 - Step number to which a return is made from the old blade start data SEQ at the time of resuming precutting: 1 SEQ 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 30 Feed speed (mm/s) 2 4 6 8 10 12 14 16 18 20 22 24 26 28 30 0 0 Lines 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 0 0

D-200

2-3-3-2. Procedures for data setup <example 7>


Operation flow <example 7> The outline of procedures for data setup <example 7> are as indicated below. Data setup procedures can be summarized as follows: Copying reference device data

Device data 1 setup

Device data 2 setup

Precut data setup

Kerf check data setup [optional accessory]

D-201

Procedures for copying reference device data <example 7> The device data used for the <example 7> is same as the one used in the "Procedures for copying reference device data <example 5>" in the section 23-1-2 of this chapter, with only difference of device No. being replaced with 333.
Step No.

2 3

4 5

6 7

Do This Press the <DEVICE DATA > key on the operation panel or press the <F4> key with the MAIN MENU screen [screen 0.0] displayed. - The DEVICE DATA LIST screen [screen 4.0] then appears. - Note that the input of "data password" is required for the call up of this screen. Reverse the line of device No. (No. 111 in this example) by using the arrow key. Press the <F2> key. - The window to input the number is open. - Note that the input of "data password" is required for the call up of this screen. Enter the new device No. (333 in this example). Press the <ENTER> key. - The reference device No. 111 data is copied to the new device No. 333 position. - The screen shows device No. 333 which has just been added using the copy function. Reverse the line of device No. (No. 333 in the example) by using the arrow key. After checking the device No., press the <ENTER> key. - The DEVICE DATA 1 screen [screen 4.2] then appears. - Note that the input of "data password" is required for the call up of DEVICE DATA 1 screen [screen 4.2]. - Now the procedures for copying the reference data is completed. - The next step is the device data setup.

D-202

Procedures for device data 1 setup <example 7>


Step No.

1 2

Do This Make sure that the DEVICE DATA 1 screen [screen 4.2] is displayed. From the DEVICE DATA 1 screen [screen 4.2], enter the data of "cutting conditions for <example 7>". - See the section 1-4-3-1 of this chapter, "DEVICE DATA 1 screen [screen 4.2]". - Data entry for <<AUTO SETUP DATA>> can be made only when the noncontact setup optional accessory is incorporated.
D I S C O D I C E R S E R I E S < DAC351 >YY-MM-DD [ ] 4.2 < DEVICE DATA1 > DIRECTRY [1] DEVICE DATA No. [2] 333 UNIT SPINDLE REV. PROGRAM MODE CUT MODE HEIGHT MODE [4] MM [5]30000 rpm [6]NORMAL [7]A [8]HEIGHT X X

ID [3]DATA-7

WIDTH(X) DEPTH(Y) THICKNESS OFFSET Y Y

: : : :

[9]20.000 [10]120.000 [11]2.000 [12]10.000

mm mm mm mm

ALIGNMENT POS. WORK CENTER POS. INDEX DIR.

: [13]-5.000 mm : [15]-5.000 mm

: [14]80.000 mm : [16]20.000 mm

BLADE WEAR ADJ. : [19]0.000 m : [20]0.000 mm PRECUT PROCESS No. [18] 2 TOTAL CUT LINE : [21] 12Lines << AUTO SETUP DATA >> -ADJUST STROKE : [22] 70 % AUTO SETUP FOR CUTTING :[23]YES CREATION DISTANCE : [24]0.000 mm EVERY : [25] 0 LINES F1:SELECT F2: F3:DATA2 F4:DATA3 F5 : F6:SIMULATION F7:KERF CHECK F8:MEASURE F9:PRECUT F10:

[17]REAR

After entering data, press the <ENTER> key. - In the cutting data setup for <example 7>, it is necessary to use DEVICE DATA 2 screen [screen 4.3]. - If data is updated and the maintenance mode is cleared by the function keys or the <EXIT> key without registering the data by the <ENTER> key, the data modification will be invalid. - Pressing the <EXIT> key returns the system to the DEVICE DATA LIST screen [screen 4.0]. - Now the procedures for setting the device data 1 is completed. - The next step is the device data 2 setup.

D-203

Procedures for device data 2 setup <example 7>


Step No.

Do This With a device data related screen ([screen 4.2] through [screen 4.10]) displayed, press the <F3> key. - The DEVICE DATA 2 screen [screen 4.3] will appear. - This screen is used to enter the indexing amount, feed speed and amount left uncut setting. Enter data to the appropriate columns. - See the section 1-4-3-2 of this chapter, "DEVICE DATA 2 screen [screen 4.3] (normal program)".
D I S C O D I C E R S E R I E S < DAC351 >YY-MM-DD [ ] 4.3 < DEVICE DATA2 > HEIGHT SPEED INDEX REPEAT JUMP --------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------1. 1.500 mm 10.0 mm/s 5.000 mm 0 0 2. 1.500 mm 10.0 mm/s 0.000 mm 0 0 3. 1.000 mm 10.0 mm/s 0.000 mm 0 0 4. 0.500 mm 10.0 mm/s 7.000 mm 0 0 5. 1.200 mm 10.0 mm/s 9.000 mm 2 1 6. 0.000 mm 0.0 mm/s 30.000 mm 0 1 7. 0.000 mm 0.0 mm/s 0.000 mm 0 0 8. 0.000 mm 0.0 mm/s 0.000 mm 0 0 9. 0.000 mm 0.0 mm/s 0.000 mm 0 0 10. 0.000 mm 0.0 mm/s 0.000 mm 0 0 11. 0.000 mm 0.0 mm/s 0.000 mm 0 0 12. 0.000 mm 0.0 mm/s 0.000 mm 0 0 13. 0.000 mm 0.0 mm/s 0.000 mm 0 0 14. 0.000 mm 0.0 mm/s 0.000 mm 0 0 15. 0.000 mm 0.0 mm/s 0.000 mm 0 0 F1: F2:DATA1 F3: F4:DATA3 F5 : F6:SIMULATION F7:KERF CHECK F8:MEASURE F9:PRECUT F10:

After entering data, press the <ENTER> key. - If data is updated and the maintenance mode is cleared by the function keys or the <EXIT> key without registering the data by the <ENTER> key, the data modification will be invalid. - Pressing the <EXIT> key returns the system to the DEVICE DATA 1 screen [screen 4.2]. - Now the procedures for setting the device data 2 is completed. - The next step is the precut data setup.

D-204

Procedures for precut data setup <example 7> For the procedures for precut data setup, see the section 4-2 of this chapter, "Precut data maintenance". Procedures for kerf check data setup <example 7> [optional accessory] For the procedures for kerf check data setup, see "Procedures for kerf check data setup <example 1>" of the section 2-2-1 of this chapter, "Cutting data setup <example 1>". - Now all the procedures for setting data <example 7> are completed. - If you press the <EXIT> key, the system returns to the DEVICE DATA 1 screen [screen 4.2].

D-205

2-3-4. Cutting data setup example 8 --- A cutting mode/special program --Summary of this section This section describes the setup example and setting procedures of cutting data in the A cutting mode and special program. Section No. Title 2-3-4-1 Description of cutting data <example 8> Contents - Illustration showing the result when cutting is performed based on the example 8 - Cutting conditions - Auto-setup conditions - Precutting conditions Procedures for data setup - Data setting procedure for the <example 8> example 8 Special mode explanation HELP screens you can view when screen [HELP screen] using the special program in DAC mode. - HELP 1 screen - HELP 2 screen - SAMPLE screen

2-3-4-2 2-3-4-3

D-206

2-3-4-1. Description of cutting data <example 8>


Illustrated description of cutting data <example 8>

CH2

1.0mm CH1

2.0mm

Cut depth 0.6mm

Work thickness 1.0mm

Amount left uncut = Work thickness - cut depth = 1.0 - 0.6 = 0.4mm

D-207

Cutting conditions for <example 8> Item Device No. ID name Workpiece width Workpiece thickness Cut depth Amount left uncut Conditions 444 DATA-8 100.0 mm 1.0 mm 0.6 mm Work thickness - cut depth = 1.0 - 0.6 = 0.4 mm A cutting mode 30,000 rpm 100 mm/s Not used No. 2

Cutting mode Spindle rotating speed Cutting speed Blade wear compensation (auto-down) Precut data No. Auto-setup conditions for <example 8>

The auto-setup operation will not be executed.

D-208

Precutting conditions for <example 8> The descriptions of precutting conditions (precut data No. 2) for <example 8> are as follows: - Old blade start data SEQ : 3 - New blade start data SEQ: 1 - Step number to which a return is made from the old blade start data SEQ at the time of resuming precutting: 1 SEQ 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 30 Feed speed (mm/s) 2 4 6 8 10 12 14 16 18 20 22 24 26 28 30 0 0 Lines 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 0 0

D-209

2-3-4-2. Procedures for data setup <example 8>


Operation flow <example 8> The outline of procedures for data setup <example 8> are as indicated below. Data setup procedures can be summarized as follows: Copying reference device data

Device data 1 setup

Device data 2 setup

Precut data setup

Kerf check data setup [optional accessory]

D-210

Procedures for copying reference device data <example 8> The device data used for the <example 8> is same as the one used in the "Procedures for copying reference device data <example 5>" in the section 23-1-2 of this chapter, with only difference of device No. being replaced with 444.
Step No.

2 3

4 5

6 7

Do This Press the <DEVICE DATA > key on the operation panel or press the <F4> key with the MAIN MENU screen [screen 0.0] displayed. - The DEVICE DATA LIST screen [screen 4.0] then appears. - Note that the input of "data password" is required for the call up of this screen. Reverse the line of device No. (No. 111 in this example) by using the arrow key. Press the <F2> key. - The window to input the number is open. - Note that the input of "data password" is required for the call up of this screen. Enter the new device No. (444 in this example). Press the <ENTER> key. - The reference device No. 111 data is copied to the new device No. 444 position. - The screen shows device No. 444 which has just been added using the copy function. Reverse the line of device No. (No. 444 in the example) by using the arrow key. After checking the device No., press the <ENTER> key. - The DEVICE DATA 1 screen [screen 4.2] then appears. - Note that the input of "data password" is required for the call up of DEVICE DATA 1 screen [screen 4.2]. - Now the procedures for copying the reference data is completed. - The next step is the device data 1 setup.

D-211

Procedures for device data 1 setup <example 8>


Step No.

1 2

Do This Make sure that the DEVICE DATA 1 screen [screen 4.2] is displayed. From the DEVICE DATA 1 screen [screen 4.2], enter the data of "cutting conditions for <example 8>". - See the section 1-4-3-1 of this chapter, "DEVICE DATA 1 screen [screen 4.2]". - Data entry for <<AUTO SETUP DATA>> can be made only when the noncontact setup optional accessory is incorporated.
D I S C O D I C E R S E R I E S < DAC351 >YY-MM-DD [ ] 4.2 < DEVICE DATA1 > DIRECTRY [1] DEVICE DATA No. [2] UNIT SPINDLE REV. PROGRAM MODE CUT MODE HEIGHT MODE

444

ID

[3]DATA-8

[4] MM [5]30000 rpm [6]NORMAL [7]A [8]HEIGHT X X

WIDTH(X) DEPTH(Y) THICKNESS OFFSET

: [9]100.000 mm : [10]100.000 mm : [11] 1.000 mm : [12] 0.000 mm : [14]50.000 mm : [16] 0.000 mm :[19]0.000 m :[20]0.000 mm :[21] 10Lines :[22] 70 %

ALIGNMENT POS. WORK CENTER POS. INDEX DIR.

: [13]0.000 mm Y : [15]0.000 mm Y

[17]REAR

BLADE WEAR ADJ.

PRECUT PROCESS No. [18] 2 TOTAL CUT LINE << AUTO SETUP DATA >> -ADJUST STROKE AUTO SETUP FOR CUTTING : [23]YES CREATION DISTANCE : [24]0.000 mm EVERY : [25] 0 LINES F1:SELECT F2: F3:DATA2 F4:DATA3 F5 : F6:SIMULATION F7:KERF CHECK F8:MEASURE F9:PRECUT F10:

After entering data, press the <ENTER> key. - In the cutting data setup for <example 8>, it is necessary to use DEVICE DATA 2 screen [screen 4.3]. - If data is updated and the maintenance mode is cleared by the function keys or the <EXIT> key without registering the data by the <ENTER> key, the data modification will be invalid. - Pressing the <EXIT> key returns the system to the DEVICE DATA LIST screen [screen 4.0]. - Now the procedures for setting the device data 1 is completed. - The next step is the device data 2 setup.

D-212

Procedures for device data 2 setup <example 8> The DEVICE DATA 2 screen [screen 4.3] is used to set the cutting program by designating the machine operation command.
Step No.

Do This With the "SPECIAL" program mode selected from the DEVICE DATA 1 screen [screen 4.2], press the <F3> key from a device data related screen ([screen 4.2] through [screen 4.10]). - The DEVICE DATA 2 screen [screen 4.3] will appear. - One special program screen allows you to setup 15 program segments. If you want to specify the program segments of 16 to 30, press the <F4> key call up the DEVICE DATA 3 screen [screen 4.4]. Enter data to the appropriate columns. - See the section 1-4-3-4 of this chapter, "DEVICE DATA 2 screen [screen 4.3] (special program)".
D I S C O D I C E R S E R I E S < DAC351 >YY-MM-DD [ ] 4.3 < DEVICE DATA2 > HEIGHT MODE SPEED INDEX MODE mm mm/s mm -----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------1 A 0 0 0 0.400 H 10.0 2.000 R 2 IDXT 0 0 0 0.000 H 0.0 90.000 R 3 IDXY 0 0 0 0.000 H 0.0 100.000 R 4 A 0 0 0 0.400 H 100.0 1.000 R 5 END 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 F1:SELECT F2:DATA1 F3: F4:DATA3 F5 :HELP F6:SIMULATIONF7:KERF CHECK F8:MEASURE F9:PRECUT F10: MODE PARA_1 PARA_2 PARA_3

After entering data, press the <ENTER> key. - If data is updated and the maintenance mode is cleared by the function keys or the <EXIT> key without registering the data by the <ENTER> key, the data modification will be invalid. - Pressing the <EXIT> key returns the system to the DEVICE DATA 1 screen [screen 4.2]. - Now the procedures for setting the device data 2 is completed. - The next step is the precut data setup.

D-213

Procedures for precut data setup <example 8> For the procedures for precut data setup, see the section 4-2 of this chapter, "Precut data maintenance". Procedures for kerf check data setup <example 8> [optional accessory] For the procedures for kerf check data setup, see "Procedures for kerf check data setup <example 1>" of the section of this chapter 2-2-1, "Cutting data setup <example 1>". - Now all the procedures for setting data <example 8> are completed. - If you press the <EXIT> key, the system returns to the DEVICE DATA 1 screen [screen 4.2].

D-214

2-3-4-3. Special mode explanation screen [HELP screen]


About HELP screen You can find information of device data parameters in HELP screens when you use a special program in DAC mode. DEVICE DATA 2 SPECIAL PROGRAM screen [screen HELP 1] DEVICE DATA 2 SPECIAL PROGRAM screen [screen HELP 1] appears when you press the <F5> key from the DEVICE DATA 2 screen [screen 4.3]. [Screen]
D I S C O D I C E R S E R I E S < DAC351 >YY-MM-DD [ ] DEVICE DATA 2 SPECIAL PROGRAM HELP1

----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------1. A A MODE CUT 2. B B MODE CUT 3. BS BS MODE CUT 4. A_up A MODE UPPER CUT 5. Achop CHOPPER CUT 6. Idx_Y Y AXIS INDEX 7.Idx_X X AXIS INDEX 8.Idx_T AXIS INDEX 9.Workw WORK WIDTH CHANGE 10.Ali_p MOVE TO ALIGNMENT POSITION. 11.Loop RETURN MOVE 12.Call OTHER PROGRAM RUN 13.End PROGRAM END F1: F6: F2: F7: F3: F8: F4: F9: F5 :HELP2 F10:

[Function Key] Press F1 F2 F3 F4 F5 F6 F7 F8 F9 F10 To Unused Unused Unused Unused Call up the DEVICE DATA 2 SPECIAL PROGRAM screen [screen HELP 2]. Unused Unused Unused Unused Unused

D-215

DEVICE DATA 2 SPECIAL PROGRAM screen [screen HELP 2] DEVICE DATA 2 SPECIAL PROGRAM screen [screen HELP 2] appears when you press the <F5> key from the DEVICE DATA 2 SPECIAL PROGRAM screen [screen HELP 1]. [Screen]
D I S C O D I C E R S E R I E S < DAC351 >YY-MM-DD [ ] DEVICE DATA 2 SPECIAL PROGRAM MODE PARA_1 PARA_2 HELP2

PARA_3 HEIGHT MODE SPEED INDEX MODE mm mm/s mm -----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------1.A LINE -ANGLE HEIGHT *1 X Y *2 2.B LINE -ANGLE HEIGHT *1 X Y *2 3.A_up LINE -ANGLE HEIGHT *1 X Y *2 4.Achop Z SPEED XSTROKE ANGLE HEIGHT *1 X Y -5.Idx_Y ------Y *2 6.Idx_X ------Y *2 7.Idx_T ------ *2 8.Ali_p --*3 ----- -9.Loop CYCLE JUMP ------ -10.Call DEVICE START ------ -11.END -------- -*1 H/Height D/Depth control, R/Relative position control. *2 R/Relative Pos movement, A/Absolute Pos movement. *3 XY axis Alignment Pos Move. Note) Use "nm" unit to set X-stroke and Z-speed for chopper cut. F1: F2: F3: F4: F5 :SAMPLE F6: F7: F8: F9: F10:

[Function Key] Press F1 F2 F3 F4 F5 F6 F7 F8 F9 F10 To Unused Unused Unused Unused Call up the DEVICE DATA (2) SPECIAL PROGRAM screen [screen SAMPLE]. Unused Unused Unused Unused Unused

D-216

DEVICE DATA (2) SPECIAL PROGRAM screen [screen SAMPLE] DEVICE DATA (2) SPECIAL PROGRAM screen [screen SAMPLE] appears when you press the <F5> key from the DEVICE DATA 2 SPECIAL PROGRAM screen [screen HELP 2]. [Screen]
D I S C O D I C E R S E R I E S < DAC351 >YY-MM-DD [ ] DEVICE DATA (2) SPECIAL PROGRAM MODE PARA_1 PARA_2 PARA_3 SAMPLE

HEIGHT MODE SPEED INDEX MODE mm mm/s mm -----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------1.Ali_p 0 0 YT 0.0000 H 0.0 0.0000 R 2.A 2 0 0 1.0000 H 10.0 1.0000 R 3.B 2 0 0 2.0000 H 20.0 2.0000 R 4.Achop 1000000 2000000 0 3.0000 H 30.0 3.0000 R 5.Loop 10 3 0 0.0000 H 0.0 0.0000 R 6.Idx_Y 0 0 0 0.0000 H 0.0 4.0000 R 7.Call 001 2 0 0.0000 H 0.0 0.0000 R 8.End 1. Y, -axis alignment pos. move. 2. A-Mode Cut twice, Height 1mm, Cut spd 10mm, Index 1mm. 3. B-Mode Cut twice, Height 2mm, Cut spd 20mm, Index 2mm. 4. Chopper Cut, Z-spd 1mm/s, X-Cut 2mm over 3mm X stroke. 5. Repeat program 5 times from line #3. 6. Y-axis makes 4mm index. 7. Call device #001, then execute the program from line #2 8. Process end. F5: HELP1 EXIT: MENU BEFORE

[Function Key] Press F5 To Call up the DEVICE DATA 2 SPECIAL PROGRAM screen [screen HELP 1].

D-217

3. Setup Data
Summary of this section This section describes the setting procedures of setup data, precautions for setup execution and flows of setup operation and machine movement. Section No. Title Contents 3-1 Specifying the Setup Data - Procedures for setting setup data 3-2 Outline of Chuck Table - Precautions for chuck table setup Setup Operation operation - Machine operation flows in chuck table setup 3-3 Outline of Noncontact - Precautions for noncontact setup Setup Operation operation [Optional Accessory] - Machine operation flows in noncontact setup operation 3-4 Outline of Sensor - Precautions for sensor Calibration Setup calibration setup operation [Optional Accessory] - Machine operation flows in sensor calibration setup operation 3-5 Setting the Auto-setup - Data setting procedures for autoData setup in which noncontact setup [Optional Accessory] is performed during cutting

D-218

3-1. Specifying the Setup Data


About setup The term setup refers to an operation performed to detect and set the reference position (setup point) for determining the work amount left uncut. For positioning purposes, this machine employs a chuck table setup system where the chuck table and blade are checked by means of electrical conduction. As another setup system, an optical sensor based noncontact setup system is also available [optional accessory]. - For the details of the setup procedures, see the section D-5, [Setup] of the Operation Manual. Procedures for specifying the setup data Before setup function execution, it is necessary to specify the setup data.
Step No.

1 2

Do This From the MAIN MENU screen [screen 0.0], press the <F5> key. The BLADE MAINTENANCE screen [screen 5.0] is called up. With the BLADE MAINTENANCE screen [screen 5.0] displayed, press the <F7> key. - The PASSWORD screen is then called up for data protection.
D I S C O D I C E R S E R I E S < DAD321 >YY-MM-DD [ ] =========== Pass Word Screen ===========

ENTER PASSWORD...??

[1]

D-219

Procedures for specifying the setup data (Continued)


Step No.

4 5

Do This Type the data password in the column [1] and press the <ENTER> key. - The SETUP DATA 1 screen [screen 5.7] is called up only when the entered password is correct. - See the next page for the details of the SETUP DATA 1 screen [screen 5.7]. Enter data on the screen and then press the <ENTER> key. - The data will be registered. With the SETUP DATA 1 screen [screen 5.7] displayed, press the <F3> key to call up SETUP DATA 2 screen [screen 5.7.3]. - See the next page and after for the SETUP DATA 2 screen [screen 5.7.3]. Enter data on the screen and then press the <ENTER> key. - The data will be registered. - If you press the <EXIT> key without pressing the <ENTER> key, the newly entered data will be canceled and the system returns to the SETUP DATA 1 screen [screen 5.7].

D-220

SETUP DATA 1 screen [screen 5.7] This screen is used to specify data such as management data for setup and blade life limit. [Screen]
D I S C O D I C E R S E R I E S < DAD321 >YY-MM-DD [ ] < SETUP DATA 1 > UNIT : [1] : : : : : [2] inch [3] rpm [4] mm [5] mm [6] mm << CONTACT >> : [7] mm [9] [10] [11] [12] [13] 5.7

CHUCK TABLE SIZE SPINDLE REV. BLADE WEAR CHECK EXCESSIVE WEAR INSUFFICIANT WEAR N.C.S ADJUST DATA(- FOR SHALLOW) SETUP WEAR CHECK MARGIN AMOUNT CHUCK TABLE TYPE SETUP DEFAULT AUTO SETUP MODE AUTO SETUP RETRY CONTACT SETUP CHECK TIMES CLEARANCE BETWEEN FLANGE AND WORK SURFACE PRECUT AFTER NONCONTACT SETUP F1:SELECT F2: F3:DATA2 F6: F7: F8:

<< N.C.S >> [8] mm

: : : : :

TIMES TIMES mm F5 : F10:

: [14] : [15] F4: F9:

[Setting Item]
Item No.

[1] [2] [3] [4]

[5]

[6]

[7] [8]

Descriptions The selected unit, inch/mm is displayed. Switching between inch/mm can be effected by using the <F1> key. Specify the chuck table size. Specify the spindle rotating speed to be used for setup operation. In connection with the blade wear check conducted in comparison with the previous setup level, enter the maximum permissible blade diameter decrease (setup position ascent in Z-axis direction) from the previous setup process level. In connection with the blade wear check conducted in comparison with the previous setup level, enter the maximum permissible blade diameter increase (setup position descent in Z-axis direction) from the previous setup process level. Enter a correction value for cases where the cut depth varies at a constant rate according to the noncontact setup sensitivity adjustment. - The input of a minus value decreases the cut depth (the setup position is oriented toward the Z-axis upper end). Enter the maximum permissible position difference among the detected positions of contact setup. Enter the maximum permissible position difference among the detected positions of noncontact setup.

D-221

SETUP DATA 1 screen [screen 5.7] (Continued) [Setting Item]


Item No.

[9]

[10]

[11]

[12]

[13] [14]

[15]

Descriptions The setup position is changed by setting chuck table type with universal or porous. Switching between UNIVERSAL/POROUS can be effected by using the <F1> key. Specify the setup item (chuck table setup/noncontact setup) to which priority is to be given when the <SETUP> key is pressed. Either CONTACT (chuck table setup)/NONCONTACT (noncontact setup) can be selected by using the <F1> key. Specify whether an operator call by buzzer is to be made at the time of setup. Switching between CALL/AUTO/NO can be effected by using the <F1> key. CALL Issues an operator call at the time of setup. AUTO Setup is performed automatically. NO Setup is not performed. Enter the number of retrials to be repeated in the event of an autosetup process error (conflict between the first and second/ transmission check error, etc.). Enter the number of contact setup executions. Enter the maximum permissible distance between workpiece and flange (limit value) based on the blade wear amount measured at the time of setup. Specify whether precutting is to be performed after auto-setup. Switching between YES/NO can be effected by using the <F1> key.

[Function Key] Press F1 F2 F3 F4 F5 F6 F7 F8 F9 F10 To Effect change between inch/mm, chuck table type, preceding setup or auto-setup setting. Unused Call up the SETUP DATA 2 screen [screen 5.7.3]. Unused Unused Unused Unused Unused Unused Unused

D-222

SETUP DATA 2 screen [screen 5.7.3] [Screen]


D I S C O D I C E R S E R I E S < DAD321 >YY-MM-DD [ ] < SETUP DATA 2 > UNIT : [1] CONTACT SETUP SETTING BLADE BLOW TIME SETUP HIGH SPEED SETUP LOW SPEED SETUP LOW SPEED STROKE -AXIS ROTATION FOR SETUP INDEX -AXIS ROTATION FOR START POSITION -AXIS ROTATION FOR END POSITION -AXIS ROTATION FOR NOW POSITION -AXIS RETURN FOR SETUP NONCONTACT SETUP SETTING BLADE BLOW TIME SETUP HIGH SPEED SETUP LOW SPEED SETUP LOW SPEED STROKE F1:SELECT F6: F2:DATA1 F3: F7: F8: 5.7.3

: : : : : : : : :

[2] [3] [4] [5] [6] [7] [8] [9] [10]

s mm/s mm/s mm TIMES

: : : : F4: F9:

[11] [12] [13] [14]

s mm/s mm/s mm F5 : F10:

[Setting Item]
Item No.

[1] [2] [3]

[4]

[5] [6] [7] [8]

Descriptions The selected unit, inch/mm is displayed. Switching between inch/mm can be effected by using the <F1> key. Enter the blade section nozzle blow time for the contact setup process. Enter the Z-axis high-speed movement speed for contact setup process execution. (This speed applies the movement path between the Z-axis origin and the point immediately before the chuck table upper surface.) Enter the Z-axis low-speed movement speed for contact setup process execution. (This speed applies to the movement path between the point immediately before the chuck table upper surface and the setup point.) Define the low-speed movement range (distance) for contact setup process execution. Enter the amount of setup position correction in the angular direction, which applies to contact setup process execution. Specify the -axis start position for contact setup process execution. Specify the -axis end position for contact setup process execution.

D-223

SETUP DATA 2 screen [screen 5.7.3] (Continued) [Setting Item]


Item No.

[9] [10]

[11] [12]

[13]

[14]

Descriptions Shows the -axis current position prevailing during chuck table setup [7]. Indicates the number of times the -axis has been reached the end position during chuck table setup process execution. - The value shown here is cleared when you turn ON/OFF the chuck table with the <F1> key from the MACHINE MAINTENANCE screen [screen 7.0]. Enter the blade section nozzle blow time for the noncontact setup process. Enter the Z-axis high-speed movement speed for noncontact setup process execution. (This speed applies the movement path between the Z-axis origin and the point immediately before the noncontact block.) Enter the Z-axis low-speed movement speed for noncontact setup process execution. (This speed applies to the movement path between the noncontact block and the setup point.) Define the low-speed movement range (distance) for noncontact setup process execution.

[Function Key] Press F1 F2 F3 F4 F5 F6 F7 F8 F9 F10 To Effect inch/mm changeover. Call up the SETUP DATA 1 screen [screen 5.7]. Unused Unused Unused Unused Unused Unused Unused Unused

D-224

3-2. Outline of Chuck Table Setup Operation


About chuck table setup In the chuck table setup, the chuck table contacts with the blade to detect the blade position by means of passage of electric current. - For the details of the setup procedures, see the section D-5, [Setup] of the Operation Manual. Before the chuck table setup - To set, edit or confirm the setup data, use the SETUP DATA 1 screen [screen 5.7]. - Ensure that there is no water drop or work on the chuck table. - When the ceramic porous chuck table is used, the predefined data setup is such that the setup point is not positioned in the ceramic porous section. When using a chuck table other than the standard type, contact your nearest DISCO office. Precautions for chuck table setup

NOTICE

- Performing setup with an incorrect chuck table size selected causes damage to the chuck table. When performing chuck table setup, confirm the chuck table size. - Before performing setup upon blade replacement, be sure to idle the spindle for a period of 10 minutes. If the spindle is not allowed to idle for an adequate period of time, the setup positions may vary. - When using the washer (flange) type blade, conduct dressing (truing) after blade replacement and perform setup while the blade is properly rounded. If setup is attempted while the blade is not properly rounded by truing, the reference setup positions are displaced so that the work cut depth may vary.

D-225

Chuck table setup flowchart The flowchart below shows the chuck table setup operation. - See the section D-5, [Setup] of the Operation Manual for the detailed procedures.
The SETUP screen [screen 5.3] appears.

F1 or F2 key. Chuck table setup screen is displayed. - To change the blade outside diameter, return to the BLADE REPLACEMENT screen [screen 5.1] and edit the associated data. - To change the chuck table size, spindle revolution or chuck table type, return to the SETUP DATA 1 screen [screen 5.7] and edit the associated data.

- Check the employed blade OD. - Check the chuck table size. - Check the spindle revolution. - Check the chuck table type.

NG

OK ENTER key Spindle rotation start.

ENTER key The X-, Y- and Z-axis move to the setup position. The Z-axis descends at high speed. The Z-axis descends at low speed and after contact, it ascends to the origin position.

ENTER key The X-axis moves to its origin position. The SETUP lamp comes on. Setup is completed.

D-226

3-3. Outline of Noncontact Setup Operation [Optional Accessory]


About noncontact setup By correcting the positions of the chuck table top surface and optical sensor at the time of chuck table replacement (sensor calibration setup), setup operations can be carried out by the optical sensor without damaging the blade tip. - For the details of the setup procedures, see the section D-5, [Setup] of the Operation Manual. Before the noncontact setup - Make sure that the SETUP DATA 1 screen [screen 5.7] designates the noncontact setup function as the preferred function. Precautions for noncontact setup

NOTICE

- Before performing setup upon blade replacement, be sure to idle the spindle for a period of 10 minutes. If the spindle is not allowed to idle for an adequate period of time, the setup positions may vary. - When using the washer (flange) type blade, conduct dressing (truing) after blade replacement and perform setup while the blade is properly rounded. If setup is attempted while the blade is not properly rounded by truing, the reference setup positions are displaced so that the work cut depth may vary.

D-227

Noncontact setup flowchart The flowchart below shows the noncontact setup operation. - See the section D-5, [Setup] of the Operation Manual for the detailed procedures.
When the SETUP DATA 1 screen [screen 5.7] is set so that the [NONCONTACT] setup takes precedence, the NONCONTACT SETUP screen [screen 5.3.3] can be called up by pressing SETUP key.

The SETUP screen [screen 5.3] appears. F3 key The NONCONTACT SETUP screen [screen 5.3.3] appears.

The sensor section may be soiled. See the section G-11, [Cleaning the Noncontact Setup Sensor] of the Maintenance Manual.

Check the following, 1 Blade Outside diameter 2 Spindle revolution 3 Noncontact setup sensor transmission level value If 1 and / or 2 is out of the set value,go to A. If 3 is not within 1002%, go to B.

- To change the blade outside diameter, return to the BLADE REPLACEMENT screen [screen 5.1] and edit the associated data. - To change spindle revolution , return to the SETUP DATA 1 screen [screen 5.7] and edit the associated data.

OK ENTER key Spindle rotation and NCS blowing start. ENTER key The X-, Y- and Z-axis move to the setup position. The Z-axis (blade) descends to a preselected position at high speed. First The Z-axis (blade) descends at low speed. The moment the sensor detects the blade tip, the Z-axis ascends to the stand-by position. The Z-axis (blade) descends to a position at which the sensor light path is blocked. Second The Z-axis (blade) vertically moves at extremely low speed. The moment the sensor detects the blade tip, the Z-axis ascends to the stand-by position. Third

ENTER key The X-axis moves to the origin position. The SETUP lamp turns ON. Setup is completed.

D-228

3-4. Outline of Sensor Calibration Setup [Optional Accessory]


About sensor calibration setup Since the chuck table varies in height from one unit to anther, it is necessary to adjust the chuck table upper surface and optical sensor positions after each chuck table replacement. In the sensor calibration setup, the positions of the optical noncontact setup sensor and chuck table upper surface are aligned. This setup is performed when replacing the chuck table. - For the details of the setup procedures, see the section D-5, [Setup] of the Operation Manual. Precautions for sensor calibration setup

NOTICE

- Performing setup with an incorrect chuck table size selected causes damage to the chuck table. When performing sensor calibration setup, confirm the chuck table size. - Before performing setup upon blade replacement, be sure to idle the spindle for a period of 10 minutes. If the spindle is not allowed to idle for an adequate period of time, the setup positions may vary. - When using the washer (flange) type blade, conduct dressing (truing) after blade replacement and perform setup while the blade is properly rounded. If setup is attempted while the blade is not properly rounded by truing, the reference setup positions are displaced so that the work cut depth may vary.

D-229

Sensor calibration setup flowchart The flowchart below shows the sensor calibration setup operation. - See the section D-5, [Setup] of the Operation Manual for the detailed procedures.
The SETUP screen [screen 5.3] appears. F4 key The SENSOR CALIBRATION SETUP screen [screen 5.3.4] appears. - To change the blade outside diameter, return to the BLADE REPLACEMENT screen [screen 5.1] and edit the associated data. - To change the chuck table size, spindle revolution or chuck table type, return to the SETUP DATA 1 screen [screen 5.7] and edit the associated data.

The sensor section may be soiled. See the section G-1-1, [Cleaning the Noncontact Setup Sensor] of the Maintenance Manual.

Check the following, 1 Blade outside diameter 2 Chuck table size 3 Spindle revolution 4 Chuck table type 5 Noncontact setup sensor transmission level value If 1 to 4 is out of the set value, go to A. If 5 is not within 1002%, go to B.

OK ENTER key Spindle rotation start. ENTER key The X-, Y- and Z-axis move to the setup position. The Z-axis descends at high speed. The Z-axis descends at low speed and after contact, it ascends to the origin position. NCS blowing start. The X-, Y- and Z-axis move to the sensor position. The Z-axis (blade) descends to a preselected position at high speed. The Z-axis (blade) descends at low speed. The moment the sensor detects the blade tip, the Z-axis ascends to the stand-by position. The Z-axis (blade) descends to a position at which the sensor light path is blocked. The Z-axis (blade) vertically moves at extremely low speed. The moment the sensor detects the blade tip, the Z-axis ascends to the stand-by position. Second Third First

ENTER key
The X-axis moves to the origin position. The SETUP lamp turns ON. Setup is completed.

D-230

3-5. Setting the Auto-setup Data [Optional accessory]


About auto-setup In the auto-setup [optional accessory], the noncontact setup function is automatically executed at the intervals specified in the device data. Procedures for setting the auto-setup data The auto-setup data are specified from the DEVICE DATA 1 screen [screen 4.2] and SETUP DATA 1 screen [screen 5.7].
Step No.

Do This Call up the DEVICE DATA 1 screen [screen 4.2].


DAD321 YY-MM-DD [ ] 4.2 DEVICE DATA1 DIRECTRY DEVICE DATA No. UNIT CUT MODE CUT SHAPE SPINDLE REV. [1] [2] [4] _____ [5] [6] [7]

ID

[3] ____

RND WORK SIZE [8] SQR WORK SIZE CH1 [9] rpm CH2 [10]

mm mm mm mm/s mm mm m mm mm/s % %

mm FEED SPEED [14] mm Y INDEX CH1 [15] mm CH2 [16] CUT LENGTH [17] Z-ADJUST [18] PRECUT DATA No. [19] Z-AXIS DOWN SPEED [20] -ADJUST SWING CH1 [21] << AUTO SETUP DATA >> CH2 [22] AUTO SETUP FOR CUTTING :[23] ____ CREATION DISTANCE :[24] m EVERY :[25] LINES F1:SELECT F2: F3:DATA2 F4:DATA3 F5 : F6: F7:KERF CHECK F8:MEASURE F9:PRECUT F10:

WORK THICKNESS [11] TAPE THICKNESS [12] BLADE HEIGHT [13] BLADE WEAR ADJUSTMENT

Enter data in <<AUTO SETUP DATA>>, columns [23] [25], and then press the <ENTER> key. Data are then setup. - For the details of the DEVICE DATA 1 screen [screen 4.2], see the section 1-4-2-1 of this chapter, [DEVICE DATA 1 screen [screen 4.2]].

D-231

Procedures for setting the auto-setup data (Continued)


Step No.

Do This Call up the SETUP DATA 1 screen [screen 5.7]. - For the details of the SETUP DATA 1 screen [screen 5.7], see the section 3-1 of this chapter, [Setting the Setup Data]. Confirm that "AUTO" is designated in the column [11] as the autosetup mode.
D I S C O D I C E R S E R I E S < DAD321 >YY-MM-DD [ ] 5.7 < SETUP DATA 1 > UNIT : [1]

CHUCK TABLE SIZE SPINDLE REV. BLADE WEAR CHECK EXCESSIVE WEAR INSUFFICIANT WEAR N.C.S ADJUST DATA(- FOR SHALLOW)

: [2] inch : [3] rpm : [4] mm : [5] mm : [6] mm << CONTACT >> SETUP WEAR CHECK MARGIN AMOUNT : [7] mm CHUCK TABLE TYPE SETUP DEFAULT AUTO SETUP MODE AUTO SETUP RETRY CONTACT SETUP CHECK TIMES CLEARANCE BETWEEN FLANGE AND WORK SURFACE PRECUT AFTER NONCONTACT SETUP F1:SELECT F2: F3:DATA2 F6: F7: F8: : : : : : : :

<< N.C.S >> [8] mm

[9] [10] [11] AUTO [12] TIMES [13] TIMES [14] [15] F4: F9: mm F5 : F10:

D-232

4. Operator Maintenance
Summary of this section This section describes the maintenance operations for precut data, function data, operation data and operation data for the external memory device, and also explains about the measure function. Section No. Title 4-1 OPERATOR MAINTENANCE Screen [Screen 6.0] Contents - Procedure for calling up OPERATOR MAINTENANCE screen [screen 6.0] - Description of OPERATOR MAINTENANCE screen [screen 6.0] - Description of precut data related screens - Setting procedure of precut data - Measurement function enabling you to measure kerf width, index amount and etc. - Function data maintenance to make definition of each function - Operation data maintenance to specify axis operation related data such as scanning speed and cutting allowance width - Signal tower data maintenance to specify or change signal tower specifications - Procedure for calling up ALIGNMENT DATA MAINTENANCE screen [screen 6.6] - Description of ALIGNMENT DATA MAINTENANCE screen [screen 6.6] - Function of external memory device to store data on a floppy disk

4-2

Precut Data Maintenance

4-3

Measure Function

4-4 4-5

Function Data Maintenance Operation Data Maintenance

4-6

Signal Tower Data Maintenance Alignment Data Maintenance

4-7

4-8

External Memory Device [Optional Accessory]

D-233

Safety precautions during operator maintenance

WARNING

When removing a workpiece during a rotation axis alignment or measurement operation, if you put your fingers or hands in a moving section, they may be caught or cut off. Make sure that all axes are completely stopped before removing a workpiece.

NOTICE

- Operator maintenance related screens are password protected. Maintenance data should only be updated by qualified persons. - Do not copy machine data from one machine to another. Such a copying operation may cause malfunction since the machine's intrinsic data such as the axis origin data is also copied by this operation. The data copying function should only be used for backing up the memory contents inherent to the machine.

D-234

4-1. OPERATOR MAINTENANCE Screen [Screen 6.0]


Calling up the OPERATOR MAINTENANCE screen [screen 6.0] This screen is protected by the function password for the purposes of data protection. Therefore, the input of function password is required to call up the OPERATOR MAINTENANCE screen.
Step No.

1 2

Do This From the MAIN MENU screen [screen 0.0], press the <F6> key to call up the password input screen. Enter the function password in the column [1].
D I S C O D I C E R S E R I E S < DAD321 >YY-MM-DD [ ] =========== Pass Word Screen ===========

ENTER PASSWORD...??

[1]

Press the <ENTER> key. - OPERATOR MAINTENANCE screen [screen 6.0] appears only when the entered function password is correct. - For the detailed descriptions of the OPERATOR MAINTENANCE screen [screen 6.0], see the next page.

D-235

OPERATOR MAINTENANCE screen [screen 6.0] When you press the <EXIT> key, the system returns to the MAIN MENU screen [screen 0.0]. [Screen]
D I S C O D I C E R S E R I E S < DAD321 >YY-MM-DD [ ] < OPERATOR MAINTENANCE > F1. PRECUT DATA MAINTENANCE F2. MEASURE F3 FUNCTION DATA MAINTENANCE F4. OPERATION DATA MAINTENANCE F5. SIGNAL TOWER DATA MAINTENANCE F6. ALIGNMENT DATA MAINTENANCE F7. EXTERNAL MEMORY UNIT 6.0

[Function Key] Press F1 F2 F3 F4 F5 F6 F7 To Call up the PRECUT DATA LIST screen [screen 6.1]. Call up the Y-AXIS MEASURE screen [screen 6.2]. Call up the FUNCTION DATA MAINTENANCE 1 screen [screen 6.3]. Call up the OPERATION DATA MAINTENANCE screen [screen 6.4]. Call up the SIGNAL TOWER DATA MAINTENANCE screen [screen 6.5]. Call up the ALIGNMENT DATA MAINTENANCE screen [screen 6.6]. Call up the EXTERNAL MEMORY UNIT screen [screen 6.7]. [optional accessory]

D-236

4-2. Precut Data Maintenance


Summary of this section This section describes the descriptions of precut data related screens and setting procedures of precut data. Section No. Title 4-2-1 PRECUT DATA LIST screen [screen 6.1] Contents - Procedure for calling up PRECUT DATA LIST screen [screen 6.1] - Description of PRECUT DATA LIST screen [screen 6.1] - Procedure for copying precut data - Procedure for writing precut data

4-2-2 4-2-3 About precut

Copying the precut data Writing the precut data

The term precut refers to a blade run-in which is performed to adjust the blade condition for actual cutting and provide consistent cutting quality. In the precut process, cutting starts at a low speed and then the cutting speed is gradually increased until the target speed is reached.

D-237

Performing precutting before cutting If you press the <F9> key from the following screens, you can set precutting (precut ON). - AUTO CUTTING screen [screen 1.0] - SEMI AUTO CUT screen [screen 2.0] - STATUS OF CUTTING screen When the blade type in the BLADE REPLACEMENT screen [screen 5.1] is set as "NEW", the first precutting after blade replacement starts from the "new blade feed speed SEQ NO." specified in the PRECUT DATA screen. In the case of the "OLD" blade, the precut is started from the "old blade feed speed SEQ NO.". Performing precutting during cutting When the blade condition becomes poor during cutting, you can perform precutting even during cutting. To start precutting from the next cut LINE, press the <F9> key from the STATUS OF CUTTING screen displayed during cutting. From the STOP CORRECTION screen displayed while cutting is suspended, you can also set the precutting (precut ON) by pressing the <F9> key.

D-238

4-2-1. PRECUT DATA LIST screen [screen 6.1]


Procedures for calling up the PRECUT DATA LIST screen [screen 6.1]
Step No.

Do This With the OPERATOR MAINTENANCE screen [screen 6.0] displayed, press the <F1> key. - The PRECUT DATA LIST screen [screen 6.1] will appear. - See below for the details of the PRECUT DATA LIST screen [screen 6.1]. If you press the <ENTER> key after precut data No. entry in the column [4], the PRECUT DATA screen appears. - If the <EXIT> key is pressed without registering the data by the <ENTER> key, data entry will be invalid and the system returns to the OPERATOR MAINTENANCE screen [screen 6.0]. - The maximum number of registered precut data data is 36. The list number ranges from numerics from 0 to 9 and alphabet.

PRECUT DATA LIST screen [screen 6.1] This screen is used to call up the registered precut data. [Screen]
D I S C O D I C E R S E R I E S < DAD321 >YY-MM-DD [ ] < PRECUT DATA LIST > No. 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. 7. 8. 9. 10. PRECUT DATA No. [1] PRECUT ID [2] 6.1

DATA SUM: [3] ---------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------Select PRECUT DATA to be updated. F1:NEXT PAGE F2:PAGE BEFORE F6: F7: [4] F4:DELETE F9: F5 : F10:

F3:COPY F8:

D-239

PRECUT DATA LIST screen [screen 6.1] (Continued) [Setting Item]


Item No.

[1] [2] [3] [4]

Descriptions The precut data No. is displayed. The precut data ID name is displayed. The ID name consists of no more than 18 characters. Shows the number of precut data data registered in the machine. The desired precut data should be recalled by entering the precut process No.

[Function Key] Press F1 F2 F3 To Display the following page of the precut data list. Display the previous page of the precut data list. Copy the selected single precut process into a blank space. - No overwriting can be performed. - See the section 4-2-2 of this chapter, [Copying the precut data]. Clear the selected precut process data. Unused Unused Unused Unused Unused Unused

F4 F5 F6 F7 F8 F9 F10

D-240

4-2-2. Copying the precut data


Outline of procedures for copying the precut data To setup a new precut data, use the copy function. After copying the reference data, select the precut data type from "AUTO", "LINE" and "LENGTH". The new precut data setting procedures can be summarized as follows: 4-2-2 Copying the precut data

4-2-3 4-2-3-1 4-2-3-2 4-2-3-3

Writing the precut data Precut data (AUTO) Precut data (LINE) Precut data (LENGTH)

D-241

Procedures for copying the precut data


Step No.

Do This Press the <F3> key from the PRECUT DATA LIST screen [screen 6.1]. - The PRECUT DATA COPY screen [screen 6.1.3] will appear. - For the details of the PRECUT DATA COPY screen [screen 6.1.3], see the next page. From the PRECUT DATA COPY screen [screen 6.1.3], enter "0" in the column [1] and "1" in [2]. Copy source Precut data No. [1] 0 Copy destination Precut data No. [2] 1
D I S C O D I C E R S E R I E S < DAD321 >YY-MM-DD [ ] 6.1.3 < PRECUT DATA COPY > No. 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. 7. 8. 9. 10. PRECUT DATA No. 0 PRECUT ID DISCO

DATA SUM: 1 ---------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------Indicate the Precut Data Number for copying from and copying to. COPY FROM No. [1] 0 TO No. [2] 1 Press the ENTER key to start. F1:NEXT PAGE F2:PAGE BEFORE F6: F7: F3: F8: F4: F9: F5 : F10:

Press the <ENTER> key. - The reference precut process No. 0 data is the copied into the No. 1 data position. Press the <EXIT> key. - The screen returns to the PRECUT DATA LIST screen [screen 6.1]. - The PRECUT DATA LIST screen [screen 6.1] now additionally lists the copied precut process No. 1.

D-242

PRECUT DATA COPY screen [screen 6.1.3] [Screen]


D I S C O D I C E R S E R I E S < DAD321 >YY-MM-DD [ ] < PRECUT DATA COPY > No. 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. 7. 8. 9. 10. PRECUT DATA No. 0 PRECUT ID DISCO 6.1.3

DATA SUM: 1 ---------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------Indicate the Precut Data Number for copying from and copying to. COPY FROM No. [1] TO No. [2] Press the ENTER key to start. F1:NEXT PAGE F2:PAGE BEFORE F6: F7: F3: F8: F4: F9: F5 : F10:

[Setting Item]
Item No.

[1] [2]

Descriptions Enter the copy source precut data No. Enter the copy destination precut data No.

[Function Key] Press F1 F2 F3 F4 F5 F6 F7 F8 F9 F10 To Display the following page of the precut data list. Display the previous page of the precut data list. Unused Unused Unused Unused Unused Unused Unused Unused

D-243

4-2-3. Writing the precut data


Type of precut data There are following three types of precut data. Select the appropriate type considering required precut conditions and then write data on it. When changing or confirming the precut data, use the same procedures described in this section. Section No. Title 4-2-3-1 Precut data (AUTO) Contents - The type in which the machine automatically sets 30 precut processes - The type in which entered feed speed and cut line counts will make precut data - The type in which entered feed speed and cut distance will make precut data

4-2-3-2

Precut data (LINE)

4-2-3-3

Precut data (LENGTH)

D-244

4-2-3-1. Precut data (AUTO)


About precut data (AUTO) If you select the precut data (AUTO) and enter the precut final speed, precut line counts and precut start speed, the machine automatically sets a 30-step precut process. Procedures for writing the precut data (AUTO) The following procedures for writing the precut data (AUTO) are based on the precut conditions (example 1). Precut conditions (example 1) Precut final speed 150 mm/s Precut line counts 150 lines New blade start feed speed 5 mm/s When above conditions are entered, the machine automatically performs precutting as shown in the table below, after setting the new blade. Cutting Speed 5 mm/s 10 mm/s 15 mm/s 20 mm/s 145 mm/s 150 mm/s Cutting Lines 5 lines 5 lines 5 lines 5 lines 5 lines 5 lines Total number of precut lines 150 lines

Step No.

2 3

Do This Enter "1" in the column [4] of the PRECUT DATA LIST screen [screen 6.1] and then press the <ENTER> key. - The PRECUT DATA (AUTO) screen [screen 6.1.1] then appears. - For the details of the PRECUT DATA (AUTO) screen [screen 6.1.1], see the next page. Enter "ABC", the precut data ID in the column [2]. Enter the "precut conditions (example 1)" data in the columns [3] [9]. Press the <ENTER> key. - The precut data entries are then finalized. - If the <EXIT> key is pressed without registering the data by the <ENTER> key, data entry will be invalid and the system returns to the PRECUT DATA LIST screen [screen 6.1].

D-245

PRECUT DATA (AUTO) screen [screen 6.1.1] [Screen]


D I S C O D I C E R S E R I E S < DAD321 >YY-MM-DD [ ] < PRECUT DATA > PRECUT DATA No. [1] 1 UNIT : [3]MM [4] [5] [6] [7] [8] 5.00 50.00 10.00 150.00 150 mm/s mm/s mm/s mm/s LINES ID [2] ABC 6.1.1

USED BLADE FEED SPEED NEW BLADE FEED SPEED PRECUT SET DURING PRECUT SPEED PRECUT END SPEED LINES OF PRECUT

SET FOR WORK THICKNESS GREATER [9]

0.000 mm

In order to store the data, press the ENTER key. Pressing the "EXIT" key returns to the previous screen. F1:SELECT F6: F2: F7: F3: F8: F4: F9:PRECUT(LINE) F5 : F10:

[Setting Item]
Item No.

[1] [2] [3] [4]

[5]

[6]

[7] [8] [9]

Descriptions The precut data No. is displayed. The number cannot be changed from this screen. Enter the precut data ID. (18 characters maximum). Inch/mm is displayed. Switching between inch/mm can be effected by pressing the <F1> key. Enter the precut start feed speed to be employed when a new blade is installed from the BLADE REPLACEMENT screen [screen 5.1]. Enter the precut start speed to be employed when an old blade is installed from the BLADE REPLACEMENT screen [screen 5.1]. This speed is applied to the precut sequence during cutting or autosetup and precut process during kerf check. If a precut operation is started again in the middle of a precut process, the precut speed is reduced by the value entered in column [6]. Enter the precut end speed. Enter the total number lines to be precut. Enter the cut depth difference between the current and previous precut operations.

D-246

PRECUT DATA (AUTO) screen [screen 6.1.1] (Continued) [Function Key] Press F1 F2 F3 F4 F5 F6 F7 F8 F9 F10 To Switch unit between inch and mm. Unused Unused Unused Unused Unused Unused Unused Call up the PRECUT DATA (LINE) screen [screen 6.1.1]. Unused

D-247

4-2-3-2. Precut data (LINE)


About precut data (LINE) If you select the precut data (LINE), enter the feed speed and cut line counts for every sequence to make a precut data. Procedures for writing the precut data (LINE) The following procedures for writing the precut data (LINE) are based on the precut conditions (example 2). Precut conditions (example 2) - Old blade start data SEQ : 5 - New blade start data SEQ: 1 - STEP number to which a return is made from the old blade start data SEQ at the time of resuming precutting : 1 - Difference of cut depth compared with the previous cut work: 0 SEQ 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 Feed speed (mm/s) 10 20 30 40 50 60 70 80 90 100 110 120 130 140 150 Lines 10 10 10 20 20 30 30 40 40 50 50 50 50 50 50

D-248

Procedures for writing the precut data (LINE) (Continued)


Step No.

2 3

Do This While the PRECUT DATA (AUTO) screen [screen 6.1.1] is displayed, press the <F9> key. - The PRECUT DATA (LINE) screen [screen 6.1.1] then appears. - For the details of the PRECUT DATA (LINE) screen [screen 6.1.1], see below. Enter "ABC", the precut process ID in the column [3]. Enter "precut conditions (example 2)" data in the columns [4] [9]. Press the <ENTER> key. - The precut data entries are then finalized. - If the <EXIT> key is pressed without registering the data by the <ENTER> key, data entry will be invalid and the system returns to the PRECUT DATA LIST screen [screen 6.1].

PRECUT DATA (LINE) screen [screen 6.1.1] [Screen]


D I S C O D I C E R S E R I E S < DAD321 >YY-MM-DD [ ] 6.1.1 < PRECUT DATA > UNIT : [1] MM PRECUT DATA No. [2] 1 ID [3] ABC USED BLD FEED SPD SEQ [4] 5 /PRECUT SET DURING SEQ [5]1 DECREASE NEW BLD FEED SPD SEQ [6] 1 /SET FOR WORK THICK GREATER [7] 0 mm SEQ SPEED # OF CUT SEQ SPEED # OF CUT 1 [8] 10.0 mm/s [9] 10 LINES 16 0.0 mm/s 0 LINES 2 20.0 mm/s 10 LINES 17 0.0 mm/s 0 LINES 3 30.0 mm/s 10 LINES 18 0.0 mm/s 0 LINES 4 40.0 mm/s 20 LINES 19 0.0 mm/s 0 LINES 5 50.0 mm/s 20 LINES 20 0.0 mm/s 0 LINES 6 60.0 mm/s 30 LINES 21 0.0 mm/s 0 LINES 7 70.0 mm/s 30 LINES 22 0.0 mm/s 0 LINES 8 80.0 mm/s 40 LINES 23 0.0 mm/s 0 LINES 9 90.0 mm/s 40 LINES 24 0.0 mm/s 0 LINES 10 100.0 mm/s 50 LINES 25 0.0 mm/s 0 LINES 11 110.0 mm/s 50 LINES 26 0.0 mm/s 0 LINES 12 120.0 mm/s 50 LINES 27 0.0 mm/s 0 LINES 13 130.0 mm/s 50 LINES 28 0.0 mm/s 0 LINES 14 140.0 mm/s 50 LINES 29 0.0 mm/s 0 LINES 15 150.0 mm/s 50 LINES 30 0.0 mm/s 0 LINES F1:SELECT F2: F3: F4: F5 : F6: F7: F8:ALL CLR F9:PRECUT(LEN) F10:

[Setting Item]
Item No.

[1] [2] [3]

Descriptions Inch or mm is displayed. Switching between inch and mm can be effected by pressing the <F1> key. The precut process No. is displayed. The number cannot be changed from this screen. Enter the precut process ID. (18 characters maximum).

D-249

PRECUT DATA (LINE) screen [screen 6.1.1] (Continued) [Setting Item]


Item No.

[4]

[5]

[6]

[7]

[8] [9]

Descriptions Enter the precut start SEQ No. to be employed when an old blade is installed from the BLADE REPLACEMENT screen [screen 5.1]. This No. is applied to the precut sequence during cutting or auto-setup and precut process during kerf check. The default value is "1". If a precut operation is started again in the middle of the precut process, the precut speed is reduced by the value entered in column [5]. Enter the precut start SEQ No. to be employed when a new blade is installed from the BLADE REPLACEMENT screen [screen 5.1]. The default value is "1". When a difference of cut depth between the cut to start from now on and the previous one is greater than the value specified here, the machine automatically starts precut operation (SEQ No. to be employed was designated at [4]). - When you press <F9> (precut OFF) key to cancel precut during operation from BLADE LIFE/WEAR INFORMATION screen [screen 5.6] or BLADE INFORMATION 2 screen, the setting entered here becomes invalid. Enter the feed speed to be precut. Enter the cut line counts to be cut at the feed speed specified in [7].

[Function Key] Press F1 F2 F3 F4 F5 F6 F7 F8 F9 F10 To Switch unit between inch and mm. Unused Unused Unused Unused Unused Unused Clear the entered precut process data. Call up the PRECUT DATA (LENGTH) screen [screen 6.1.1]. Unused

D-250

4-2-3-3. Precut data (LENGTH)


About precut data (LENGTH) If you select the precut data (LENGTH), enter the feed speed and cut distance for every sequence to make a precut data. Procedures for writing the precut data (LENGTH) The following procedures for writing the precut data (LENGTH) are based on the precut conditions (example 3). Precut conditions (example 3) - Old blade start data SEQ : 5 - New blade start data SEQ: 1 - Step number to which a return is made from the old blade start data SEQ at the time of resuming precutting : 1 - Difference of cut depth compared with the previous cut work: 0 SEQ 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 Feed speed (mm/s) 10 20 30 40 50 60 70 80 90 100 110 120 130 140 150 Distance (m) 0.01 0.005 0.005 0.010 0.010 0.018 0.021 0.032 0.036 0.050 0.055 0.060 0.065 0.070 0.075

D-251

Procedures for writing the precut data (LENGTH) (Continued)


Step No.

2 3

Do This While the PRECUT DATA (LINE) screen [screen 6.1.1] is displayed, press the <F9> key. - The PRECUT DATA (LENGTH) screen [screen 6.1.1] then appears. - For the details of the PRECUT DATA (LENGTH) screen [screen 6.1.1], see below. Enter "ABC", the precut process ID in the column [3]. Enter "precut conditions (example 3)" data in the columns [4] [9]. Press the <ENTER> key. - The precut data entries are then finalized. - If the <EXIT> key is pressed without registering the data by the <ENTER> key, data entry will be invalid and the system returns to the PRECUT DATA LIST screen [screen 6.1].

PRECUT DATA (LENGTH) screen [screen 6.1.1] [Screen]


D I S C O D I C E R S E R I E S < DAD321 >YY-MM-DD [ ] 6.1.1 < PRECUT DATA > UNIT : [1] MM PRECUT DATA No. [2] 1 ID [3] ABC USED BLD FEED SPD SEQ [4] 5 /PRECUT SET DURING SEQ [5] 1 DECREASE NEW BLD FEED SPD SEQ [6] 1 /SET FOR WORK THICK GREATER [7] 0 mm SEQ SPEED DISTANCE SEQ SPEED DISTANCE 1 [8] 10.0 mm/s [9] 0.010 m 16 0.0 mm/s 0.0 m 2 20.0 mm/s 0.005 m 17 0.0 mm/s 0.0 m 3 30.0 mm/s 0.005 m 18 0.0 mm/s 0.0 m 4 40.0 mm/s 0.010 m 19 0.0 mm/s 0.0 m 5 50.0 mm/s 0.010 m 20 0.0 mm/s 0.0 m 6 60.0 mm/s 0.018 m 21 0.0 mm/s 0.0 m 7 70.0 mm/s 0.021 m 22 0.0 mm/s 0.0 m 8 80.0 mm/s 0.032 m 23 0.0 mm/s 0.0 m 9 90.0 mm/s 0.036 m 24 0.0 mm/s 0.0 m 10 100.0 mm/s 0.050 m 25 0.0 mm/s 0.0 m 11 110.0 mm/s 0.055 m 26 0.0 mm/s 0.0 m 12 120.0 mm/s 0.060 m 27 0.0 mm/s 0.0 m 13 130.0 mm/s 0.065 m 28 0.0 mm/s 0.0 m 14 140.0 mm/s 0.070 m 29 0.0 mm/s 0.0 m 15 150.0 mm/s 0.075 m 30 0.0 mm/s 0.0 m F1:SELECT F2: F3: F4: F5 : F6: F7: F8:ALL CLR F9:PRECUT(AUTO) F10:

[Setting Item]
Item No.

[1] [2] [3]

Descriptions Inch or mm is displayed. Switching between inch and mm can be effected by pressing the <F1> key. The precut process No. is displayed. The number cannot be changed from this screen. Enter the precut process ID. (18 characters maximum).

D-252

PRECUT DATA (LENGTH) screen [screen 6.1.1] (Continued) [Setting Item]


Item No.

[4]

[5]

[6]

[7]

[8] [9]

Descriptions Enter the precut start SEQ No. to be employed when an old blade is installed from the BLADE REPLACEMENT screen [screen 5.1]. This No. is applied to the precut sequence during cutting or auto-setup and precut process during kerf check. The default value is "1". If a precut operation is started again in the middle of the precut process, the precut speed is reduced by the value entered in column [5]. Enter the precut start SEQ No. to be employed when a new blade is installed from the BLADE REPLACEMENT screen [screen 5.1]. The default value is "1". When a difference of cut depth between the cut to start from now on and the previous one is greater than the value specified here, the machine automatically starts precut operation (SEQ No. to be employed was designated at [4]). - When you press <F9> (precut OFF) key to cancel precut during operation from BLADE LIFE/WEARNFORMATION screen [screen 5.6] or BLADE INFORMATION 2 screen, the setting entered here becomes invalid. Enter the feed speed to be precut. Enter the cut line counts to be cut at the feed speed specified in [8].

[Function Key] Press F1 F2 F3 F4 F5 F6 F7 F8 F9 F10 To Switch unit between inch and mm. Unused Unused Unused Unused Unused Unused Clear the entered precut process data. Call up the PRECUT DATA (AUTO) screen [screen 6.1.1]. Unused

D-253

4-3. Measure Function


About measure function The measure function enables you to measure a kerf width, index amount entered from DEVICE DATA 1 screen [screen 4.2] and like so on. When apparent kerf width or index are not available, you can obtain them by using this function without measurement equipment. Safety precautions for using the measure function

WARNING

- When the work is to be removed during measurement operation, if your fingers or hands are brought close to any moving part, they may be caught or cut off. Check to ensure that all axes stop and then remove the work. - If the <F2> key is pressed while the OPERATOR MAINTENANCE screen [screen 6.0] is displayed, the chuck table moves to the position under the microscope. If your fingers or hands are brought into any drive section, they may be caught or cut off. Do not insert them in the drive section. - If the <EXIT> key is pressed while the Y-AXIS MEASURE screen [screen 6.2] is displayed, the chuck table and microscope moves to their origin positions. If your fingers or hands are brought into any drive section, they may be caught or cut off. Do not insert them in the drive section. Procedures for using the measure function
Step No.

2 3

Do This Place the workpiece on the chuck table. - See the section D-2-3, [Placement of a Workpiece] of the Operation Manual. Check to ensure that chuck table vacuum system is ON. If not, turn it ON by pressing the <C/T VAC> key on the operation panel. With the OPERATOR MAINTENANCE screen [screen 6.0] displayed, press the <F2> key. - The chuck table moves to the position under the microscope. - The Y-AXIS MEASURE screen [screen 6.2] will appear. - For the details of the Y-AXIS MEASURE screen [screen 6.2], see the next page. Adjust the light intensity by the LAMP volume and focusing by the focus adjustment dial.

D-254

Procedures for using the measure function (Continued)


Step No.

6 7 8

Do This Press the <F5> key to accomplish alignment (except for 351). - For the details of alignment, see the section D-2-4-1, [Auto cutting] of the Operation Manual. Align the hairline with the first measurement point (such as street) by using the X and Y JOG keys. Press the <F3> key to clear the X and Y current positions to 0. Align the hairline with the next measurement point by using the X and Y JOG keys. - The Y-axis current position and the measured distance after zero-clear is displayed respectively in [5] and [7]. Press the <F4> key. - The measured distance after zero-clear is then saved into machine memory and displayed value in [7] are finalized.

- The step 5 through 7 describe the measurement procedures for Y-direction. - In the step 9, a single Y-index value was stored into machine memory. Note that this machine is capable recording up to 6 different values.

D-255

Y-AXIS MEASURE screen [screen 6.2] This screen is used to measure the index of X- or Y-direction and kerf width by using the microscope image and hairlines. [Screen]
D I S C O D I C E R S E R I E S < DAD321 >YY-MM-DD [ ] < Y-AXIS MEASURE > DEVICE DATA No. NOW IN : UNIT : [1] [2] [3] X-AXIS NOW POS. Y-AXIS NOW POS : : 6.2

[4] [5]

mm mm

F1:SELECT F6:INDEX ADJ

F2: F7:

X-AXIS INDEX Y-AXIS INDEX [1] [2] [3] [4] [5] [6] F3:0 CLEAR F4:INDEX SET F8: F9:

: : : : : : :

[6] [7]

mm mm mm mm mm mm mm F5 :ALIGN F10:LIGHT ADJ

[Setting Item]
Item No.

[1] [2] [3] [4] [5] [6] [7]

Descriptions Displays the current device data No. - The measured distance or width is captured into this device data. The current channel is displayed. The selected unit, inch/mm is displayed. Switching between inch/mm can be effected by using the <F1> key. The X direction current position relative to the 0 cleared position is displayed. The Y direction current position relative to the 0 cleared position is displayed. The movement distance in the X direction is displayed or set. (Only one setup data can be set.) The movement distance in the Y direction is displayed or set. (Up to 6 different setup data can be set.)

D-256

Y-AXIS MEASURE screen [screen 6.2] (Continued) [Function Key] Press F1 F2 F3 F4 F5 F6 To Effect switching unit between inch and mm. Unused Clear the current position display to 0. Register the measured distance values ([6]/[7]) as the index amount entries. Achieves automatic X-axis scanning and adjustment. If you press the <F6> key after executing index moves twice or more by pressing the <INDEX> key and then correcting the index stroke by pressing the Y-axis operation key, the machine will execute the following calculation. The machine automatically calculates the index stroke average based on the "index stroke + correction amount" and the number of times of index travel. Then it determines a single index length. Unused Automatically calculates and setup the average number of feeds when a scan correction is made at the time of indexing operation verification. Unused Call up the LIGHT ADJUSTMENT screen. --- 341/381 only ---

F7 F8

F9 F10

D-257

4-4. Function Data Maintenance


Summary of this section This section describes the function data maintenance in which the function pass*) setting and required definition for each function are made. In the function data maintenance, data managed by the machine alone and data for operational functions other than cutting are specified. The machine data should be setup immediately after machine installation. *) Function pass Function pass means to pass (go by) the particular processes such as alignment or cutting in compliance with equipment situations or operator requests. You can freely combine various functions depending on the process control requirements. Section No. Title 4-4-1 FUNCTION DATA MAINTENANCE 1 SCREEN [screen 6.3] 4-4-2 4-4-3 FUNCTION DATA MAINTENANCE 2 SCREEN [screen 6.3.3] PROGRAM DATA MAINTENANCE screen [screen 6.3.5]

D-258

4-4-1. FUNCTION DATA MAINTENANCE 1 SCREEN [screen 6.3]


Procedures for calling up the FUNCTION DATA MAINTENANCE 1 screen [screen 6.3]
Step No.

Do This With the OPERATOR MAINTENANCE screen [screen 6.0] displayed, press the <F3> key. - FUNCTION DATA MAINTENANCE 1 screen [screen 6.3] will appear. - For the details of the FUNCTION DATA MAINTENANCE 1 screen [screen 6.3], see below. - Note that the default values are displayed. Entry the data and then press the <ENTER> key. - The data is then setup. - If the <EXIT> key is pressed without registering the data by the <ENTER> key, data entry will be invalid and the system returns to the OPERATOR MAINTENANCE screen [screen 6.0].

FUNCTION DATA MAINTENANCE 1 screen [screen 6.3] This screen is used to specify the data managed by the machine alone and data for operational functions other than cutting. [Screen]
D I S C O D I C E R S E R I E S < DAD321 >YY-MM-DD [ ] < FUNCTION DATA MAINTENANCE 1 > UNIT : [1] MM 6.3

<< FUNCTION YESorNO >> CUT NONCONTACT SETUP B.B.D ALIGNMENT

: : : :

[2]YES [3]NO [4]NO [5]NO

GREASE MENTENANCE Ax. AUTO TRACE( Y) SPINDLE IDLING TIME SCREEN SAVER

: : : :

[6]NO [7]NO [8] 0 min [9] 300 s

KEEP WET MOVE SET : [10]NO KERF CHECK WET MOVE : [11]NO SETTING DATA X-AXIS STROKE : [12] 0.0000 mm X-AXIS INDEX : [13] 0.0000 X-AXIS SPEED : [14] 0.00 mm/s Y-AXIS SPEED :[15] 0.00 CYCLE : [16] 0 TIMES

mm mm/s

F1:SELECT F6:

F2: F7:

F3:FUNC DATA2 F8:

F4: F9:

F5 :WATER PROG F10:

D-259

FUNCTION DATA MAINTENANCE 1 screen [screen 6.3] (Continued) [Setting Item]


Item No.

[1] [2]

[3]

[4]

[5]

[6]

Descriptions Indicates the selected unit (inch/mm) for function data setting. Use the <F1> key to effect inch/mm changeover. Specify whether or not to perform cutting Use the <F1> key to choose between YES/NO. NO Does not perform the cutting process. YES Performs the cutting process. Specify whether or not to exercise the noncontact setup function. Use the <F1> key to choose between YES/NO. [Optional accessory] NO Does not perform the noncontact setup process. YES Performs the noncontact setup process. Specify whether or not to exercise the blade breakage detection function. Use the <F1> key to choose between YES/NO. [Optional accessory] NO Does not perform the blade breakage detection process. YES Performs the blade breakage detection process. Specify whether or not to exercise the auto-alignment function. Use the <F1> key to choose between YES/NO. - This entry can be made only when the auto-alignment function is incorporated. [Special specification] NO Does not perform alignment process. YES Performs the alignment process. Specify whether or not to move the X-, Y-, Z- and -axes to both of their respective ends upon completion of initialization in order to lubricate grease to axes. The X-, Y- and -axes reciprocate once and Z-axis does twice. Use the <F1> key to choose between YES/NO. NO Does not perform the above indicated operation. YES Performs the above indicated operation.

D-260

FUNCTION DATA MAINTENANCE 1 screen [screen 6.3] (Continued) [Setting Item]


Item No.

[7]

[8]

[9]

[10]

[11]

[12]

[13]

[14]

Descriptions When a street alignment is performed with a binocular microscope using -JOG key, specify whether or not to operate the Y-axis so that the Y-axis traces the -axis (axis auto tracing function) for the purpose of preventing a street from moving off the screen. Use the <F1> key to choose between YES/NO. - Unless the chuck table center is located on the center of the binocular microscope lenses, proper operation is not performed. NO Does not perform the above indicated operation. YES Performs the above indicated operation. Specify whether the setup and cutting operation can be initiated immediately or any operation cannot be performed except for idling, when the spindle turns ON again after at least 10 minutes has elapsed after last power OFF or spindle OFF. Enter zero You can initiate the setup and cutting operation immediately. Enter the value Any operation other than idling cannot be other than zero performed for the specified period of time. When no operations are performed for the period of time (seconds) entered here, the screen brightness automatically lowers to save the monitor screen from "burn in". Specify whether or not to make the workpiece wet with water on the cutting stage (keep wet function) by operating X- and Y-axis after completion of cutting. NO Does not perform the keep wet function. YES Performs the keep wet function. If an operator call is made or an error occurs during kerf check while YES is chosen here, the X- and Y-axis operates to make the workpiece wet with water on the cutting stage until the <ALARM CLR> key is pressed. Use the <F1> key to choose between YES/NO. NO Does not perform the keep wet function. YES Performs the keep wet function. Enter the X-axis stroke length in the keep wet operation specified in [10] and [11]. If zero is specified, the X-axis moves within the workpiece area predefined on the DEVICE DATA 1 screen [screen 4.2]. Enter the single stroke length of the X-axis in the keep wet operation specified in [10] and [11]. If zero is specified, the X-axis moves by 10mm. Enter the X-axis speed in the keep wet operation specified in [10] and [11]. If zero is specified, the X-axis moves at 20mm/sec.
D-261

FUNCTION DATA MAINTENANCE 1 screen [screen 6.3] (Continued) [Setting Item]


Item No.

[15]

[16]

Descriptions Enter the Y-axis speed in the keep wet operation specified in [10] and [11]. If zero is specified, the Y-axis moves at a high-speed predefined on the OPERATION DATA MAINTENANCE screen [screen 6.4]. Enter the number of repetition cycles of the keep wet operation specified in [10] and [11]. If zero is specified, the machine repeats the operation until the <START/STOP> key is pressed.

[Function Key] Press F1 F2 F3 F4 F5 F6 F7 F8 F9 F10 To Effect inch/mm display or function selection changeover. Unused Call up the FUNCTION DATA MAINTENANCE screen [screen 6.3.3]. Unused Call up the PROGRAM DATA MAINTENANCE screen [screen 6.3.5]. Unused Unused Unused Unused Unused

D-262

4-4-2. FUNCTION DATA MAINTENANCE 2 SCREEN [screen 6.3.3]


Procedures for calling up the FUNCTION DATA MAINTENANCE 2 screen [screen 6.3.3]
Step No.

Do This With the FUNCTION DATA MAINTENANCE 1 screen [screen 6.3] displayed, press the <F3> key. - FUNCTION DATA MAINTENANCE 2 screen [screen 6.3.3] will appear. - For the details of the FUNCTION DATA MAINTENANCE 2 screen [screen 6.3.3], see below. - Note that the default values are displayed. Entry the data and then press the <ENTER> key. - The data is then setup. - If the <EXIT> key is pressed without registering the data by the <ENTER> key, data entry will be invalid and the system returns to the FUNCTION DATA MAINTENANCE 1 screen [screen 6.3]

FUNCTION DATA MAINTENANCE 2 screen [screen 6.3.3] [Screen]


D I S C O D I C E R S E R I E S < DAD321 >YY-MM-DD [ ] 6.3.3 < FUNCTION DATA MAINTENANCE 2 > UNIT : [1] MM [3] YES [5] YES

ALIGNMENT START/CUTTING END AXIS MOVE : [2] YES/ C/T VACUUM ON/OFF AXIS MOVE : [4] YES/

<< ALIGNMENT START SETTING (VACUUM ON) >> X-AXIS : [6]PROG ( RUN SPEED : [7] 50.00 mm/s Y-AXIS : [8]ALIGN ( 'USER' SETTING : [9] 0.0000 mm -AXIS : [10]ALIGN

) )

<< CUTTING END SETTING (VACUUM OFF) >> FULL AUTO SEMI AUTO X-AXIS(CUT/VAC) : [11]SCOPE / [12]HOME [13]SCOPE / [14]HOME RUN SPEED : [15] 50.00 mm/s [16]50.00 mm/s Y-AXIS(CUT/VAC) : [17]ALIGN / [18]USER [19] NO / [20]USER 'USER'SETTING : [21]-80.000 mm [22]-80.000 mm -AXIS(CUT/VAC) : [23] ALIGN / [24]HOME [25] NO / [26]HOME F1:SELECT F2:FUNC DATA1 F3: F4: F5 : F6: F7: F8: F9: F10:

D-263

FUNCTION DATA MAINTENANCE 2 screen [screen 6.3.3] (Continued) [Setting Item]


Item No.

[1] [2]

[3]

[4]

[5]

[6]

[7]

Descriptions Indicates the selected unit (inch/mm) for function data setting. Use the <F1> key to effect changeover. Specify whether or not to invoke axis operations at the beginning of alignment. Use the <F1> key to choose between YES/NO. NO Invokes no axis operations. YES Operates the axes in accordance with data entry [6] [10]. Specify whether or not to invoke axis operations at the end of alignment. Use the <F1> key to choose between YES/NO. NO Invokes no axis operations. YES Operates the axes in accordance with data entry [6] [10]. Specify whether or not to invoke axis operations when pressing the <C/T VAC> key turns ON the vacuum system. Use the <F1> key to choose between YES/NO. NO Invokes no axis operations. YES Operates the axes in accordance with data entry [6] [10]. Specify whether or not to invoke axis operations when the vacuum system is turned OFF by pressing the <C/T VAC> key. Use the <F1> key to choose between YES/NO. NO Invokes no axis operations. YES Operates the axes in accordance with data entry [6] [10]. Specify the position to which the X-axis moves upon vacuum ON. SCOPE Moves the X-axis to a location beneath the microscope. HOME Moves the X-axis to its origin. PROG Moves the X-axis to the alignment start position. Specify the speed at which the X-axis moves to the position defined by [6]. - If the value 0.00 mm/s is entered, the X-axis does not move.

D-264

FUNCTION DATA MAINTENANCE 2 screen [screen 6.3.3] (Continued) [Setting Item]


Item No.

[8]

[9]

[10]

[11]

[12]

[13]

[14]

Descriptions Specify the position to which the Y-axis moves upon vacuum ON. NO Does not move the Y-axis. USER Moves the Y-axis to the position defined by [9]. ALIGN Moves the Y-axis to the previous channel 1 alignment position. Specify the position to which the Y-axis moves when USER is selected for [8]. - If the value 0.0 mm is entered, the Y-axis moves to its origin position. Specify the position to which the -axis moves upon vacuum ON. NO Moves the -axis to the designated position only when its rotation angle is specified from the DEVICE DATA 2 screen. HOME Moves the -axis to its origin. ALIGN Moves the -axis to the previous channel 1 alignment position. Specify the position to which the X-axis moves at the end of auto cutting. SCOPE Moves the X-axis to a location beneath the microscope. HOME Moves the X-axis to its origin. PROG Moves the X-axis to the alignment start position. Specify the position to which the X-axis moves upon vacuum OFF in auto cutting. SCOPE Moves the X-axis to a location beneath the microscope. HOME Moves the X-axis to its origin. PROG Moves the X-axis to the alignment start position. Specify the position to which the X-axis moves at the end of semi auto cutting. SCOPE Moves the X-axis to a location beneath the microscope. HOME Moves the X-axis to its origin. PROG Moves the X-axis to the alignment start position. Specify the position to which the X-axis moves upon vacuum OFF in semi auto cutting. SCOPE Moves the X-axis to a location beneath the microscope. HOME Moves the X-axis to its origin. PROG Moves the X-axis to the alignment start position.

D-265

FUNCTION DATA MAINTENANCE 2 screen [screen 6.3.3] (Continued) [Setting Item]


Item No.

[15]

[16]

[17]

[18]

[19]

[20]

[21] [22]

Descriptions Specify the speed at which the X-axis moves to the position defined by [11]. - If zero is entered, the X-axis does not move. Specify the speed at which the X-axis moves to the position defined by [13]. - If zero is entered, the X-axis does not move. Specify the position to which the Y-axis moves at the end of auto cutting. NO Does not move the Y-axis. USER Moves the Y-axis to the position defined by [21]. ALIGN Moves the Y-axis to the previous channel 1 alignment position. Specify the position to which the Y-axis moves upon vacuum OFF in auto cutting. NO Does not move the Y-axis. USER Moves the Y-axis to the position defined by [21]. ALIGN Moves the Y-axis to the previous channel 1 alignment position. Specify the position to which the Y-axis moves at the end of auto cutting. NO Does not move the Y-axis. USER Moves the Y-axis to the position defined by [22]. ALIGN Moves the Y-axis to the previous channel 1 alignment position. Specify the position to which the Y-axis moves upon vacuum OFF in auto cutting. NO Does not move the Y-axis. USER Moves the Y-axis to the position defined by [22]. ALIGN Moves the Y-axis to the previous channel 1 alignment position. Specify the position to which the Y-axis moves when USER is selected for [18]. Specify the position to which the Y-axis moves when USER is selected for [20].

D-266

FUNCTION DATA MAINTENANCE 2 screen [screen 6.3.3] (Continued) [Setting Item]


Item No.

[23]

Descriptions Specify the position to which the -axis moves upon auto cutting completion. NO Does not move the -axis. HOME Moves the -axis to its origin. Moves the -axis to the previous channel 1 alignment position. Specify the position to which the -axis moves upon vacuum OFF in auto cutting. NO Does not move the -axis. HOME Moves the -axis to its origin. ALIGN Moves the -axis to the previous channel 1 alignment position. Specify the position to which the -axis moves upon semi auto cutting completion. NO Does not move the -axis. HOME Moves the -axis to its origin. ALIGN Moves the -axis to the previous channel 1 alignment position. Specify the position to which the -axis moves upon vacuum OFF in semi auto cutting. NO Does not move the -axis. HOME Moves the -axis to its origin. ALIGN ALIGN Moves the -axis to the previous channel 1 alignment position.

[24]

[25]

[26]

[Function Key] Press F1 F2 F3 F4 F5 F6 F7 F8 F9 F10 To Effect inch/mm and function selection changeover. Call up the FUNCTION DATA MAINTENANCE 1 screen [screen 6.3]. Unused Unused Unused Unused Unused Unused Unused Unused

D-267

4-4-3. PROGRAM DATA MAINTENANCE screen [screen 6.3.5]


Procedures for calling up the PROGRAM DATA MAINTENANCE screen [screen 6.3.5]
Step No.

Do This With the FUNCTION DATA MAINTENANCE 1 screen [screen 6.3] displayed, press the <F5> key. - PROGRAM DATA MAINTENANCE screen [screen 6.3.5] will appear. - For the details of the PROGRAM DATA MAINTENANCE screen [screen 6.3.5], see below. Entry the data and then press the <ENTER> key. - The data is then setup. - If the <EXIT> key is pressed without registering the data by the <ENTER> key, data entry will be invalid and the system returns to the FUNCTION DATA MAINTENANCE 1 screen [screen 6.3].

PROGRAM DATA MAINTENANCE screen [screen 6.3.5] This screen is used to specify to automatically turn ON/OFF water or air in various conditions. - To effect ON/OFF changeover for on screen data setup, use the <F1> key. ON : Starts the supply of water or air automatically. OFF: Stops the supply of water or air automatically. [Screen]
D I S C O D I C E R S E R I E S < DAD321 >YY-MM-DD [ ] < PROGRAM DATA MAINTENANCE > 6.3.5

IDLING ALIGNMENT CUTTING CUT_PAUSE KERF_CHECK ----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------CUT WATER : [1] [4] ON(FIXED) [9] [12] AIR CURTAIN : [2] [5] [7] [10] [13] WATER CURTAIN : [3] [6] [8] [11] [14]

F1:SELECT F6:

F2: F7:

F3: F8:

F4: F9:

F5 : F10:

D-268

PROGRAM DATA MAINTENANCE screen [screen 6.3.5] (Continued) [Setting Item]


Item No.

[1] [2] [3] [4] [5] [6] [7] [8] [9] [10] [11] [12]

[13]

[14]

Descriptions Effect ON/OFF changeover for the wheel coolant water during idling. Effect ON/OFF changeover for the air curtain during idling. [Special specification] Effect ON/OFF changeover for the water curtain during idling. [Special specification] Effect ON/OFF changeover for the wheel coolant water during alignment. Effect ON/OFF changeover for the air curtain during alignment. [Special specification] Effect ON/OFF changeover for the water curtain during alignment. [Special specification] Effect ON/OFF changeover for the air curtain during cutting. [Special specification] Effect ON/OFF changeover for the water curtain during cutting. [Special specification] Effect ON/OFF changeover for the wheel coolant water while the cutting process is at a pause. Effect ON/OFF changeover for the air curtain while the cutting process is at a pause. [Special specification] Effect ON/OFF changeover for the water curtain while the cutting process is at a pause. [Special specification] Effect ON/OFF changeover for the wheel coolant water during kerf check. - These data entries can be made only when the kerf check function [optional accessory] is incorporated. Effect ON/OFF changeover for the air curtain during kerf check. - These data entries can be made only when the kerf check function [optional accessory] is incorporated. [Special specification] Effect ON/OFF changeover for the water curtain during kerf check. - These data entries can be made only when the kerf check function [optional accessory] is incorporated. [Special specification]

D-269

PROGRAM DATA MAINTENANCE screen [screen 6.3.5] (Continued) [Function Key] Press F1 F2 F3 F4 F5 F6 F7 F8 F9 F10 To Effect ON/OFF changeover. Unused Unused Unused Unused Unused Unused Unused Unused Unused

D-270

4-5. Operation Data Maintenance


Procedures for calling up the OPERATION DATA MAINTENANCE screen [screen 6.4]
Step No.

Do This With the OPERATOR MAINTENANCE screen [screen 6.0] displayed, press the <F4> key. - OPERATION DATA MAINTENANCE screen [screen 6.4] will appear. - For the details of the OPERATION DATA MAINTENANCE screen [screen 6.4], see below. - Note that the default values are displayed. Entry the data and then press the <ENTER> key. - The data is then setup. - If the <EXIT> key is pressed without registering the data by the <ENTER> key, data entry will be invalid and the system returns to the OPERATOR MAINTENANCE screen [screen 6.0].

OPERATION DATA MAINTENANCE screen [screen 6.4] This screen is used to specify or change the scanning speed or other items for each axis. [Screen]
D I S C O D I C E R S E R I E S < DAD321 >YY-MM-DD [ ] < OPERATION DATA MAINTENANCE > UNIT : [1] MM 6.4

<< AXIS MOVE CREATION >> JOG MODE: [2] NORMAL AXIS 1Pulse Move Low Speed High Speed X [3] 0.001000 mm [4] 5.00 mm/s [5] 10.00 m/s Y [6] 0.001000 mm [7] 1.00 mm/s [8] 10.00 mm/s Z [9] 0.001000 mm [10] 1.00 mm/s [11] 10.00 mm/s [12] 0.001000 [13] 5.00 /s [14] 30.00 /s JOG MODE 'NORMAL' AT SLOW KEY REVERSE : [15] NORMAL SCAN MOVE TIME (LO/HI SPEED) : [16] 3 s / [16] 2 s << CLEARANCE CREATION >> X-AXIS [17] 5.0000 mm Y-AXIS [18] 1.0000 mm << ETC. >> Z-AXIS ESCAPE AMOUNT [19]1.0000 mm Z-AXIS EXTRA ESCAPE AMOUNT [20]0.0000 mm DEVICE DATA MAX SPEED [21]300.00 mm/s CUT LINE AFTER ZEM [22] NEXT BLADE WEAR ADJUSTMENT SELECT [23] YES F1:SELECT F2: F3: F4: F 5: F6: F7: F8: F9: F10:

D-271

OPERATION DATA MAINTENANCE screen [screen 6.4] (Continued) [Setting Item]


Item No.

[1] [2]

[3] [4] [5] [6] [7] [8] [9] [10] [11] [12] [13] [14] [15]

Descriptions Indicates the selected unit of measure (inch/mm). Use the <F1> key to effect inch/mm changeover. Indicates the selected JOG key operation setup mode. Use the <F1> key to choose between NORMAL/SCAN. NORMAL Setting [3] [14] can be entered as desired. SCAN The X-, Y-, Z- and -axes single-pulse motor rotation amount and standard scanning speed and the Z-axis low scanning speed can be set as desired. Applicable data entries are [3][5][6][8][9][10][11][12][14]. Enter the amount of X-axis movement to be invoked by a single JOG key press. Enter the low scanning speed for the X-axis. Enter the standard scanning speed for the X-axis. Enter the amount of Y-axis movement to be invoked by a single JOG key press. Enter the low scanning speed for the Y-axis. Enter the standard scanning speed for the Y-axis. Enter the amount of Z-axis movement to be invoked by a single JOG key press. Enter the low scanning speed for the Z-axis. Enter the standard scanning speed for the Z-axis. Enter the amount of -axis movement to be invoked by a single JOG key press. Enter the low scanning speed for the -axis. Enter the standard scanning speed for the -axis. Define the SLOW key function to be exercised in the <NORMAL> JOG mode. Use the <F1> key to choose between NORMAL/REVERSE. NORMAL When the SLOW key is turned ON, the X-, Y-, Zand -axes operate at low speed. REVERSE When the SLOW key is turned ON, the X-, Y-, Zand -axes operate at high speed. Enter the operation periods of time in the <SCAN> JOG mode. The X-, Y- and -axes scanning speed changes from low medium high at preselected intervals. - When the <SLOW> key is pressed, the type of operation changes to screen indexing (SCR-IDX).

[16]

D-272

OPERATION DATA MAINTENANCE screen [screen 6.4] (Continued) [Setting Item]


Item No.

[17] [18] [19] [20]

[21] [22]

[23]

Descriptions Specify the X-direction cutting allowance width for a workpiece. Specify the Y-direction cutting allowance width for a workpiece. Specify the amount of Z-axis escape from the work thickness. Specify the Z-axis escape amount to be used to jump over the frame when the height of the frame is greater than that of the work on the chuck table. Enter the upper-limit feed speed that can be selected from the device data screens. Specify the cutting start position after Z/EM recovery. Use the <F1> key to choose between NEXT/SAME. NEXT Resume a cutting operation at the line next to the one at which the previous cutting operation was stopped by Z/EM function execution. SAME Resume a cutting operation at the line at which the previous cutting operation was stopped by Z/EM function execution. Perform blade wear compensation function setup. Use the <F1> key to choose between YES/NO. Data entry in this column can be made only when the cutting mode is AS, BS, AS_UP or BS_ZKEEP. NO Operates based on the blade wear compensation amount defined by DEVICE DATA 1 screen [screen 4.2]. YES Operates based on the blade wear compensation amount defined by DEVICE DATA 2 screen [screen 4.3] and DEVICE DATA 3 screen [screen 4.4].

[Function Key] Press F1 F2 F3 F4 F5 F6 F7 F8 F9 F10 To Effect input changeover for respective on-screen items. Unused Unused Unused Unused Unused Unused Unused Unused Unused

D-273

4-6. Signal Tower Data Maintenance


Procedures for calling up the SIGNAL TOWER DATA MAINTENANCE screen [screen 6.5]
Step No.

2 3

Do This With the OPERATOR MAINTENANCE screen [screen 6.0] displayed, press the <F5> key. - SIGNAL TOWER DATA MAINTENANCE screen [screen 6.5] will appear. - For the details of the SIGNAL TOWER DATA MAINTENANCE screen [screen 6.5], see below. - Note that the default values are displayed. Entry the data and then press the <ENTER> key. - The data is then setup. When the <EXIT> key is depressed, the system returns to the OPERATOR MAINTENANCE screen [screen 6.0]. - If the <EXIT> key is pressed without registering the data by the <ENTER> key, data entry will be invalid and the system returns to the OPERATOR MAINTENANCE screen [screen 6.0].

SIGNAL TOWER DATA MAINTENANCE screen [screen 6.5] This screen is used for signal tower spec setup and change. The on-screen data in the "2. ALARM" cannot be edited. It is provided here just for display purposes. [Screen]
D I S C O D I C E R S E R I E S < DAD321 >YY-MM-DD [ ] < SIGNAL TOWER DATA MAINTENANCE > 6.5

CONDITION BUZ1 BUZ2 BUZ3 RED YEL GRE OP1 OP2 ----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------1.IDLE [1]0 [2]0 [3]0 [4]0 [5]1 [6]0 [7]0 [8]0 2.ALARM 1 0 0 4 0 0 0 0 3.CUTTING 0 0 0 0 0 1 0 0 4.ALIGNMENT 0 0 0 0 0 2 0 0 5.CUTTING PAUSE 0 0 0 0 4 0 0 0 6.OTHERS 0 0 0 0 1 0 0 0 7.COMP. PROCESS 1 0 0 0 2 0 0 0 8.OPERATOR CALL 1 0 0 0 2 0 0 0 9.USER DEFINE. 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 SET 0 1 2 3 : : : : OFF ON RAPID FLICKER(200ms) FAST FLICKER (500ms) 4 : MID FLICKER (1s) 5 : SLOW FLICKER (2s) 6 : [9] 1000 ms CYCLE FLICKER

D-274

SIGNAL TOWER DATA MAINTENANCE screen [screen 6.5] (Continued) [Machine condition] No. Condition 1 IDLE Contents State in which no particular operation is being performed after power ON or system initialization. ALARM State in which an error has occurred. Only the buzzer can be OFF by pressing the <ALRM CLR> key during error recovery. For the signal tower, however, the red light remains ON until the error recovery procedure is completed. CUTTING Cutting is in progress. ALIGNMENT Alignment is in progress. CUTTING PAUSE Cutting is at pause. OTHERS Setup, dressing, conditioning and other operations are in progress. COMP. PROCESS (Complete of process) End of cutting operation. OPERATOR CALL State in which OPERATOR or CALL is designated for kerf check and auto-setup. USER DEFINE. Special specification. This is not used now.

3 4 5 6 7 8 9

[Setting Item]
Item No.

[1]

[2] [3] [4] [5] [6] [7] [8] [9]

Descriptions Specify the buzzer ON/OFF setting. - Selecting ON sounds the buzzer when an error occurs. When the <ALRM CLR> key is pressed, the buzzer is OFF and the signal tower lamp color is changed. - Selecting OFF does not sound the buzzer when an error occurs. When the <ALRM CLR> key is pressed, the signal tower lamp color is changed. Provided for future function extension as special specification. Data entries in these columns do not take effect now. Provided for future function extension as special specification. Data entries in these columns do not take effect now. Specify the red indicator lamp status by entering numerics. Specify the yellow indicator lamp status by entering numerics. Specify the green indicator lamp status by entering numerics. Provided for future function extension as special specification. Data entries in these columns do not take effect now. Provided for future function extension as special specification. Data entries in these columns do not take effect now. Specify the buzzer sound and indicator lamp blinking interval.

D-275

4-7. Alignment Data Maintenance


Procedures for calling up the ALIGNMENT DATA MAINTENANCE screen [screen 6.6]
Step No.

2 3

Do This With the OPERATOR MAINTENANCE screen [screen 6.0] displayed, press the <F6> key. - ALIGNMENT DATA MAINTENANCE screen [screen 6.6] will appear. - For the details of the ALIGNMENT DATA MAINTENANCE screen [screen 6.6], see the next page. - Note that the default values are displayed. Entry the data and then press the <ENTER> key. - The data is then setup. When the <EXIT> key is depressed, the system returns to the OPERATOR MAINTENANCE screen [screen 6.0]. - If the <EXIT> key is pressed without registering the data by the <ENTER> key, data entry will be invalid and the system returns to the OPERATOR MAINTENANCE screen [screen 6.0].

D-276

ALIGNMENT DATA MAINTENANCE screen [screen 6.6] This screen is used to specify and modify the alignment-related data. - Data entries [3][4][5] can be made only when the auto alignment function [special specification] is incorporated. [Screen]
D I S C O D I C E R S E R I E S < DAD321 >YY-MM-DD [ ] < ALIGNMENT DATA MAINTENANCE > MICRO SCOPE MAG.(L/R) CCD SIZE (L/R) ALU WAITING TIME SPIRAL CHECK Q MARGIN PERMISSION CH TO CH MS CENTER POSTION(X,Y) PIXEL SIZE (L/R) LIGHT LEVEL def.(DIR/OBL) LIGHT LEVEL adj.(DIR/OBL) by TARGET RETRY by TARGET RETRY LINE : : : : : : : : : : : [1] 5.000 [2] 7500 [3] 200 [4] 20 [5] 0.050 [6] 60.000 [8] 1500 [9] 50 [11] 0 [13] [14] 6.6

/ 5.000 nm / 7500 nm ms % mm, [7] 2.500 mm nm / 1500 nm % / [10] 50 % % / [12] 0 %

0 Times 0

[Setting Item]
Item No.

[1] [2] [3]

Descriptions Specify the right and left microscope magnification. Specify the right and left CCD camera pixel size. Specify the wait time between alignment operation target recognition and next search initiation. A setting of 200 ms should normally be entered. - This setup provides against an on-screen image tremor which may be caused by X-axis servomotor drive. [Special specification]

D-277

ALIGNMENT DATA MAINTENANCE screen [screen 6.6] (Continued) [Setting Item]


Item No.

[4]

[5]

[6]

[7]

[8] [9] [10]

[11] [12]

[13]

[14]

Descriptions Specify the allowance for spiral check threshold value judgment in alignment teach. - The device data Q value plus the safety margin will be used for pattern searching. The Q value minus the safety margin will be used for checking whether there is a similar pattern. - Example Alignment data threshold value: 50% Spiral check safety margin : 20% If a Q level of 30 % (50 20) or higher is recognized in spiral check, it is necessary to conduct teaching again. [Special specification] Specify the permissible movement limit for channel switching. A setting of 0.050 should normally be entered. - If this limit is exceeded in channel switching, a message "A537 Inter-channel angle value error" appears. [Special specification] Displays the X-direction absolute position of the rotation axis. This position is automatically updated according to rotation axis alignment. Displays the Y-direction absolute position of the rotation axis. This position is automatically updated according to rotation axis alignment. Enter the size of one pixel (right and left). Enter the microscope initial light intensity of direct light which prevails when turning ON the machine. --- 341/381 only --Enter the microscope initial light intensity of oblique light which prevails when turning ON the machine. [Optional accessory --- 341/381 only ---] These entries compensate for direct light intensity differences between individual units of the machine. --- 341/381 only --These entries compensate for oblique light intensity differences between individual units of the machine. [Optional accessory --- 341/381 only ---] When the machine fails to recognize a target during kerf check, a target error occurs. In this case, the machine retries kerf check after cutting lines by the number designated at [14]. Specify here the number of retry times. If zero is specified at [14], this option does not function. [Optional accessory] When retrying kerf check by the number of times designated at [13], the machine cuts lines by the number specified here before next kerf check, after error occurrence. If zero is specified at [13], this option does not function. [Optional accessory]

D-278

4-8. External Memory Device [Optional Accessory]


Summary of this section In cases where two or more machines are to be operated, if you use the external memory device [optional accessory], you can make effective use of device data (except for alignment data) that were stored in each machine's memory. As an external memory device, the floppy disk can be used for data management of this machine. Section No. Title 4-8-1 EXTERNAL MEMORY UNIT screen [screen 6.7] 4-8-2 FORMAT (FLOPPY DISKETTE) screen [screen 6.7.1] DEVICE DATA LOAD screen [screen 6.7.2] Contents - EXTERNAL MEMORY UNIT screen [screen 6.7] to manage setup data using a floppy disk - FORMAT (FLOPPY DISKETTE) screen [screen 6.7.1] to format a floppy disk - DEVICE DATA LOAD screen [screen 6.7.2] to load the device data saved in a floppy disk onto the machine memory - DEVICE DATA SAVE screen [screen 6.7.3] to save the device data stored in the machine memory onto a floppy disk - DEVICE DATA DELETE screen [screen 6.7.4] to delete the device data saved in a floppy disk - PRECUT DATA LOAD screen [screen 6.7.5] to load the precut data saved in a floppy disk onto the machine memory - PRECUT DATA SAVE screen [screen 6.7.6] to save the precut data stored in the machine memory onto a floppy disk - Batch processing to install the special specification software - Function to save backup copies of the machine specific data stored in the machine memory in a floppy disk

4-8-3

4-8-4

DEVICE DATA SAVE screen [screen 6.7.3]

4-8-5

DEVICE DATA DELETE screen [screen 6.7.4] PRECUT DATA LOAD screen [screen 6.7.5]

4-8-6

4-8-7

PRECUT DATA SAVE screen [screen 6.7.6]

4-8-8 4-8-9

Auto batch execution Machine data backup function

D-279

Summary of this section (Continued) Section No. Title 4-8-10 Machine data restoring function 4-8-11 Device data exchange Contents - Function to restore the machine specific data saved in a floppy disk onto the machine memory - Conversion function of the device data for 3*0 series to the one for 3*1 series

D-280

4-8-1. EXTERNAL MEMORY UNIT screen [screen 6.7]


EXTERNAL MEMORY UNIT screen [screen 6.7] function By using a floppy disk as an external memory device, you can manage effectively the device data or precut data (except for alignment data) that are saved in individual machine memory, as a set of data, in the situation where more than one machines are operated. - Use a 3.5 inch 2HD floppy disk for this purpose. Procedures for calling up the EXTERNAL MEMORY UNIT screen [screen 6.7]
Step No.

Do This With the OPERATOR MAINTENANCE screen [screen 6.0] displayed, press the <F7> key. - EXTERNAL MEMORY UNIT screen [screen 6.7] will appear. - For the details of the EXTERNAL MEMORY UNIT screen [screen 6.7], see below.

EXTERNAL MEMORY UNIT screen [screen 6.7] [Screen]


D I S C O D I C E R S E R I E S < DAD321 >YY-MM-DD [ ] < EXTERNAL MEMORY UNIT > F1. F2. F3. F4. F5. F6. F7. F8. F9. FLOPPY DISK FORMAT DEVICE DATA LOAD DEVICE DATA SAVE DEVICE DATA DELETE PRECUT DATA LOAD PRECUT DATA SAVE RUN BATCH FILE MACHINE DATA BACK-UP MACHINE DATA RESTORE ( FD ) 6.7

( FD M/C ) ( M/C FD ) ( FD )

( FD M/C ) ( M/C FD ) ( FD )

( M/C FD ) ( FD M/C )

F10. DEVICE DATA CONVERSION ( 3 0 3 1 )

D-281

EXTERNAL MEMORY UNIT screen [screen 6.7] (Continued) [Function Key] Press F1 F2 F3 F4 F5 F6 F7 F8 F9 F10 To Call up the FORMAT (FLOPPY DISKETTE) screen [screen 6.7.1]. Call up the DEVICE DATA LOAD screen [screen 6.7.2]. Call up the DEVICE DATA SAVE screen [screen 6.7.3]. Call up the DEVICE DATA DELETE screen [screen 6.7.4]. Call up the PRECUT DATA LOAD screen [screen 6.7.5]. Call up the PRECUT DATA SAVE screen [screen 6.7.6]. Perform the batch processing to upgrade the software. Backup the entire machine data onto a floppy disk. Load the entire machine data saved on a floppy disk onto the machine memory. Convert the device data which was used for 3*0 series machine to the one for 3*1 machine.

D-282

4-8-2. FORMAT (FLOPPY DISKETTE) screen [screen 6.7.1]


FORMAT (FLOPPY DISKETTE) screen [screen 6.7.1] function FORMAT (FLOPPY DISKETTE) screen [screen 6.7.1] is used to format a floppy disk. Procedures for formatting a floppy disk Format a floppy disk.
Step No.

2 3

Do This With the EXTERNAL MEMORY UNIT screen [screen 6.7] displayed, press the <F1> key. - FORMAT (FLOPPY DISKETTE) screen [screen 6.7.1] will appear. - For the details of the FORMAT (FLOPPY DISKETTE) screen [screen 6.7.1], see the next page. Select the format mode (1.25 Mbyte /1.44 Mbyte) by pressing the <F1> key. Press the <ENTER> key. - Format is executed. - Only the <EMO> switch is accepted during format. - The progress of format is graphically displayed. - If the <EXIT> key is pressed while no format is in progress, the system returns to the EXTERNAL MEMORY UNIT screen [screen 6.7].

D-283

FORMAT (FLOPPY DISKETTE) screen [screen 6.7.1] This screen is used for formatting a floppy disk. [Screen]
D I S C O D I C E R S E R I E S < DAD321 >YY-MM-DD [ ] < FORMAT (FLOPPY DISKETTE) > 6.7.1

50

100 [%]

Press F1 key to choice FD format mode.(1.25,1.44Mbyte) Press ENTER key begin FD format by (1.25 Mbyte) mode.

F1:SELECT F6:

F2: F7:

F3: F8:

F4: F9:

F5 : F10:

[Function Key] Press F1 F2 F3 F4 F5 F6 F7 F8 F9 F10 To Effect format mode changeover between 1.25 Mbyte and 1.44 Mbyte. Unused Unused Unused Unused Unused Unused Unused Unused Unused

D-284

4-8-3. DEVICE DATA LOAD screen [screen 6.7.2]


DEVICE DATA LOAD screen [screen 6.7.2] function DEVICE DATA LOAD screen [screen 6.7.2] is used to load the device data that are saved in a floppy disk onto the machine memory. Procedures for loading the device data Load the device data saved on a floppy disk to the machine memory.
Step No.

2 3 4

Do This With the EXTERNAL MEMORY UNIT screen [screen 6.7] displayed, press the <F2> key. - DEVICE DATA LOAD screen [screen 6.7.2] will appear. - For the details of the DEVICE DATA LOAD screen [screen 6.7.2], see the next page. Press the <F1> or <F6> key to locate the target device No. and confirm data. Enter the target device No. in the entry position [3] and device ID in [4]. Press the <F5> or <F10> key. The machine will carry out device data loading. - Only the <EMO> switch is accepted during loading. - If the <EXIT> key is pressed while no loading is in progress, the system returns to the EXTERNAL MEMORY UNIT screen [screen 6.7]. <F5> Loads all the device data from the floppy disk. - Only 50 device data can be stored in the machine memory for 321, 351, 361 and 341 machine. - Up to 5000 device data can be stored in 381 machine memory. <F10> Loads the particular device data specified in [3] or [4].

D-285

DEVICE DATA LOAD screen [screen 6.7.2] [Screen]


D I S C O D I C E R S E R I E S < DAD321 >YY-MM-DD [ ] 6.7.2 < DEVICE DATA LOAD > +----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------+ | DIRECTORY | DEVICE No. DEVICE ID. | +------------------+--------------------------------------------------------------------------+ | | [1] [2] | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | +--------------------------------------------------------------------------+ | | DEVICE No. [3] DATA: [5] | | | DEVICE ID [4] | +----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------+ F1:PREVIOUS F2: F3: F4: F5 : LOAD ALL F6:NEXT F7:MOVE CUR F8: F9: F10:LOAD SPECIFIED

[Setting Item]
Item No.

[1] [2] [3] [4] [5]

Descriptions Displays the device No. saved in the floppy disk. Displays the device ID saved in the floppy disk. Enter the device No. to load onto the machine memory. Enter the device ID to load onto the machine memory. Displays the device data count saved in the floppy disk.

D-286

DEVICE DATA LOAD screen [screen 6.7.2] (Continued) [Function Key] Press F1 F2 F3 F4 F5 To Display the previous page of the data list saved in the floppy disk. Unused Unused Unused Load the device data onto the machine memory. All the device data saved on the floppy disk will be loaded. - Only 50 device data can be stored in the machine memory for 321, 351, 361 and 341 machine. - Up to 5000 device data can be stored in 381 machine memory. Display the next page of the data list saved in the floppy disk. Move the cursor between the [1][2] area and [3][4][5] area. Unused Unused Load the particularly device data for which the device No. or device ID are specified in [3] or [4] onto the machine memory.

F6 F7 F8 F9 F10

D-287

4-8-4. DEVICE DATA SAVE screen [screen 6.7.3]


DEVICE DATA SAVE screen [screen 6.7.3] function DEVICE DATA SAVE screen [screen 6.7.3] is used to save the device data stored in the machine onto a floppy disk. Procedures for saving the device data Save the device data onto a floppy disk from the machine memory.
Step No.

2 3 4

Do This With the EXTERNAL MEMORY UNIT screen [screen 6.7] displayed, press the <F3> key. - DEVICE DATA SAVE screen [screen 6.7.3] will appear. - For the details of the DEVICE DATA SAVE screen [screen 6.7.3], see the next page. Press the <F1> or <F6> key to locate the target device No. and confirm data. Enter the target device No. in the entry position [3] and device ID in [4]. Press the <F5> or <F10> key. The machine will carry out device data saving. - Only the <EMO> switch is accepted during saving. - If the <EXIT> key is pressed while no saving is in progress, the system returns to the EXTERNAL MEMORY UNIT screen [screen 6.7]. <F5> Saves all the device data stored in the machine memory. <F10> Loads the particular device data specified in [3] or [4].

D-288

DEVICE DATA SAVE screen [screen 6.7.3] [Screen]


D I S C O D I C E R S E R I E S < DAD321 >YY-MM-DD [ ] 6.7.3 < DEVICE DATA SAVE > +----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------+ | DIRECTORY | DEVICE No. DEVICE ID. | +------------------+--------------------------------------------------------------------------+ | | [1] [2] | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | +--------------------------------------------------------------------------+ | | DEVICE No. [3] DATA: TOTAL: [5] | | | DEVICE ID [4] | +----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------+ F1:PREVIOUS F2: F3: F4: F5: SAVE ALL F6:NEXT F7:MOVE CUR F8: F9: F10:SAVE SPECIFIED

[Setting Item]
Item No.

[1] [2] [3] [4] [5] [6]

Descriptions Displays the device No. saved in the machine memory. Displays the device ID saved in the machine memory. Enter the device No. to save in a floppy disk. Enter the device ID to save in a floppy disk. Displays the number of device data stored in the current directory. Displays total number of device data stored in the machine memory.

D-289

DEVICE DATA SAVE screen [screen 6.7.3] (Continued) [Function Key] Press F1 F2 F3 F4 F5 To Display the previous page of the data list stored in the machine memory. Unused Unused Unused Save the device data in a floppy disk. All the device data stored on the machine memory will be saved in a floppy disk. Display the next page of the data list stored in the machine memory. Move the cursor between the [1][2] area and [3][4][5] area. Unused Unused Load the particularly device data for which the device No. or device ID are specified in [3] or [4] in the floppy disk.

F6 F7 F8 F9 F10

D-290

4-8-5. DEVICE DATA DELETE screen [screen 6.7.4]


DEVICE DATA DELETE screen [screen 6.7.4] function DEVICE DATA DELETE screen [screen 6.7.4] is used to delete the device data saved in the floppy disk. Procedures for deleting the device data Delete the designated device No. from the device data saved in the floppy disk.
Step No.

2 3 4

Do This With the EXTERNAL MEMORY UNIT screen [screen 6.7] displayed, press the <F4> key. - DEVICE DATA DELETE screen [screen 6.7.4] will appear. - For the details of the DEVICE DATA DELETE screen [screen 6.7.4], see the next page. Press the <F1> or <F6> key to locate the target device No. and confirm data. Enter the target device No. in the entry position [3] and device ID in [4]. Press the <F5> key. - Start the deletion. - Only the <EMO> switch is accepted during deleting. - If the <EXIT> key is pressed while no delete is in progress, the system returns to the EXTERNAL MEMORY UNIT screen [screen 6.7].

D-291

DEVICE DATA DELETE screen [screen 6.7.4] [Screen]


D I S C O D I C E R S E R I E S < DAD321 >YY-MM-DD [ ] 6.7.4 < DEVICE DATA DELETE > +----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------+ | DIRECTORY | DEVICE No. DEVICE ID. | +------------------+--------------------------------------------------------------------------+ | | [1] [2] | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | +--------------------------------------------------------------------------+ | | DEVICE No. [3] DATA: [5] | | | DEVICE ID [4] | +----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------+ F1:PREVIOUS F2: F3: F4: F5 :DELETE F6:NEXT F7:MOVE CUR F8: F9: F10:

[Setting Item]
Item No.

[1] [2] [3] [4] [5]

Descriptions Displays the device No. saved in the floppy disk. Displays the device ID saved in the floppy disk. Enter the device No. to delete. Enter the device ID to delete. Displays the device data count saved in the floppy disk.

D-292

DEVICE DATA DELETE screen [screen 6.7.4] (Continued) [Function Key] Press F1 F2 F3 F4 F5 F6 F7 F8 F9 F10 To Display the previous page of the data list saved in the floppy disk. Unused Unused Unused Delete the device data specified in [3]. Display the next page of the data list saved in the floppy disk. Move the cursor between the [1][2] area and [3][4][5] area. Unused Unused Unused

D-293

4-8-6. PRECUT DATA LOAD screen [screen 6.7.5]


PRECUT DATA LOAD screen [screen 6.7.5] function PRECUT DATA LOAD screen [screen 6.7.5] is used to load the precut data saved in the floppy disk onto the machine memory. Procedures for loading the precut data Load the precut data from the floppy disk onto the machine memory.
Step No.

2 3 4

Do This With the EXTERNAL MEMORY UNIT screen [screen 6.7] displayed, press the <F5> key. - PRECUT DATA LOAD screen [screen 6.7.5] will appear. - For the details of the PRECUT DATA LOAD screen [screen 6.7.5], see the next page. Press the <F1> or <F2> key to locate the target precut data No. and confirm data. Enter the target precut data No. in the entry position [3]. Press the <F5> or <F10> key to execute loading. - Only the <EMO> switch is accepted during loading. - If the <EXIT> key is pressed while no loading is in progress, the system returns to the EXTERNAL MEMORY UNIT screen [screen 6.7]. <F5> Loads all the precut data saved in the floppy disk. <F10> Loads the particular precut data specified in [3].

D-294

PRECUT DATA LOAD screen [screen 6.7.5] [Screen]


D I S C O D I C E R S E R I E S < DAD321 >YY-MM-DD [ ] < PRECUT DATA LOAD > No. 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. 7. 8. 9. 10. PRECUT DATA No. [1] PRECUT ID [2] 6.7.5

DATA SUM: [4] ---------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------Select PRECUT DATA No. [3]

F1:NEXT PAGE F2:PAGE BEFORE F6: F7:

F3: F8:

F4: F9:

F5 :LOAD F10:No.UNIT

[Setting Item]
Item No.

[1] [2] [3] [4]

Descriptions Displays the precut data No. saved in the floppy disk. Displays the precut data ID saved in the floppy disk. Enter the precut data No. to call up. Displays the precut data count saved in the floppy disk.

D-295

PRECUT DATA LOAD screen [screen 6.7.5] (Continued) [Function Key] Press F1 F2 F3 F4 F5 F6 F7 F8 F9 F10 To Display the next page of the data list saved in the floppy disk. Display the previous page of the data list saved in the floppy disk. Unused Unused Load the precut data onto the machine memory. All the precut data saved on the floppy disk will be loaded. Unused Unused Unused Unused Load the particularly precut data for which the precut data No. is specified in [3], onto the machine memory.

D-296

4-8-7. PRECUT DATA SAVE screen [screen 6.7.6]


PRECUT DATA SAVE screen [screen 6.7.6] function PRECUT DATA SAVE screen [screen 6.7.6] is used to save the precut data stored in the machine memory onto a floppy disk. Procedures for saving the precut data Save the precut data stored in the machine memory to a floppy disk.
Step No.

2 3

Do This With the EXTERNAL MEMORY UNIT screen [screen 6.7] displayed, press the <F6> key. - PRECUT DATA SAVE screen [screen 6.7.6] will appear. - For the details of the PRECUT DATA SAVE screen [screen 6.7.6], see the next page. Press the <F1> or <F2> key to locate the target precut data No. and confirm data. Enter the target precut data No. in the entry position [3]. To save the continuous No. precut data, enter the appropriate No. in the entry position [5] and [6]. Press the <F5> or <F10> key to execute precut data saving. - Only the <EMO> switch is accepted during saving. - If the <EXIT> key is pressed while no saving is in progress, the system returns to the EXTERNAL MEMORY UNIT screen [screen 6.7]. <F5> Saves all the precut data. <F10> Saves the particular precut data specified in [3] or [5][6].

D-297

PRECUT DATA SAVE screen [screen 6.7.6] [Screen]


D I S C O D I C E R S E R I E S < DAD321 >YY-MM-DD [ ] < PRECUT DATA SAVE > No. 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. 7. 8. 9. 10. PRECUT DATA No. [1] PRECUT ID [2] 6.7.6

DATA SUM: [4] ---------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------Select PRECUT DATA No. [3] Save from # [5] To [6] F1:NEXT PAGE F2:PAGE BEFORE F6: F7: F3: F8: F4:Save From F9: F5 :SAVE F10:No.UNIT

[Setting Item]
Item No.

[1] [2] [3] [4] [5] [6]

Descriptions Displays the precut data No. Displays the precut data ID. Enter the precut data No. to call up from the machine memory. Enter the precut data count stored in the machine memory. Enter the starting No. of the precut data when saving the continuous No. of data. Enter the ending No. of the precut data when saving the continuous No. of data.

D-298

PRECUT DATA SAVE screen [screen 6.7.6] (Continued) [Function Key] Press F1 F2 F3 F4 F5 F6 F7 F8 F9 F10 To Display the next page of the data list stored in the machine memory. Display the previous page of the data list stored in the machine memory. Unused Save the precut data specified in [5] [6] in a floppy disk. Save all the precut data saved in the machine memory onto a floppy disk. Unused Unused Unused Unused Save the precut data designated in [3] in a floppy disk.

D-299

4-8-8. Auto batch execution


Auto batch execution In the auto batch execution, batch processing is performed to install the special specification software. This operation is to be conducted by DISCO service personnel.

D-300

4-8-9. Machine data backup function


Procedures for machine data backup This function is used to save backup copies of the machine-specific data (such as machine data, setup data, maker data and password) which are stored in the machine memory onto a floppy disk.
Step No.

Do This From the EXTERNAL MEMORY UNIT screen [screen 6.7], press the <F8> key. - The machine data is then backed up.

D-301

4-8-10. Machine data restoring function


Procedures for restoring the machine data This function is used to load the backup copies of the machine-specific data (such as machine data, setup data, maker data and password) saved in the floppy disk onto the machine memory.

NOTICE

Do not copy machine data from one machine to another. Such a copying operation may cause malfunction since the machine's intrinsic data such as the axis origin data is also copied by this operation. Machine data restore function should only be used for backing up the memory contents inherent to the machine.
Step No.

Do This From the EXTERNAL MEMORY UNIT screen [screen 6.7], press the <F9> key. - The machine data is then loaded.

D-302

4-8-11. Device data exchange


Device data exchange This function enables you to convert the device data which was used for 3*0 series machine to the one for 3*1 series. In terms of software version, device data in version 2.** is converted to the one in 5.** version. - Note that the device data for 3*1 series cannot be converted to that for 3*0 series. Procedures for device data exchange
Step No.

Do This From the EXTERNAL MEMORY UNIT screen [screen 6.7], press the <F10> key. - The device data will be converted to the one for 3*1 series (software version 5.**).

D-303

5. Machine Maintenance
Summary of this section This section describes the function and operation data maintenance for idling and rotation alignment, which are controlled by an individual machine. Section No. Title 5-1 Calling Up the MACHINE MAINTENANCE Screen [Screen 7.0] Contents - Procedure for calling up the MACHINE MAINTENANCE screen [screen 7.0] - Description of MACHINE MAINTENANCE screen [screen 7.0] - Procedure for setting the idlingrelated data - Procedure for executing idling - Procedure for performing rotation alignment - Description of related screens

5-2

Axis Idling Setup

5-3

Rotation Alignment (0 Point Adjustment)

D-304

Safety precautions to be observed during machine maintenance

WARNING

- The spindle rotating speed varies with the outside diameter of the installed blade. Rotating the spindle at a speed higher than the maximum permissible speed for the blade outside diameter may cause blade breakage of flange separation. Therefore, be sure that the employed spindle rotating speed is fit for the outside diameter of the installed blade. Spindle maximum rotating speed are: 60,000 min-1 (60,000 rpm) for 2-inch blade (341/381) 40,000 min-1 (40,000 rpm) for 2-inch blade (321/351/361) 30,000 min-1 (30,000 rpm) for 3-inch blade 15,000 min-1 (15,000 rpm) for 4-inch blade 12,500 min-1 (12,500 rpm) for 5-inch blade - No irrelevant persons must touch the machine because they may inadvertently invoke unexpected operations which may injure the maintenance personnel. During maintenance, exercise care not to touch the operation panel.

NOTICE

Some machine maintenance tasks are to be performed while the interlock feature is disabled with the maintenance switch. Therefore, maintenance must be carried out by the qualified personnel.

D-305

5-1. Calling up the MACHINE MAINTENANCE Screen [Screen 7.0]


Procedures for calling up the MACHINE MAINTENANCE screen [screen 7.0]
Step No.

Do This From the MAIN MENU screen [screen 0.0], press the <F7> key. - The PASSWORD SCREEN is displayed.
D I S C O D I C E R S E R I E S < DAD321 >YY-MM-DD [ ] =========== Pass Word Screen ===========

ENTER PASSWORD...??

[1]

2 3

Enter the user password in the column [1]. Press the <ENTER> key. - MACHINE MAINTENANCE screen [screen 7.0] appears only when the entered user password is correct. - For the details of the MACHINE MAINTENANCE screen [screen 7.0], see the next page.

D-306

MACHINE MAINTENANCE screen [screen 7.0] When you press the <EXIT> key, the system returns to the MAIN MENU screen [screen 0.0]. [Screen]
D I S C O D I C E R S E R I E S < DAD321 >YY-MM-DD [ ] < MACHINE MAINTENANCE > F1. CHUCK TABLE REMOVAL ON/OFF F2. AXIS STABILIZATION F3. ROTATION ALIGNMENT 7.0

[Function Key] Press F1 F2 F3 To Turn ON/OFF the chuck table release valve. Call up the AXIS IDLING CREATION screen [screen 7.2]. Call up the ROTATION ALIGNMENT screen [screen 7.3].

D-307

5-2. Axis Idling Setup


Summary of this section The idling operation is required for the machine drive axes to operate in stable conditions. This section describes setting procedures of idling-related data and idling execution procedures. Section No. Title 5-2-1 Calling up the AXIS IDLING CREATION screen [screen 7.2] Contents - Procedure for calling up the AXIS IDLING CREATION screen [screen 7.2] - Description of AXIS IDLING CREATION screen [screen 7.2] - Procedure for axis idling execution - Description of AXIS IDLING IN PROGRESS screen [screen 7.2.1]

5-2-2

Axis idling execution

About idling Idling means to wait about 30 minutes with the spindle rotating and the wheel coolant water supplied. This operation is to be performed to ensure that the machine operates with consistent accuracy. Safety precautions to be observed during axis idling setup

WARNING

If you place your fingers or hands in a drive section, they may be caught or cut off. While the axes are operating, do not place your fingers or hands in a drive section.

NOTICE

To produce enhanced idling effects, press the <CUT WATER> and <SPNDL> keys and allow the machine to arrive at thermal equilibrium before proceeding to work.

D-308

5-2-1. Calling up the AXIS IDLING CREATION screen [screen 7.2]


Procedures for calling up the AXIS IDLING CREATION screen [screen 7.2]
Step No.

Do This Press the <F2> key from the MACHINE MAINTENANCE screen [screen 7.0]. - The AXIS IDLING CREATION screen [screen 7.2] will appear. - See below for the details of the AXIS IDLING CREATION screen [screen 7.2].

AXIS IDLING CREATION screen [screen 7.2] [Screen]


D I S C O D I C E R S E R I E S < DAD321 >YY-MM-DD [ ] < AXIS IDLING CREATION > UNIT #OF IDLING X-AXIS IDLING Y-AXIS IDLING Z-AXIS IDLING -AXIS IDLING : : : : : : [1] [2] [3] [4] [5] [6] times X-AXIS SPEED Y-AXIS SPEED Z-AXIS SPEED -AXIS SPEED : : : : [7] [8] [9] [10] mm/s mm/s mm/s /s 7.2

Setting idling data. Press ENTER to write data. Press START/STOP key to idling start. --------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------F1:SELECT F6: F2: F7: F3: F8: F4: F9: F5 : F10:

[Setting Item]
Item No.

[1] [2] [3]

Descriptions Indicates the selected unit of measure (inch/mm). Use the <F1> key to choose between inch/mm. Enter the number of idling cycles to be repeated. Specify whether or not to idle the X-axis. Use the <F1> key to choose between YES/NO.

D-309

AXIS IDLING CREATION screen [screen 7.2] (Continued) [Setting Item]


Item No.

[4] [5] [6] [7] [8] [9] [10]

Descriptions Specify whether or not to idle the Y-axis. Use the <F1> key to choose between YES/NO. Specify whether or not to idle the Z-axis. Use the <F1> key to choose between YES/NO. Specify whether or not to idle the -axis. Use the <F1> key to choose between YES/NO. Enter the idling speed for X-axis. Enter the idling speed for Y-axis. Enter the idling speed for Z-axis. Enter the idling speed for -axis.

[Function Key] Press F1 F2 F3 F4 F5 F6 F7 F8 F9 F10 To Choose between inch/mm or between YES/NO (whether to execute idling). Unused Unused Unused Unused Unused Unused Unused Unused Unused

D-310

5-2-2. Axis idling execution


Procedures for axis idling execution
Step No.

1 2

Do This Confirm the data displayed in the AXIS IDLING CREATION screen [screen 7.2]. Press the <START/STOP> key from the AXIS IDLING CREATION screen [screen 7.2]. - The AXIS IDLING IN PROGRESS screen [screen 7.2.1] will appear and idling will be executed. - See below for the details of the AXIS IDLING IN PROGRESS screen [screen 7.2.1]. Upon completion of the idling process, the system returns to the AXIS IDLING CREATION screen [screen 7.2].

AXIS IDLING IN PROGRESS screen [screen 7.2.1] [Screen]


D I S C O D I C E R S E R I E S < DAD321 >YY-MM-DD [ ] < AXIS IDLING IN PROGRESS > NOW : [1] / [2] 7.2.1

[Setting Item]
Item No.

[1] [2]

Descriptions Indicates the idling cycle count already executed. Indicates the total number of idling cycles to be executed, which is defined by the AXIS IDLING CREATION screen [screen 7.2].

D-311

5-3. Rotation Alignment (0 Point Adjustment)


Summary of this section When performing the rotation alignment, you can do it by actually cutting a dummy work or using patterns on the workpiece without performing cutting. Section No. Title 5-3-1 Rotation alignment through cutting 5-3-2 Rotation alignment through cutting pass 5-3-3 ROTATION ALIGNMENT EXPLANATION screen [screen HELP] About rotation alignment Rotation alignment is performed so that the machine automatically reads the distance (X, Y) from the absolute machine 0 point to the chuck table center position. The axis operation is performed based on this data. Rotation alignment has been factory effected prior to machine shipment. However, if any of the following conditions occurs, it is necessary to perform rotation alignment. - The microscope is replaced. - The chuck table -axis assembly is replaced. - The alignment channel 2 target is not displayed within the area specified by preselected escape data. - The X-axis zero point sensor position is changed. - The initial data is changed for some reason or other. Safety precautions to be observed during rotation alignment Contents - Rotation alignment by cutting actually a dummy work - Rotation alignment by using patterns on the workpiece - Description of the screens showing rotation alignment procedures with employing cutting pass

NOTICE

To obtain accurate data, perform idling by pressing the <CUT WATER> and <SPNDL> keys to make temperature conditions adequately stabilized before initiating rotation alignment.

D-312

5-3-1. Rotation alignment through cutting


Operation flow The rotation alignment through cutting procedures can be summarized as follows: 5-3-1-1 Cutting a dummy work

5-3-1-2

Rotation alignment through cutting

D-313

5-3-1-1. Cutting a dummy work


Procedures for cutting a dummy work

WARNING

- If your fingers or hands are brought close to any drive section, they may be caught or cut off. When the work is to be removed during rotation alignment, check to ensure that all axes are at rest and then remove the work. - If the <F3> key is pressed from the MACHINE MAINTENANCE screen [screen 7.0], the chuck table automatically moves to the position below the microscope. If the <START/STOP> key or <EXIT> key is pressed from ROTATION ALIGNMENT screen [screen 7.3], the chuck table automatically moves to the cutting position or origin, respectively. If your fingers or hands are brought close to any drive section, they may be caught or cut off. Do not place your fingers or hands in a drive section.
Step No.

Do This Place a dummy work on the chuck table. - See the section D-2-3, [Placement of a Workpiece] of the Operation Manual. Press the <C/T VAC> key to actuate the chuck table vacuum.

D-314

Procedures for cutting a dummy work (Continued)


Step No.

Do This With the MACHINE MAINTENANCE screen [screen 7.0] displayed, press the <F3> key. - The chuck table automatically moves to the position under the microscope. - The ROTATION ALIGNMENT screen [screen 7.3] will appear. - For the details of the ROTATION ALIGNMENT screen [screen 7.3], see the next page.
D I S C O D I C E R S E R I E S < DAD321 >YY-MM-DD [ ] < ROTATION ALIGNMENT >

7.3

UNIT: [1] CUT STROKE [2] mm WORK HEIGHT [3] mm TAPE HEIGHT [4] mm BLADE HEIGHT [5] mm CUT SPEED [6] mm/s SPINDLE REV. [7] rpm Press the ENTER key to confirm the cutting data. Press the START/STOP key to begin. F1:SELECT F2: F3: F4: F5 :NON CUT F6: F7: F8: F9: F10:LIGHT ADJ

4 5

Enter data in [1] [7], then press the <ENTER> key. Press the <START/STOP> key. - The chuck table and Z-axis moves to the cutting position. - Cutting starts in the order of channel 1 channel 2. When cutting has been completed, the ROTATION ALIGNMENT screen [screen 7.3.5] is displayed. - For the details of the ROTATION ALIGNMENT screen [screen 7.3.5], see the section 5-3-1-2 of this chapter, [Rotation alignment through cutting]. The procedure continues on the section 5-3-1-2 of this chpater, [Rotation alignment through cutting].

D-315

ROTATION ALIGNMENT screen [screen 7.3] [Screen]


D I S C O D I C E R S E R I E S < DAD321 >YY-MM-DD [ ] < ROTATION ALIGNMENT > UNIT: [1] 7.3

CUT STROKE [2] mm WORK HIGHT [3] mm TAPE HIGHT [4] mm BLADE HEIGHT [5] mm CUT SPEED [6] mm/s SPINDLE REV. [7] rpm Press the ENTER key to confirm the cutting data. Press the START/STOP key to begin. F1:SELECT F2: F3: F4: F5 :NON CUT F6: F7: F8: F9: F10:LIGHT ADJ

[Setting Item]
Item No.

[1] [2] [3] [4] [5] [6] [7]

Descriptions The selected unit, inch/mm is displayed. Switching between inch/mm can be effected by pressing the <F1> key. Enter the size of the work to be cut. Enter the thickness of the work to be cut. Enter the thickness of the tape to be cut. Enter the dummy work amount left uncut data. Enter the cutting feed speed. Enter the spindle rotating speed for cutting.

D-316

ROTATION ALIGNMENT screen [screen 7.3] (Continued) [Function Key] Press F1 F2 F3 F4 F5 To Switch unit between inch and mm. Unused Unused Unused Call up the ROTATION ALIGNMENT screen [screen 7.3.5] which effects rotation alignment using a work pattern without performing cutting process. Unused Unused Unused Unused Call up the LIGHT ADJUSTMENT screen. ---341/381 only ---

F6 F7 F8 F9 F10

D-317

5-3-1-2. Rotation alignment through cutting


Procedures for rotation alignment through cutting

WARNING

If you press the <ENTER> or <EXIT> key with the ROTATION ALIGNMENT screen [screen 7.3.5] is displayed, the chuck table and Z-axis automatically move their respective origin positions. If you place your fingers or hands in a drive section, they may be caught or cut off. Do not place your fingers or hands in a drive section.
Step No.

Do This When a dummy work cutting is completed, the ROTATION ALIGNMENT screen [screen 7.3.5] is displayed. - For the details of the ROTATION ALIGNMENT screen [screen 7.3.5], see the next page or after.
D I S C O D I C E R S E R I E S < DAD321 >YY-MM-DD [ ] < ROTATION ALIGNMENT >

7.3.5

Refer to F1 HELP and execute. Press the ENTER key to confirm the cutting data. F1:HELP F2: F3: F4: F6: F7: F8: F9:

F5 :MEASURE F10:LIGHT ADJ

D-318

Procedures for rotation alignment through cutting (Continued)


Step No.

Do

This

3 4

7 8

Adjust the light intensity. 321/351/361 Adjust the light intensity with adjustment knob on with standard the right side of the monitor. spec 341/381/ Press the <F10> key to call up the LIGHT machine ADJUSTMENT screen and adjust the light incorporating intensity. light intensity - For the details of the LIGHT ADJUSTMENT adjustment screen, see the section 1-3-4 of this chapter, function [LIGHT ADJUSTMENT screen]. Adjust the microscope focus with the microscope focus adjustment control on the microscope lateral side. Using the axis operation key, make adjustment so that the intersection of the cut lines is on the screen center (on-screen cross). (Measuring point 1) Then finalize measurement point 1 by pressing the <F5> key. - The -axis rotates by 90 and the cutting direction changes to the channel 2. Using the axis operation key, make adjustment so that the intersection of the cut lines is on the screen center (on-screen cross). (Measuring point 2) Then finalize measurement point 2 by pressing the <F5> key. - The -axis rotates again. Check the screen to ensure that the rotation axis calculation has been properly performed (measuring point 1 and 2 are located at the center of the screen). - The rotation axis center is then automatically calculated. - If the proper calculation result is not obtained, repeat the procedures from the step 4. If the calculation result is appropriate, press the <ENTER> key. - The chuck table and Z-axis then automatically move to the origin position. - The -axis rotation center is then registered to complete rotation alignment. - The screen returns to the MACHINE MAINTENANCE screen [screen 7.0].

D-319

ROTATION ALIGNMENT screen [screen 7.3.5] [Screen]


D I S C O D I C E R S E R I E S < DAD321 >YY-MM-DD [ ] < ROTATION ALIGNMENT > 7.3.5

F1:HELP F6:

Refer to F1 HELP and execute. Press the ENTER key to confirm the cutting data. F2: F3: F4: F5 :MEASURE F7: F8: F9: F10:LIGHT ADJ

[Function Key] Press F1 To Call up the ROTATION ALIGNMENT EXPLANATION screen [screen HELP] which explains how to effect rotation alignment without performing the cutting process. Unused Unused Unused Register the measuring point of channel 1 and channel 2 rotated by 90 from channel 1. Unused Unused Unused Unused Call up the LIGHT ADJUSTMENT screen. --- 341/381 only ---

F2 F3 F4 F5 F6 F7 F8 F9 F10

D-320

5-3-2. Rotation alignment through cutting pass


Operation flow In the rotation alignment through cutting pass, the target figure on a dummy work is aligned without cutting operation. The rotation alignment through cutting pass procedures can be summarized as follows: 5-3-2-1 Setting a dummy work

5-3-2-2

Rotation alignment through cutting pass

D-321

5-3-2-1. Setting a dummy work


Procedures for setting a dummy work

WARNING

- If your fingers or hands are brought close to any drive section, they may be caught or cut off. When the work is to be removed during rotation alignment, check to ensure that all axes stop and then remove the work. - If you press the <F3> key with the MACHINE MAINTENANCE screen [screen 7.0] is displayed, the chuck table automatically moves to the position under the microscope. If you press the <F5> key with ROTATION ALIGNMENT screen [screen 7.3] is displayed, the chuck table center automatically moves to the position under the microscope. If your fingers or hands are brought close to any drive section, they may be caught or cut off. Do not place your fingers or hands in a drive section.
Step No.

Do This Place a dummy work on the chuck table. - See the section D-2-3, [Placement of a Workpiece] of the Operation Manual. Press the <C/T VAC> key to actuate the chuck table vacuum.

D-322

Procedures for setting a dummy work (Continued)


Step No.

Do This With the MACHINE MAINTENANCE screen [screen 7.0] displayed, press the <F3> key. - The chuck table center automatically moves to the position under the microscope. - The ROTATION ALIGNMENT screen [screen 7.3] will appear. - For the details of the ROTATION ALIGNMENT screen [screen 7.3], see the section 5-3-1-1 of this chapter, [Cutting a dummy work].
D I S C O D I C E R S E R I E S < DAD321 >YY-MM-DD [ ] < ROTATION ALIGNMENT >

7.3

UNIT: [1] CUT STROKE [2] mm WORK HIGHT [3] mm TAPE HIGHT [4] mm BLADE HEIGHT [5] mm CUT SPEED [6] mm/s SPINDLE REV. [7] rpm Press the ENTER key to confirm the cutting data. Press the START/STOP key to begin. F1:SELECT F2: F3: F4: F5 :NON CUT F6: F7: F8: F9: F10:LIGHT ADJ

D-323

Procedures for setting a dummy work (Continued)


Step No.

Do This With the ROTATION ALIGNMENT screen [screen 7.3] displayed, press the <F5> key. - The chuck table center automatically moves to the position under the microscope. - The ROTATION ALIGNMENT screen [screen 7.3.5] will appear. - For the details of the ROTATION ALIGNMENT screen [screen 7.3.5], see the section 5-3-1-2 of this chapter, [Rotation alignment through cutting].
D I S C O D I C E R S E R I E S < DAD321 >YY-MM-DD [ ] < ROTATION ALIGNMENT >

7.3.5

Refer to F1 HELP and execute. Press the ENTER key to confirm the cutting data. F1:HELP F2: F3: F4: F6: F7: F8: F9:

F5 :MEASURE F10:LIGHT ADJ

The procedure continues on the section 5-3-2-2 of this chapter, [Rotation alignment through cutting pass].

D-324

5-3-2-2. Rotation alignment through cutting pass


Procedures for rotation alignment through cutting pass

WARNING

If you press the <ENTER> or <EXIT> key with the ROTATION ALIGNMENT screen [screen 7.3.5] is displayed, the chuck table automatically moves its origin position. If you place your fingers or hands in a drive section, they may be caught or cut off. Do not place your fingers or hands in a drive section.
Step No.

Do

This

2 3

Adjust the light intensity. 321/351/361 Adjust the light intensity with adjustment knob on with standard the right side of the monitor. spec 341/381/ Press the <F10> key to call up the LIGHT machine ADJUSTMENT screen and adjust the light incorporating intensity. light intensity - For the details of the LIGHT ADJUSTMENT adjustment screen, see the section 1-3-4 of this chapter, function [LIGHT ADJUSTMENT screen]. Adjust the microscope focus with the microscope focus adjustment control on the microscope lateral side. Position an appropriate target figure at the center of the screen. (Measuring point 1) Example (Measuring point 1)

Then finalize measurement point 1 by pressing the <F5> key. - The -axis rotates by 90 and the cutting direction changes to the channel 2.

D-325

Procedures for rotation alignment through cutting pass (Continued)


Step No.

Do This Move the target figure finalized by Step 4 to the center of the screen again. (Measuring point 2) Example (Measuring point 2)

6 7

Then finalize measurement point 2 by pressing the <F5> key. - The -axis rotates again. Check the screen to ensure that the rotation axis calculation has been properly performed (measuring point 1 and 2 are located at the center of the screen). - The rotation axis center is then automatically calculated. - If the proper calculation result is not obtained, repeat the procedures from the step 3. If the calculation result is appropriate, press the <ENTER> key. - The chuck table then automatically move to the origin position. - The -axis rotation center is then registered to complete rotation alignment. - The screen returns to the MACHINE MAINTENANCE screen [screen 7.0].

D-326

5-3-3. ROTATION ALIGNMENT EXPLANATION screen [screen HELP]


ROTATION ALIGNMENT EXPLANATION screen [screen HELP] This screen provides operating instructions for registering the -axis center with reference to a specific dummy pattern. This screen appears when you press the <F1> key from the ROTATION ALIGNMENT screen [screen 7.3.5]. [Screen]
D I S C O D I C E R S E R I E S < DAD321 >YY-MM-DD [ ] ROTATION ALIGNMENT EXPLANATION 1. After moving a suitable target shape to the screen center, push F5 key. 2. After rotating the theta 90, again move the previous target to the screen center and press the F5 key. The rotation axis center position is automatically computed. 3. In order to again rotate the theta,confirm whether the rotation axis was correctly computed or not. 4. If the measurement results are correct,update the data by pressing the ENTER key. If not, repeat from No 2. HELP

D-327

INDEX
A
A cutting mode ...................................................................D-122 A_UP/AS UP cutting mode .................................................D-127 ADJUSTMENT OF B.B.D. (Blade Breakage Detector) screen [5.2]....... D-88 Alignment data maintenance ..............................................D-276 AS cutting mode .................................................................D-124 Auto batch execution ..........................................................D-300 Auto cutting related screens ................................................ D-10 AUTO CUTTING screen [1.0] --- DAD mode --- ................... D-11 Auto-setup data, setting......................................................D-231 Auxiliary key ........................................................................ C-28 AXIS IDLING CREATION screen [7.2], calling up ...............D-309 Axis idling execution ...........................................................D-311 Axis idling setup .................................................................D-308 Axis operation keys ............................................................. C-25 Data screen structure .............................................................C-2 Data setup <example 1> ....................................................D-139 Data setup <example 2> ....................................................D-151 Data setup <example 3> ....................................................D-161 Data setup <example 4> ....................................................D-171 Data setup <example 5> ....................................................D-182 Data setup <example 6> ....................................................D-192 Data setup <example 7> ....................................................D-201 Data setup <example 8> ....................................................D-210 Data setup/operation screens used by operators....................D-3 DEVICE DATA 1 screen [4.2]......................................... D-45, 63 DEVICE DATA 2 screen [4.3]...............................................D-48 DEVICE DATA 2 screen [4.3] (normal program)...................D-66 DEVICE DATA 2 screen [4.3] (special program)...................D-70 DEVICE DATA 3 screen [4.4]...............................................D-50 DEVICE DATA 3 screen [4.4] (normal program)...................D-68 DEVICE DATA 3 screen [4.4] (special program)...................D-75 DEVICE DATA COPY screen...............................................D-40 Device data, copying ............................................................D-36 DEVICE DATA DELETE screen ...........................................D-41 DEVICE DATA DELETE screen [6.7.4] ..............................D-291 Device data, deleting............................................................D-36 Device data exchange........................................................D-303 DEVICE DATA LIST screen [4.0] .........................................D-37 DEVICE DATA LOAD screen [6.7.2] ..................................D-285 Device data registration......................................................D-177 Device data related screens .................................................D-35 Device data related screens --- DAC mode ---......................D-62 Device data related screens --- DAD mode ---......................D-44 DEVICE DATA RENAME screen..........................................D-42 Device data, renaming .........................................................D-36 DEVICE DATA SAVE screen [6.7.3]...................................D-288 DRESS IN PROGRESS screen [5.4.1]...............................D-100 Dressing...............................................................................D-97 Dressing related screens......................................................D-96 Dummy work, cutting..........................................................D-314 Dummy work, setting..........................................................D-322

B
B cutting mode ...................................................................D-123 B_ZKEEP cutting mode ......................................................D-126 BLADE DRESS DATA screen [5.4]...................................... D-98 BLADE INFORMATION 2 screen ........................................ D-19 BLADE LIFE/WEAR INFORMATION screen [5.6]................ D-94 Blade maintenance related screens..................................... D-81 BLADE MAINTENANCE screen [5.0] .................................. D-82 Blade replacement related screens...................................... D-83 BLADE REPLACEMENT screen [5.1].................................. D-84 BLADE SELECTER screen [5.1.5]....................................... D-86 Blade wear compensation function .....................................D-128 Blade wear compensation precautions ...............................D-130 Blade wear compensation (Z-axis auto-down) ....................D-129 BS cutting mode .................................................................D-125 BS_ZKEEP cutting mode....................................................D-126

C
Chuck table setup operation, outline...................................D-225 CHUCK TABLE SETUP screen [5.3.1] ...............................D-104 Cutting data <example 1>, description................................D-135 Cutting data <example 2>, description................................D-147 Cutting data <example 3>, description................................D-157 Cutting data <example 4>, description................................D-167 Cutting data <example 5>, description................................D-180 Cutting data <example 6>, description................................D-190 Cutting data <example 7>, description................................D-198 Cutting data <example 8>, description................................D-207 Cutting data setup ..............................................................D-118 Cutting data setup example --- DAC mode --- .....................D-178 Cutting data setup example --- DAD mode --- .....................D-133 Cutting data setup example 1 .............................................D-134 Cutting data setup example 2 .............................................D-146 Cutting data setup example 3 .............................................D-156 Cutting data setup example 4 .............................................D-166 Cutting data setup example 5 .............................................D-179 Cutting data setup example 6 .............................................D-189 Cutting data setup example 7 .............................................D-197 Cutting data setup example 8 .............................................D-206 Cutting function ..................................................................D-119 Cutting mode ......................................................................D-121 Cutting related screens.......................................................... D-9 Cutting shape .....................................................................D-120

E
EMERGENCY, WHOM TO CONTACT................................... B-1 EMO switch.......................................................................... A-13 ERROR RECOVERY (B.B.D) screen .................................D-116 ERROR RECOVERY (KERF CHECK) screen....................D-114 ERROR RECOVERY (SETUP) screen...............................D-117 Error recovery related screens ...........................................D-113 External memory device.....................................................D-279 EXTERNAL MEMORY UNIT screen [6.7]...........................D-281

F
FORMAT (FLOPPY DISKETTE) screen [6.7.1] ..................D-283 Function data maintenance ................................................D-258 FUNCTION DATA MAINTENANCE 1 screen [6.3] .............D-259 FUNCTION DATA MAINTENANCE 2 screen [6.3.3] ..........D-263

G
GENERAL DESCRIPTION OF DATA SCREEN OPERATIONS...........C-1 General safety precautions..................................................... A-2

D
DAC ALIGNMENT screen [1.0] --- DAC mode ---................. D-13 DATA MAINTENANCE .......................................................... D-1 Data password, entering...................................................... D-39

H
HAIRLINE ALIGNMENT IN PROGRESS screen [5.5.1] .......D-92 Hairline alignment related screens .......................................D-89 HAIRLINE ALIGNMENT screen [5.5]....................................D-90

Index-1

INDEX
I
IMPORTANT SAFETY INFORMATION ..................................A-1 Inherently hazardous areas and ways to avoid hazards..........A-9 Interlock mechanism.............................................................A-18 Interlock mechanism of splash cover ....................................A-20 INTRODUCTION ............................................................... Intro-1

R
Rotation alignment (0 point adjustment) .............................D-312 ROTATION ALIGNMENT EXPLANATION screen [HELP].........D-327 Rotation alignment through cutting ............................. D-313, 318 Rotation alignment through cutting pass..................... D-321, 325

K
KERF CHECK DATA 1 screen (stop correction process)..... D-29 KERF CHECK DATA 2 screen (stop correction process)..... D-31 KERF CHECK FUNCTION PARAMETER screen [4.7] ........ D-52 Keys for alarm cancel .......................................................... C-21 Keys for start/stop................................................................ C-21 Keys to call data .................................................................. C-23 Keys to edit data.................................................................. C-23 Keys to setup data............................................................... C-23

S
Safety labels ........................................................................ A-22 Safety precautions to be observed during operation ............... A-5 Screens related to correction during cutting..........................D-26 SEMI AUTO CUT screen [2.0] --- DAD mode ---...................D-23 Semi auto cutting related screens ........................................D-22 Sensor calibration setup, outline.........................................D-229 SENSOR CALIBRATION SETUP screen [5.3.4] ................D-110 Setup data..........................................................................D-218 Setup data, specifying ........................................................D-219 Setup related screens ........................................................D-102 SETUP screen [5.3] ...........................................................D-103 Signal tower data maintenance ..........................................D-274 SIMULATION screen............................................................D-80 SINGLE CHANNEL ALIGNMENT screen .............................D-25 Single-function keys .............................................................C-22 Special mode explanation screen [HELP]...........................D-215 STATUS OF CUTTING screen --- DAC mode ---..................D-17 STATUS OF CUTTING screen --- DAD mode ---..................D-15 STOP CORRECTION screen (cutting correction screen) .....D-27

L
LIGHT ADJUSTMENT screen ............................................. D-34

M
Machine data backup function ............................................D-301 Machine data restoring function..........................................D-302 Machine maintenance ........................................................D-304 MACHINE MAINTENANCE screen [7.0], calling up ............D-306 MAIN MENU screen [0.0] ...................................................... D-5 Measure function ................................................................D-254

T
Touch-activated keys ...........................................................C-20 Touch-activated keys, function .............................................C-20

N
Noncontact setup operation, outline....................................D-227 NONCONTACT SETUP screen [5.3.3] ...............................D-108 NONCONTACT SETUP SENSOR CLEANING screen [5.8] ........D-112

Z
Z-EM key .............................................................................C-21

O
Operation data maintenance...............................................D-271 Operation panel................................................................... C-18 Operation panel key layout .................................................. C-19 Operator maintenance ........................................................D-233 OPERATOR MAINTENANCE Screen [6.0].........................D-235

P
POINTED CHUCK TABLE SETUP screen [5.3.2]...............D-106 Power circuit breaker............................................................A-16 Precut data (AUTO)............................................................D-245 PRECUT DATA (auto control) screen [6.1.1] ....................... D-56 Precut data, copying...........................................................D-241 Precut data (LENGTH) .......................................................D-251 PRECUT DATA (length control) screen [6.1.1] .................... D-60 Precut data (LINE)..............................................................D-248 PRECUT DATA LIST screen [6.1] ......................................D-239 PRECUT DATA LOAD screen [6.7.5] .................................D-294 Precut data maintenance....................................................D-237 PRECUT DATA (number of lines control) screen [6.1.1] ...... D-58 PRECUT DATA SAVE screen [6.7.6] .................................D-297 Precut data, writing.............................................................D-244 PROGRAM DATA MAINTENANCE screen [6.3.5]..............D-268

Index-2

ADDRESS LIST
JAPAN OFFICE ADDRESS
JAPAN DISCO CORPORATION
Japan Head Office 14-3, Higashi Kojiya 2-chome Ota-ku, Tokyo 144-8650 Phone 81-3-3743-0111 FAX 81-3-3743-5810 Phone 81-3-3743-5813 3-12, Nishi Nakajima 6-chome Yodogawa-ku, Osaka 532-0011 Phone 81-6-6302-4501 FAX 81-6-6302-0766 16-14, Kamisuizenji 2-chome Kumamoto-shi 862-0951 Phone 81-96-385-3411 FAX 81-96-384-1410 1-23, Hiro Bunka-cho Kure-shi, Hiroshima 737-0198 Phone 81-823-72-2216 FAX 81-823-74-1573 Sahan Kamisugi Bldg. 4-23, Kamisugi 3-chome Aoba-ku, Sendai-shi, Miyagi Phone 81-22-262-3345 FAX 81-22-262-3346 3rd. Floor, Center Bldg. 12, Okita-machi, 3-chome Suwa-shi, Nagano 392-0013 Phone 81-266-52-0814 FAX 81-266-52-0815 1st. Floor, Kitamura No.4 Bldg. 80, Akegaoka, Meito-ku Nagoya-shi, Aichi 465-0033 Phone 81-52-776-6350 FAX 81-52-776-6380

Overseas Sales / PS Company Osaka Branch Office

Kyushu Branch Office

Kure Regional Office

Sendai Regional Office

980-0011

Suwa Regional Office

Nagoya Regional Office

ASIA OFFICE ADDRESS


SINGAPORE DISCO HI-TEC (SINGAPORE) PTE., LTD.
Blk 2 Kaki Bukit Ave 1 #03-06/08 Kaki Bukit Industrial Estate Singapore 417938 Singapore Phone 65-7473737 FAX 65-7450266

THAILAND DISCO HI-TEC (THAILAND) CO., LTD.


16th Floor, Lao Peng Nguan Tower 1 333 Viphavadi-Rangsit Road Lard Yao, Cnatuchak Bangkok 10900, Thailand Phone 66-2-6188441 FAX 66-2-6188440

MALAYSIA DISCO HI-TEC (MALAYSIA) SDN. BHD.


21A Tingkat 1 Jalan USJ 10/1D UEP 47620 Subang Jaya Selangor, Darul Ehsan, Malaysia Phone 60-3-737-2606 FAX 60-3-737-2439 Penang Regional Office 1-02-01 Persiaran Bukit Jambul Satu Kompleks Sri Relau 11900 Penang, Malaysia Phone 60-4-644-5502 FAX 60-4-645-2285

PHILIPPINES AUROTECH SYSTEMS (Phil s), INC.


121 Buencamino Street Alabang, Muntinglupa Philippines Phone 63-2-809-0155 FAX 63-2-807-7419

KOREA D.I. CORPORATION


Disco Sales & Service Department D.I Building 58-6, Nonhyun-Dong Kangnam-ku, Seoul, Korea Phone 82-2-546-5501 FAX 82-2-3446-8087

TAIWAN HAPPY POLE, LTD.


8th Floor, 8-1, No.41 Section 2, Roosevelt Road Taipei, Taiwan R. O. C. Phone 886-22-3960651 886-22-3960652 886-22-3966717 FAX 886-22-3943943

HONG KONG (CHINA) NEW TRONICS CO., LTD.


Unit3, 22/F., Shatin 11 Plaza 11 Wo Shing Street, Fotan Shatin, N.T., Hong Kong Phone 852-26871431 FAX 852-26874283

INDIA H. FILLUNGER & CO., PVT. LTD.


Post Box No.2526 11/4, Pusa Road New Delhi 110 005 India Phone 91-11-5787428 91-11-5726052 FAX 91-11-5762961

CHINA DISCO TECHNOLOGY (Shanghai) CO., LTD.


4th Floor, Block A, FaZhan Mansion No. 51 RiJing Road WaiGaoQiao Free Trade Zone Shanghai, P. R. China 200131 Phone 86-21-58662516 FAX 86-21-58662517

MIDDLE ASIA OFFICE ADDRESS


ISRAEL DISCO HI-TEC EUROPE GmbH Israel Representative Office Inbar 43 Street P. O. Box 1021
Zikhron Ya'akov 309000 Israel Phone 972-6-6293013 FAX 972-6-6294115 Mobile Phone 972-52-473046 972-51-212313

U.S.A. OFFICE ADDRESS


U.S.A. DISCO HI-TEC AMERICA, INC. USA Head Office 3270 Scott Blvd.
Santa Clara, CA 95054-3011 U. S. A. Phone 1-408-987-3776 FAX 1-408-987-3785

Southwestern Regional Sales & Service Office

4411 South 40th Street, Suite D-5 Phoenix, AZ 85040-2950


U. S. A. Phone 1-602-431-1412 FAX 1-602-431-1437

Southeastern Regional Sales & Service Office

4460 Brookfield Corporate Drive, Suite B Chantilly, VA 20151


U. S. A. Phone 1-703-815-2727 FAX 1-703-815-3573

Eastern Regional Sales & Service Office

360 Harvey Road, Building B, Unit 202 Manchester, NH 03103


U. S. A. Phone 1-603-656-9019 FAX 1-603-656-9018

Northwest Regional Sales & Service Office

7931 SW Cirrus Drive Beaverton, OR 97008-5971 U. S. A.


Phone 1-503-644-0323 FAX 1-503-643-8108

Central Regional Sales & Service Office

900 East Park Blvd., Suite 150 Plano, TX 75074-5465


U. S. A. Phone 1-972-423-4798 FAX 1-972-881-0064

U.S.A. (Continued) JOHN CRANE & ASSOCIATES


PMB 147 34522 No. Scottsdale Road, D-8 Scottsdale, AZ 85260 U. S. A. Phone 1-480-488-9898 FAX 1-480-488-9848

LYONS & ASSOCIATES


620 Swamp Road Doylestown, PA 18901 U. S. A. Phone 1-215-345-7915 FAX 1-215-345-8089

SALES & SERVICE, INC.


17853 Santiago Blvd. Bldg. 107, Suite 333 Villa Park, CA 92861 U. S. A. Phone 1-714-637-8400 FAX 1-714-637-8451

SEMITORR MIDWEST
19175 Market Avenue Belle Plain, MN 56011 U. S. A. Phone 1-612-873-2873 FAX 1-612-873-2327

THT SALES COMPANY, INC.


13438 Floyed Circle Dallas, TX 75243 U. S. A. Phone 1-972-783-1501 FAX 1-972-783-1574

UKE ENTERPRISES, INC.


631 East Chapman Avenue P. O. BOX 1131 Orange, CA 92866 U. S. A. Phone 1-714-633-0463 FAX 1-714-639-4359

CANADA HEPAIRE PRODUCTS CORP.


P. O. Box 11026 Station "H" Nepean, Ontario Canada K2H7T8 Phone 1-613-831-3234 FAX 1-613-831-3235

EUROPE OFFICE ADDRESS


GERMANY DISCO HI-TEC EUROPE GmbH
Liebigstrasse 8 D-85551 Kirchheim b. Muenchen Germany Phone 49-89-90903-0 FAX 49-89-90903-199

Konstanz Office

Fritz-Arnold-Strasse 23
D-78467 Konstanz Germany Phone 49-7531-67226 FAX 49-7531-61339

FRANCE DISCO HI-TEC FRANCE SARL


14-16, rue Leonard-de-Vinci F-45074 Orleans Cedex 02 France Phone 33-238-493080 FAX 33-238-493089

UNITED KINGDOM DISCO HI-TEC UK LTD.


151 London Road East Grinstead/West Sussex RH19 1ET United Kingdom Phone 44-1342-313165 FAX 44-1342-313177

IN AN EVENT OF AN ACCIDENT
Be sure to contact us Immediately get in touch with the nearest DISCO or DISCO Service Office if a situation arises where an accident has occurred or might occur that involves injury or death during the operation of DISCO equipment. Sales representative Attach the business card of the DISCO sales representative you contact with, in the dotted lines below.

Attach the business card of your DISCO sales representative.

All addresses are subject to change without notice. The latest addresses are available in the internet. DISCO home page http://www.disco.co.jp/

You might also like